JP7295549B2 - game machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to gaming machines.

When the memory contents of the RAM (Random Access Memory) are initialized when the power is turned on, the main CPU (Central Processing Unit) of the main control board sends a signal to start clearing the RAM to each CPU of the lamp control board and sound control board. There is a gaming machine that outputs

Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2003-210807

Such gaming machines cannot provide a good working environment for performing setting operations.

In one aspect, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that allows setting operations in a favorable working environment.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine is provided as described below. The gaming machine includes game control means and effect control means. The game control means performs game control. The effect control means receives a command from the game control means and controls the effect means. The game control means includes information holding means, setting means, legitimacy determination means, initialization means, and notification means. The information holding means can hold information before the power shutdown. The setting means can set game performance. The validity judging means judges the validity of the information held in the information holding means when the power is turned on. The initialization means initializes the information held in the information holding means at the time of setting. The notification means notifies the performance control means by a first command that the information held in the information holding means has been initialized, and notifies the performance control means that the game performance has been set by a second command. When the validity of the information held in the information holding means is denied by the validity judging means, the third command is notified to the effect control means. The information holding means includes a game control work area and a game control stack area related to information related to game control, and a non-game control work area and a non-game control stack area related to information not related to game control. include. The legitimacy determination means determines the legitimacy of the information held in the work area for game control, and the information held in the stack area for game control, the work area for non-game control, and the stack area for non-game control are excluded from the judgment of validity. The game control means enables transition to a first control state in which the game performance can be set by the setting means when a first condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and when the second condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. can be changed to a second control state in which the information held in the information holding means can be initialized, and can be changed to a third control state in which the game performance can be confirmed when the third condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, if none of the first, second, and third conditions are satisfied, a transition to a predetermined power failure recovery state is possible, and when the end condition is satisfied in the first control state, the 1 control state can be transitioned to the second control state, and when the termination condition is satisfied in the third control state, the third control state can be transitioned to a predetermined power failure restoration state, and in the predetermined power failure restoration state, the correctness determination means provides information If the legitimacy of the information held in the holding means is denied, the game is stopped in a game stop state, and if the first condition is not satisfied even if the power is turned on again after the power is cut off. , and waits for power cutoff again in the game stop state. The effect control means includes first notification means, second notification means, and third notification means. The first notification means receives the first command and notifies, by the performance means, that the information held in the information holding means has been initialized. The second notification means receives the second command and notifies, by the performance means, that the game performance has been set. The third notification means receives the third command and uses the presentation means to provide guidance corresponding to the fact that the information held in the information holding means is abnormal.

In order to achieve the above object, a gaming machine is provided as described below. The gaming machine includes game control means and effect control means. The game control means performs game control. The effect control means receives a command from the game control means and controls the effect means. The game control means includes information holding means, setting means, legitimacy determination means, initialization means, and notification means. The information holding means can hold information before the power shutdown. The setting means can set game performance. The validity judging means judges the validity of the information held in the information holding means when the power is turned on. The initialization means initializes the information held in the information holding means at the time of setting. The notification means notifies the effect control means by a first command that the information held in the information holding means has been initialized, and controls the effect by a second command that the game performance is in a settable state. Then, when the legitimacy of the information held in the information holding means is denied by the legitimacy judging means, the effect control means is notified of the third command. The information holding means includes a game control work area and a game control stack area related to information related to game control, and a non-game control work area and a non-game control stack area related to information not related to game control. include. The legitimacy determination means determines the legitimacy of the information held in the work area for game control, and the information held in the stack area for game control, the work area for non-game control, and the stack area for non-game control are excluded from the judgment of validity. The game control means enables transition to a first control state in which the game performance can be set by the setting means when a first condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, and when the second condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. can be changed to a second control state in which the information held in the information holding means can be initialized, and can be changed to a third control state in which the game performance can be confirmed when the third condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. When the power is turned on, if none of the first, second, and third conditions are satisfied, a transition to a predetermined power failure recovery state is possible, and when the end condition is satisfied in the first control state, the 1 control state can be transitioned to the second control state, and when the termination condition is satisfied in the third control state, the third control state can be transitioned to a predetermined power failure restoration state, and in the predetermined power failure restoration state, the correctness determination means provides information If the legitimacy of the information held in the holding means is denied, the game is stopped in a game stop state, and if the first condition is not satisfied even if the power is turned on again after the power is cut off. , and waits for power cutoff again in the game stop state. The effect control means includes first notification means, second notification means, and third notification means. The first notification means receives the first command and notifies, by the performance means, that the information held in the information holding means has been initialized. The second notification means receives the second command and notifies, by the effect means, that the setting is possible. The third notification means receives the third command and uses the presentation means to provide guidance corresponding to the fact that the information held in the information holding means is abnormal.

According to one aspect, the setting operation can be performed in a favorable working environment in the gaming machine.

It is a perspective view showing an example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment. It is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment. 1 is a block diagram showing an example of a control system for a gaming machine according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a block diagram which shows an example of a structure of the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the batch display apparatus of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 3) showing a flowchart of main processing of the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the timer interruption process of 1st Embodiment. 4 is a diagram showing a flowchart of output processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of a prize-winning switch / state monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the probability setting value change process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the probability setting value confirmation process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the memory map of the game control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the payout command transmission process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the structure example of the number-of-wins counter area|region of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the starting opening switch monitoring process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of special figure starting entrance 1 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of special figure starting entrance 2 switch processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the special figure reservation information determination process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of special figure 1 game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of special figure 2 game processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of special figure 1 usual processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of special figure 2 usual processing of 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. It is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. It is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. It is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of a change start information setting process according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of a change start information setting process according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the frequency|count update process of high probability fluctuation|variation of 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 1 fluctuation of the first embodiment. It is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 1 fluctuation of the first embodiment. It is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation of the first embodiment. It is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation of the first embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 1 during special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the process transition setting process 2 during special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of processing during special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of processing during special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 3) which shows the flowchart of processing during special figure 1 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 1) which shows the flowchart of processing during special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure (the 2) which shows the flowchart of processing during special figure 2 display of 1st Embodiment. It is a diagram (part 3) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 2 display of the first embodiment. FIG. 10 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. 9 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the main process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the reception command check process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the receiving command analysis process in the production|presentation control apparatus of 1st Embodiment. 4 is a diagram illustrating an example of an outline of an information disclosure function of the first embodiment; FIG. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of information disclosure processing according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the setting process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the setting screen of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the collection process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the collection data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the tallying process of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the aggregated data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of ensuring the minimum amount of information in the aggregated data of 1st Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the output information editing process of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of in-game disclosure processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of an information disclosure screen according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of an information disclosure screen according to the first embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the setting suggestion aspect of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a flowchart of non-game disclosure processing according to the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of in-game disclosure processing according to a modification of the first embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display sequence according to the second embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the production|presentation control unit of the variable display of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program of the production|presentation control unit in the first half variation|variation of 2nd Embodiment, and a reference table group. It is a figure which shows an example of the combination of the control program of the production|presentation control unit in the sub production|presentation of 2nd Embodiment, and a reference table group. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program and a reference table group in the first half variable execution control of the second embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the control program and table selection pattern in the sub production|presentation of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the table data of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the first half production apportionment processing of 2nd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of normal loss processing of 2nd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flowchart of PB background change processing according to the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the second embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the second embodiment; FIG. 11 is a front view (No. 1) showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a front view (No. 2) showing an example of a game board of the gaming machine of the third embodiment; FIG. 10 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between items appearing from luggage and their contents in the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between items appearing in treasure chests and their contents in the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of the content of effects performed when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not pressed in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button in the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the package setting process in 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to modification 1 of the third embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to modification 1 of the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen which the display apparatus in the modification 2 of 3rd Embodiment displays. It is a timing chart which shows the flow of the production|presentation in the modification 3 of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to modification 3 of the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (Part 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to modification 3 of the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to modification 3 of the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the decorative design in the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the design used in the game state in the modification 4 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a diagram showing a comparison between the case of deriving "777" in the special figure 1 variation display game in the modification 4 of the third embodiment and the case of deriving "777" in the special figure 2 variation display game. FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device in modification 4 of the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (Part 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device in modification 4 of the third embodiment; It is a figure which shows the design used in the game state in the modification 5 of 3rd Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the comparison of two big hits in the modification 5 of 3rd Embodiment. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing the transition of the pattern mode of decorative symbols in the variable display game of Modification 6 of the third embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 12 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen according to the fourth embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen and a movable accessory according to the fifth embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen and a movable accessory in Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the modification 2 of 5th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen and a movable accessory according to modification 3 of the fifth embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the display screen of the modification 4 of 5th Embodiment, and a light-guide plate. It is an example of a timing chart showing the temporal relationship between an error display (blinking display) and an effect that hides the error display. FIG. 4 is a diagram showing a status display device as display means of the base and a storage area for the base; It is a figure which shows the example of a display by a state display apparatus. FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a command system according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a command system according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. 23 is a diagram showing an example of a change command according to the sixth embodiment; FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution table of 6th Embodiment (part 1). It is a figure which shows an example of the distribution table of 6th Embodiment (part 2). It is a figure which shows an example of the relationship table of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation distribution process of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of production distribution of the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows the flowchart of the production|presentation distribution process of the modification 1 of 6th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a perspective view (Part 1) showing an example of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a perspective view (part 2) showing an example of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the control state after the power supply is turned on in the gaming machine of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of transfer to control state S5 (game state) from control state S0 (setting change state) of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clearing in the display device of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of a notification mode of notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding RAM clearing in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a notification mode of a notification regarding a setting change and a notification regarding RAM clearing in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a notification mode of a notification regarding a setting change and a notification regarding RAM clearing in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of an output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output-controlled according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of an output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output-controlled according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. 14 is a diagram showing a flowchart of power-on notification setting processing according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of power-on notification end setting processing according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of a notification mode of RAM clear notification according to a reception condition of a RAM initialization command according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of a notification mode of RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of a notification mode of RAM clear notification according to a reception condition of a RAM initialization command according to the seventh embodiment; FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example (part 4) of a notification mode of RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command according to the seventh embodiment; It is a figure which shows an example of the control state after the power supply in the gaming machine of the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timing chart at the time of transition from control state S0 (setting change state) to control state S5 (game state) of the modification 1 of 7th Embodiment. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of an output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output-controlled according to Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 20 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of an output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output-controlled according to Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment; FIG. 21 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of an output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output-controlled according to Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment;

Hereinafter, embodiments will be described in detail with reference to the drawings.
[First Embodiment]
First, a first embodiment will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing an example of a gaming machine according to the first embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is an outer frame (support frame)
11 is assembled so as to be openable and rotatable. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12 . A glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15 having a cover glass (transparent member) 14 covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (body frame) 12 .

In addition, on the left and right of the glass frame 15, lamps, LEDs, etc. are built in inside to decorate and produce, and to notify when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a dispensing abnormality occurs, the lamps, LEDs, etc. The frame decoration device 18 that emits light for lighting (blinking) in red), and the sound (
For example, a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting sound effects is provided. moreover,
A speaker (lower speaker) 19b is also provided below the front frame 12 . Further, when an abnormality occurs, the content of the abnormality is notified by voice from the speakers 19a and 19b. note that,
A lamp may be provided at a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15 to notify the abnormal dispensing.

Further, at the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper tray (storage tray) 21 for supplying game balls to a batted ball shooting device (not shown), and game balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 are stored. An upper tray ball outlet 22 for flowing out, a lower tray (receiving tray) 23 for storing game balls paid out when the upper tray 21 is full, and an operation section 24 for a ball shooting device are provided. In addition, upper plate 2
1 is provided with an option setting section 25 for the player to set various options. A plurality of selection button switches 25 are arranged around the upper surface of the option setting section 25.
a, and a determination button switch 25b is provided in the center of the upper surface of the option setting section 25. As shown in FIG. Note that the option setting unit 25 functions as an effect setting unit for the player to set the effect mode. In this case, the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch for selecting the effect mode, and the determination button switch 25b functions as a determination button switch for determining the effect mode. Furthermore, a keyhole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 is provided on the lower right side of the front frame 12 .

In addition, when the selection button switch 25a functions as an effect button switch, the game machine 1
Based on the player's operation received from the select button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, 0 can perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened. for example,
The effect in which the player's operation is intervened includes the effect in the variable display game (decorative special figure variable display game) on the display device (variable display device) 41 (see FIG. 2). The character to be displayed can be operated, or the identification information in the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 can be stopped.

Also, on the right side of the option setting section 25, there is a ball lending button 27 operated by the player when receiving a ball lending from an adjacent ball lending machine, and a ball lending button 27 operated to eject a prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine. A discharge button 28, a balance display section (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, when the player rotates the operation section 24, the batted ball shooting device shoots the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 into the game area 32 on the front surface of the game board 30. (see Figure 2). By operating the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b, the player can set the volume emitted from the speakers 19a and 19b and the brightness of the game board 30, for example. .

Next, the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing an example of the game board of the first embodiment.
A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by guide rails 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30 . The game area 32 includes resin side cases 3 provided at the four corners of the game board 30 .
3 and a guide rail 31. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 having a display device (variable display device) 41 is arranged substantially in the center. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40 . That is, the center case 40 surrounds the display area of the display device 41 and protrudes forward from the display surface of the display device 41 to prevent game balls from jumping into the surrounding game area 32 .

The display device 41 is composed of a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (Cathode Ray Tube). In the area where the image of the display screen can be displayed (display area), information related to the game such as multiple identification information (special symbols), characters that direct the special symbol fluctuation display game, and background images that enhance the performance effect are displayed. . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variably displayed), and a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game is performed. In addition, on the display screen, images for effects based on the progress of the game (for example, a jackpot display image,
fanfare display image, ending display image, etc.) are displayed.

A board effect device 44 for effecting a game is provided on the upper part of the center case 40. - 特許庁This board effect device 44 changes the display device 4 from the state shown in FIG.
It is operable toward the center of 1.

On the right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is provided a normal pattern start gate (normal pattern start gate) 34 that provides a starting condition for the normal pattern fluctuation display game. A game ball that has won the normal pattern starting gate 34 (a game ball passing through the normal pattern starting gate 34) is detected by a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there are two general winning openings 3
5 is arranged, and one general prize winning port 35 is arranged on the lower right side of the center case 40 and on the right side of the special variable prize winning device 38 which will be described later. The game balls that have entered these general winning holes 35 are detected by a winning hole switch 35a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a starting winning opening 36 that forms a first starting winning opening (starting winning area) that provides the starting condition for the first special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 1 fluctuation display game). (start port 1) is provided. A game ball that has entered the starting winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, below the starting winning opening 36, an out opening 30a is provided for collecting game balls that have not won a prize such as a winning opening.
In addition, on the right side of the center case 40 at a lower position than the normal figure start gate 34,
A normal variable winning device 37 (first starting winning port, starting winning area) is provided to give a starting condition for the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). The normal variable winning device 37 (starting port 1) is equipped with a movable member 37b that can be converted into a state in which game balls can easily flow in by turning the upper end side in a direction in which it falls to the right. 37b is normally kept in a closed state (disadvantageous state for the player) in which game balls cannot flow in, being almost vertical.
Then, when the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the upper end side is rotated to the right by the general electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 3) as a driving device, and the normal fluctuation is performed. The winning device 37 can be changed to an open state (a state advantageous to the player) in which game balls can easily flow. A game ball that has won the normal variable prize winning device 37 is detected by the starting port 1 switch 37a (see FIG. 3). It is also possible to make it possible to win prizes even when the normal variable prize winning device 37 is closed, and make it more difficult to win prizes in the closed state than in the open state. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponds to a normal electric accessory (general electric).

A downflow path 91 through which game balls can flow down is formed on the right side of the normal variable winning device 37, and game balls that do not win the normal variable winning device 37 flow down through the downflow path 91. - 特許庁A starting winning port 92 is provided at the bottom of this flow-down path 91, and a guide portion 93 is provided below this flow-down path 91.
is provided. The guiding portion 93 has an upper surface 94 that slopes downward to the left. It is designed to guide you in the direction of

The starting winning opening 92 is a second starting winning opening (starting winning area) that gives the starting condition of the second special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game), and this starting winning opening 92 (starting opening 2) A winning game ball is detected by the starting port 2 switch 92a (see FIG. 3).

In addition, at the lower right of the center case 40 in the game area 32, there is a special variable winning device (big winning opening) 38 that can be converted between a state in which game balls are not accepted and a state in which it is easy to accept game balls depending on the result of the special figure variation display game. is set. The special variable winning device 38 includes an opening/closing member (opening/closing door) 3
8c, and depending on the result of the special figure fluctuation display game as an auxiliary game, the opening and closing member 3
8 c closes the big winning opening (disadvantageous closed state for the player) to the open state (advantageous state for the player) in which the opening/closing member 38 c retracts and can receive the game balls flowing down the game area 32 . Convert. That is, the special variable prize winning device 38 is a large prize winning opening (
Equipped with a big winning mouth), during the big hit game state (first special game state) due to the results of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the small hit game state due to the result of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game ( During the second special game state), the closed state of the large prize winning port is changed to the open state to facilitate the inflow of the game balls into the large winning port, thereby giving the player a predetermined game value (prize balls). is to be given. In addition, inside the big winning opening (winning area), a big winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 3) as a detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the big winning opening is arranged. .

Incidentally, the special variable winning device 38 may be provided with a plurality of (for example, two) large winning opening switches 38a. Also, the number of the special variable winning device 38 is not limited to one, but two may be provided. , x (see FIG. 3) may be provided as a whole.

A warp port (warp entrance) 39a is provided on the left side portion of the center case 40 . The game ball that has flowed into the warp channel from the warp port 39a rolls on the stage inside the center case 40, and a part of it is guided to the warp exit 39b. The warp exit 39b is located directly above the start winning opening 36, and the game ball guided to the warp exit 39b is pushed to the starting winning opening 36.
It becomes easier to win a prize.

In the gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment, of the game area 32 in which game balls flow down, the area to the left of the center case 40 is defined as the left area, and the area to the right of the center case 40 is defined as the right area. It is said that Then, the player adjusts the shooting momentum and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left hitting), so that the start winning opening 36 and the general winning opening 35 (the general winning opening on the right side of the special variable winning device 38) 35) can be aimed at, and by launching a game ball to the right game area (so-called right hitting), a normal figure start gate 34, a normal variable winning device 37,
It is possible to aim for a prize in the special variable prize winning device 38 or the like.

In addition, outside the game area 32 (here, the lower right part of the game board 30), there are the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game that constitute the special figure fluctuation display game, and the normal figure start gate 34. A collective display device 50 that displays a normal figure variation display game triggered by winning a prize and displays various information
is provided.

The collective display device 50 includes a round display unit 51 composed of an LED or the like, a special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, a special figure 1 design display unit 53, a special figure 2 design display unit 54, and a general design design display unit. 55, a normal map reservation display section 56, and a state display section 57 (see FIG. 5). Details of the collective display device 50 will be described later.

Next, the control system of the gaming machine will be explained using FIG. FIG. 3 is a block diagram showing an example of the gaming machine control system of the first embodiment.
The game machine 10 includes a game control device 100. The game control device 100 is a main control device (main board) for overall control of the game, and includes a game microcomputer (hereinafter referred to as a game microcomputer) 111. A CPU (Central Processing Unit) unit 110 having an input port 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port, a driver, etc., and a CPU
It consists of a data bus 140 and the like connecting between the unit 110, the input unit 120 and the output unit 130. FIG.

The CPU unit 110 includes a game microcomputer 111 called an amusement chip (IC (Integrated Circuit)) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator. An oscillation circuit (
crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control device 100 and electronic components such as solenoids and motors driven by the game control device 100 are powered by DC (Di
rect current) 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V, etc. are supplied to enable operation.

The power supply device 400 is an AC (
Alternating Current)-DC converter or DC32V voltage to DC12V, DC5V
A normal power supply unit 4 having a DC-DC converter or the like that generates a lower level DC voltage such as
10, a backup power supply unit 420 that supplies power supply voltage to the internal RAM (random access memory) of the game microcomputer 111 at the time of power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and the game control device 100 is provided with power failure occurrence and recovery. A control signal generator 430 or the like is provided for generating and outputting a control signal such as a power outage monitoring signal or a reset signal.

In the first embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the game control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control device 100, that is, , may be provided on the main substrate. game board 30
And the game control device 100 is to be replaced when the model is changed. By providing the , it is possible to remove it from the object of replacement and to reduce the cost.

The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured with one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is the gaming microcomputer 111 (
In particular, the data is supplied to the built-in RAM), and the data stored in the RAM is retained even during a power failure or after the power is turned off. Control signal generating section 430 monitors the voltage of 32 V generated by normal power supply section 410, for example, and when it drops below 17 V, for example, detects the occurrence of a power failure, changes the power failure monitoring signal, and after a predetermined time, reset signal. to output Also, when the power is turned on or when the power is restored, the reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112 . This R
When the AM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, based on which the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is the gaming microcomputer 1
It is read repeatedly in the main loop of the main program executed by 11. A reset signal is a kind of forced interrupt signal and resets the entire control system.

Also, the game control device 100 is provided with a setting value change switch 126 and a setting key switch 127 . Setting value change switch 126 is, for example, a push switch, and detects a pressing operation. The setting key switch 127 allows switching between an ON state and an OFF state by inserting a setting key. The game control device 100 can change the settings related to the game performance, and the settings stored in the RAM are retained even during a power failure or after the power is cut off. For example, the game control device 100 can change the hit probability of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game according to the setting of 6 stages.

The game control device 100 transitions the control state to a setting change mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be changed when the power is turned on with the setting key switch 127 in the ON state and the RAM initialization switch 112 in the ON state. For example, the game control device 100 can cyclically change settings 1 to 6 by detecting a pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 while displaying the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting change mode. The probability setting value display device 136 is a display device capable of displaying a setting value.
D and mounted on the board.

Also, the game control device 100 shifts the control state to a setting confirmation mode in which the setting of the game machine 10 can be confirmed when the power is turned on while the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state and the RAM initialization switch 112 is in the OFF state. . For example, the game control device 100 displays the setting contents on the probability setting value display device 136 in the setting confirmation mode.

The game microcomputer 111 has a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A.
, a read-only ROM (Read Only Memory) 111B and an RA that can be read and written at any time
Equipped with M111C.

The ROM 111B nonvolatilely stores immutable information for game control (programs, fixed data, judgment values of various random numbers, etc.), and the RAM 111C is a work area for the CPU 111A during game control or a storage area for various signals and random values. used as ROM 111B or R
An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as EEPROM (Electrically Erasable Programmable ROM) may be used as the AM 111C.

Further, the ROM 111B stores a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines, for example, the execution time of the special figure variation display game, the content of the effect, the presence or absence of the ready-to-win state, and the like. The variation pattern table stores variation pattern random number 1, variation pattern random number 2, and variation pattern random number 3 stored as starting memory in CPU 111A.
is a table for determining a variation pattern with reference to. The variation pattern table includes a winning variation pattern table selected when the result is a win, a big hit variation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Furthermore, these pattern tables include tables for determining the second half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.)
, Contains a table (first half fluctuation group table, first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining the first half fluctuation pattern, which is the fluctuation pattern before reaching the reach state.

Here, reach (reach state) means that the display device has a display device whose display state can be changed, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the game state becomes a game state (special game state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is set, at the stage where some of the plurality of display results have not yet been derived and displayed. A display state in which a display result that is derived and displayed satisfies the conditions for becoming a special result mode. In other words, the ready-to-reach state means that even when the variable display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, the display conditions for the special result mode are not met. It refers to a display mode that does not have And, for example, a state in which variable display is performed in a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining a state in which the special result modes are uniform (so-called all-rotation reach) is also included in the reach state. In addition, the reach state is a display state at the time when the display control of the display device progresses and reaches the stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. It means a display state when at least some of the display results of a plurality of variable display areas that are present satisfy the conditions for the special result mode.

Therefore, for example, the decorative special figure variation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special figure variation display game changes the plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas on the display device. After displaying, if the variable display is stopped in the order of left, right, and middle to display the result mode, the condition for the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state in which the variable display is stopped with the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display of all the variable display areas is temporarily stopped, any two of the left, middle, and right variable display areas satisfy the condition for the special result mode (for example, the same The state of the identification information (excluding the special result mode) may be set as the ready-to-win state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from this ready-to-win state.

This ready-to-reach state includes a plurality of ready-to-reach effects, and as ready-to-reach effects with different possibilities of deriving special result modes (different expected values), normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 Reach (SP2 Reach), Special 3
Reach (SP3 Reach) and Premier Reach are set. The expected value is higher in the order of "no reach"<"normalreach"<"special 1 reach"<"special 2 reach"<"special 3 reach"<"premierreach". Moreover, this ready-to-reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special figure variable display game (when a big hit is achieved). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode when it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special figure variable display game (when it is lost). Therefore, the state in which the ready-to-win state occurs is a state with a higher possibility of winning a big hit than the case in which the ready-to-win state does not occur.

The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate a control signal (command) for the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300, or to generate and output a drive signal for a solenoid or a display device. 10 overall control. In addition, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 generates a jackpot random number for determining a hit in the special figure variation display game, a jackpot pattern random number for determining the jackpot pattern, and a variation pattern (various types) in the special figure variation display game. Random number generation circuit for generating variation pattern random numbers for determining reach and execution time of variation display game in variation display without reach, hit random numbers for determining hit of normal figure variation display game, etc. and an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113
A clock generator is provided for generating a timer interrupt signal with a predetermined period (for example, 4 milliseconds (ms)) for the CPU 111A and a clock for updating the random number generation circuit.

In addition, the CPU 111A uses the ROM 111B in processing related to the special figure variation display game.
Any one variation pattern table is acquired from among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the . Specifically, the CPU 111A determines the game result of the special figure variation display game (hit (big hit or small win) or loss) and the probability state of the special figure variation display game as the current game state (normal probability state or high probability state), the operating state of the normal variable winning device 37 as the current gaming state (time-saving operating state), the number of starting memories, etc., from among a plurality of variation pattern tables, any one variation pattern table is selected. to get. where CP
U111A constitutes variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in ROM 111B when executing a special figure variation display game.

The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, and the like. is driven to perform control for paying out prize balls. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit of the ball lending machine attached to the game machine 10,
Perform control for paying out the rental balls.

The input unit 120 of the game microcomputer 111 includes the starting opening 1 switch 36 in the starting winning opening 36
a, the starting port 1 switch 37a in the normal variable winning device 37, the starting port 2 switch 92a in the starting winning port 92, the gate switch 34a in the normal starting gate 34, the winning port switch 35a,
It is connected to the big winning opening switch 38a of the special variable winning device 38, and a negative logic signal such as a high level of 11V and a low level of 7V supplied from these switches is input, and 0V-
An interface chip (proximity I/F) 121 that converts to a 5V positive logic signal is provided. The proximity I/F 121 also receives a detection signal from a board radio wave sensor 62 that detects the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine 10 . In addition, the proximity I/F 121 has an input range of 7V to 11V, which prevents the lead wires of sensors and proximity switches from being improperly shorted, removed from connectors, or lead wires cut off. An abnormal state such as floating can be detected, and an abnormality detection signal is output.

In addition, when explaining the winning opening switch 35a, the winning opening switch 35a is 1 in FIG.
, but actually a plurality (N) of winning opening switches 35a (three in the present embodiment) are provided on the game board 30, and the signals of the respective switches are adjacent to each other through different signal lines. I
/F121. Also, in FIG. 3, the large winning opening switch 38a is shown as one block, but actually a plurality of (X) large winning opening switches 38a (three blocks in this embodiment)
) are provided on the game board 30 . And these plurality of big winning opening switches 38a
Either connected by different signal lines, or, for example, the switch and the game control device 10
It is connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR on a relay board (not shown) existing between 0 (main board). The board radio wave sensor 62 and the later-described magnetic sensor 61 may also be connected by a plurality of different signal lines, or may be similarly connected to the game control device 100 by a method called wired OR.

The output of the proximity I/F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . In addition, the proximity I/F
Among the outputs of 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a, the starting port 2 switch 92a, the gate switch 34a, the prize winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a are input to the second input port 123. In addition, the signal output (output from the proximity I/F 121) of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a, which are the starting port switches of Special Figure 1, is shown by one signal line in FIG. There are two

Among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121 , the detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and the abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or switch is detected are input to the third input port 124 . Further, the third input port 124 receives the detection signal of the fraud detection magnetic sensor 61 provided on the front frame 12 of the game machine 10 or the like, and the glass frame open detection switch provided on the glass frame 15 or the like of the game machine 10. 63 detection signal, detection signal of the main body frame open detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main body frame) 12 of the game machine 10, detection signal of the setting value change switch 126, detection signal of the setting key switch 127, RAM initialization A detection signal from the change switch 112 is input.

In addition, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the game control device 100 through the relay board 70 to a test fire test device (not shown). Furthermore, among the outputs of the proximity I/F 121, the detection signals of the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a and the starting port 2 switch 92a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123. there is

As described above, the proximity I/F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I/F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage of 5 V required for normal IC operation from the power supply device 400. It's becoming

The data held by the second input port 123 is obtained by asserting an enable signal CE (Chip Enable) (not shown) by decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 by the gaming microcomputer 111. can be read out by changing The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave illegal signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by a frame radio wave sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payout control device 200 is ready to accept commands), abnormal payout status signal (status signal indicating abnormal payout), shot ball out switch signal (signal indicating shortage of game balls before payout), overflow switch signal (signal output when it is detected that a predetermined amount or more of game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 (filled)), touch switch signal (input of the touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided for taking in an out-ball detection switch signal (a signal output when an out-ball is detected) and supplying it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via a data bus 140 .

The out-ball detection switch signal is a signal output from an out-sensor (not shown) each time it detects one out-ball of the gaming machine 10 . For example, the out ball detection switch signal is provided in a discharge channel (not shown) between a discharge port (not shown) for discharging game balls (out balls) from the gaming machine 10 and the out port 30a. The out-ball detection switch signal is a gaming performance per predetermined operation (eg, 60,000 out-balls) (eg
base), and the calculated game performance is displayed on the state display device 135. FIG. Note that the out ball detection switch signal may be input to the effect control device 300 .
In that case, the out-ball detection switch signal may be used for determination of an operating state, etc., which is a trigger for switching to a game presentation or a customer waiting screen display. For example, the status display device 135 is a 4-digit 7-segment LED, and can display gaming performance in decimal or hexadecimal.

Also, the game machine 10 may be provided with a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration, and the detection signal of this vibration sensor switch may be input to the first input port 122 or the third input port 124 .

In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as power failure monitoring signals and reset signals from the power supply device 400 to the game microcomputer 111 and the like. It has the function of removing noise from the signal. A power failure monitoring signal from the power supply 400 and an initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140 . That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving signals from the outside provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise has been removed by the Schmidt buffer 125 is
It is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the game microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output section 130 . In addition, the reset signal RESET is output directly to the relay board 70 without going through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test-firing test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test-firing test apparatus. is configured to again,
The reset signal RESET may be configured to be output to the test-firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 . Note that the reset signal RESET is not supplied to the first to third input ports 122 , 123 and 124 of the input section 120 . The data set to each port of the output section 130 by the game microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input must be reset to prevent malfunction of the system. This is because the data read by the game microcomputer 111 from each port is discarded when the game microcomputer 111 is reset.

The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmidt buffer 132 arranged on a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the game microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200 . Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, the serial communication from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 is one-way communication in which a signal cannot be input to the game control device 100 from the effect control device 300 side.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data for notifying the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a trial shooting test device of an accredited organization (not shown), a signal indicating the probability state of the big hit, etc. via the relay board 70. A buffer 133 for output is configured to be mountable. This buffer 133 is a part that is not mounted on a game control device (main board) of a pachinko game machine as an actual machine (mass-produced product) installed in amusement arcades. It should be noted that detection signals of switches that do not need to be processed, such as starting switches, output from the proximity I/F 121 are supplied to the test firing test apparatus via the relay board 70 without passing through the buffer 133 .

On the other hand, detection signals such as the magnetic sensor 61 and board radio wave sensor 62, which cannot be directly supplied to the test firing test device, are temporarily taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information so that, for example, the gaming machine can play the game. An error signal indicating the uncontrollable state is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 to the test-firing apparatus.
The relay board 70 is provided with a port for taking in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplying it to the test firing test apparatus, a connector for relaying the signal line of the detection signal of the switch not via the buffer, and the like. ing. The game microcomputer 11 is connected to the port on the relay board 70.
A chip enable signal CE (not shown) output from 1 is also supplied, and signals of ports selectively controlled by this chip enable signal CE are supplied to the test-firing test apparatus.

Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140, and includes opening/closing data of the special winning opening solenoid 38b for opening and closing the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable winning apparatus 38 (large winning opening), and opening/closing data of the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning apparatus 37. A first output port 134a is provided for outputting open/close data of the general-purpose solenoid 37c for opening/closing and display data of the status display device 135. As shown in FIG. Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a second output port 134b for outputting display data of the probability set value display device 136 . In addition, the output unit 130 includes the batch display device 5
Depending on the contents displayed in 0, the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected is turned on/off.
A third output port 134c for outputting OFF data and a fourth output port 134d for outputting ON/OFF data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of the collective display device 50 is connected are provided.

In addition, the output unit 130 outputs information related to the gaming machine 10 such as jackpot information to the external information terminal board 71 .
A fifth output port 134e is provided for outputting to. The external information terminal board 71 includes:
A photorelay is provided and can be connected to, for example, an external device (information collection terminal, game hall internal management device (hall computer), etc.) installed in amusement arcade, and information about the game machine 10 is transmitted to the external device via the photorelay. can be supplied to Part of the information supplied to the external device is output from the fourth output port 134d. Also, a launch permission signal is output to the payout control device 200 via the Schmidt buffer 132 from the fifth output port 134e.

Further, the output unit 130 includes a first driver (driving circuit) 138a that receives opening/closing data signals of the large winning opening solenoid 38b and the general electric solenoid 37c output from the first output port 134a and generates and outputs a solenoid driving signal. , a second driver 138b that outputs an ON/OFF drive signal for the segment line on the current supply side of the collective display device 50 that is output from the third output port 134c, and the current of the collective display device 50 that is output from the fourth output port 134d. A third driver 138c for outputting an on/off drive signal for the lead-in side digit line, a fifth output port 1
Display data of the status display device 135 output from the first output port 134a; A fifth driver 138e is provided for receiving the signal and generating and outputting a drive signal for the status display device 135 .

DC 32V is supplied from the power supply device 400 as a power supply voltage to the first driver 138a so as to drive a solenoid operating at 32V. Also, the second driver 138b that drives the segment lines of the collective display device 50 is supplied with DC 12V. The third driver 138c, which drives the digit lines, draws current from the digit lines according to display data, so the power supply voltage may be either 12V or 5V.

A second driver 138b that outputs 12 V supplies a current to the anode terminal of the LED through a segment line, and a third driver 138c that outputs a ground potential draws current from the cathode terminal through the segment line. A power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in , and the LEDs are lit. The fourth driver 138d that outputs the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with DC 12V in order to give the external information signal a level of 12V. Note that the buffer 133, the first output port 134a, the first driver 138a, etc.
The output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, may be provided on the relay board 70 side instead of the main board. Also, the state display device 135, or the fifth driver 138e and the state display device 135 may be provided on the output section 130 of the game control device 100, that is, not on the main board but on the side of an external board (not shown). .

Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to an external inspection device 490 . photo coupler 139
is configured to enable two-way communication so that the game microcomputer 111 can transmit and receive data to and from the inspection device 490 by serial communication. For the avoidance of doubt, the transmission and reception of such data shall be
Since the serial communication terminals of the gaming microcomputer 111 are used in the same manner as a general-purpose microprocessor, ports such as the first to third input ports 122, 123, and 124 are not provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG. FIG. 4 is a block diagram showing an example of the configuration of the production control device of the first embodiment.
The effect control device 300 is an amusement chip (IC
), and a VDP (Video Display Processor) 312 as a graphic processor that performs image processing for video display on the display device 41 according to commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311. , a sound source LSI 31 for controlling the output of sounds for reproducing various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.
4.

The main control microcomputer 311 stores programs executed by the CPU and various data.
PROM 321 consisting of ROM (programmable read only memory), RAM 322 providing a work area, and FeRAM (which can retain memory contents even if power is not supplied at the time of a power failure).
Ferroelectric RAM) 323, and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 that constitutes timekeeping means for generating information indicating the current date and time (year, month, day of the week, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM 311a that provides a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. FIG. A WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311 . The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes a command (effect command) from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the content of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 on the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 on the reproduction sound, and instructs the decoration lamp. lighting, motor and solenoid drive control,
It executes processing such as management of performance time.

The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a that provides a work area, and a scaler 312b that enlarges and reduces images. The VDP 312 also has an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM 326 used to develop and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325.
is connected.

Although not particularly limited, the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 are configured to transmit and receive data in parallel. Sending and receiving data in parallel allows commands and data to be sent in a shorter time than in serial mode.

From VDP 312 to main control microcomputer 311, a vertical synchronizing signal VSYN for synchronizing the image of display device 41 with lighting of decoration lamps provided on glass frame 15 and game board 30 is transmitted.
C. Synchronization signal STS that provides data transmission timing is input. Note that VDP312
to the main control microcomputer 311. Interrupt signals INT0 to n to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing to the VRAM, and a wait to notify that it is waiting for reception of commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 Signals such as WAIT are also input.

The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (Low Voltage Differential Signaling: small amplitude signal transmission) method. From the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, video data, horizontal synchronizing signal HSY
NC and a vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input, and the video generated by the VDP 312 is displayed on the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313 .

An audio ROM 327 storing audio data is connected to the sound source LSI 314 .
The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address/data bus 340 . Also, an interrupt signal I
NT is to be input. The performance control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier or the like for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12 . The resulting voice is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b through the amplifier circuit 337. FIG.

Also, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I/F) 331 for receiving commands transmitted from the game control device 100 . Via this command I / F 331, the decoration special figure pending number command, the decoration special figure command, the variation command, the stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the production control device 300 are transmitted to the production control command signal (production command ). Game microcomputer 111 of game control device 100
operates at DC5V, and since the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC3.3V, the command I/F 331 is provided with a signal level conversion function.

In addition, the effect control device 300 includes a board decoration LE that drives and controls a board decoration device 46 having LEDs (light emitting diodes) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40).
A D control circuit 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15, a game board 30 (a center case 40 is ) provided in the board production device 44 (for example, a movable accessory or the like that enhances the production effect in cooperation with the production display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 that drive and control lamps, motors, solenoids, etc. are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via an address/data bus 340 . It should be noted that the glass frame 15 may be provided with a frame effect device having a driving source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect), and may be provided with a frame effect movable body control circuit for driving and controlling the frame effect device. good.

Furthermore, the production control device 300 includes a selection button switch 25a and a decision button switch 25b of the option setting unit 25 provided on the glass frame 15, and a production accessory switch for detecting the initial position of the motor in the board production device 44. 47 (production motor switch) function to detect the ON / OFF state and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and the production control device 300
A switch input circuit 336 having a function of detecting the state of a volume control switch 335 provided in the main control microcomputer 311 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 is the production control device 300 having the configuration as described above.
32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs, 32 VDC for driving motors and solenoids, and 12 VDC for driving motors and LEDs. DC5, which is the power supply voltage of the command I/F 331
In addition to V, it is configured to generate a voltage of DC 15V for driving motors, LEDs, and speakers. Furthermore, when using an LSI that operates at a low voltage such as 3.3V or 1.2V as the main control microcomputer 311, DC3.3V is used based on DC5V.
The effect control device 300 is provided with a DC-DC converter for generating DC 1.2V. Note that the DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply section 410 .

A reset signal generated by the control signal generator 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to reset the device. Also, VDP 312 (VDRESET signal), tone generator LSI 314
and an amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal), and control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET signal) for driving and controlling lamps, motors, etc., to reset them. A cooling FAN 45 for cooling various parts of the game machine 10 is connected to the performance control device 300, and the cooling FAN 45 is driven when the performance control device 300 is powered on. Also, the circuit board that constitutes the effect control device 300 corresponds to a sub-control board (also referred to as a sub-board).

Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described.
In the CPU 111A of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100, the normal figure start gate 3
Based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in 4, the random number for the hit judgment of the normal pattern is extracted and compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the normal pattern fluctuation display game is displayed. A process of judging hit or miss is performed. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the general pattern display unit 55 of the collective display device 50, processing for displaying the normal pattern variation display game to be stopped and displayed is performed. When the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a win, the normal pattern display unit 55 displays a special result mode corresponding to each of the first to third hit stop symbols, and the general electric solenoid 37c. to open the movable member 37b of the normal variable winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control device 100 serves as conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). In addition, when the result of the normal pattern variation display game is a loss, the normal pattern display unit 55 is controlled to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, the start winning (
start memory), based on this start memory, a random number value for judging the jackpot of the first special figure variation display game is extracted, compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B, and the first special figure variation display game is extracted. A process of judging hit or miss is performed. In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the starting opening 2 switch 92a provided in the starting winning opening 92, the starting memory is stored, and based on this starting memory, the second special figure fluctuation display game big hit determination random Extract the numerical value and store it in the ROM 111
It is compared with the judgment value stored in B, and the process of judging hit/loss of the second special figure variation display game is performed.

Then, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs a control signal (production control command, production command) including the determination results of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game to the production control device 300. do. Then, after the identification pattern (identification information) is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 of the collective display device 50, the process of displaying the special figure variation display game that is stopped and displayed. do That is, the game control device 100, starting winning area of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 (starting winning opening 36, normal variable winning device 37,
It constitutes game control means for controlling the progress of the variable display game based on the winning to the starting winning port 92).

Also, in the performance control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 performs processing for displaying a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, in the production control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the setting of the production state, the sound output from the speakers 19a and 19b, the processing of controlling the light emission of various LEDs, and the like are performed. In other words, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling effects related to games (such as variable display games).

Then, when the result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode or the small win result mode in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 or the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54. is displayed, and processing for generating a special game state or a small winning game state (that is, processing for executing a special game or a small winning game) is performed. In the process of generating a special game state when the result of the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game results in a big hit, the CPU 111A, for example, controls the special variation winning device 38 by operating the big winning opening solenoid 38b. The opening/closing member 38c is opened, and control is performed to enable the inflow of game balls into the big winning opening. In this special game state, the CPU 111A determines that either a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 9) win the big winning opening or a predetermined openable time elapses after the opening of the big winning opening. It is assumed that one round is to open the big winning opening until it is achieved, and control (cycle game) is performed to continue (repeated) this for a predetermined number of rounds. In addition, a small win game state is generated when the result of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) or the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) is a small win. In the processing, the CPU 111A, for example, opens the opening/closing member 38c of the special variable winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and performs control to enable the inflow of game balls into the big winning opening.

The opening/closing operation pattern (opening/closing operation mode) of the big winning opening performed in these small winning game states is, for example, to keep the opening/closing member open for 200 msec four times at intervals of 1500 msec. In this manner, the game control device 100 serves as a large winning opening opening/closing control means for controlling opening and closing of the large winning opening when the stop result mode becomes the special result mode. Further, when the result of the special figure variation display game is lost, the CPU 111A controls the special figure 1 symbol display portion 53 and the special figure 2 symbol display portion 54 of the collective display device 50 to display the result mode of the loss.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the special game state ends based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. This high-probability state is
It is a state in which the probability of winning results in the special figure variation display game is higher than in the normal probability state.
In addition, even if a high probability state is reached based on the result mode of either the first special figure variation display game or the second special figure variation display game, the first special figure variation display game and the second special figure Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a time-saving state (specific game state, general-purpose high-probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is set to a high probability (normal pattern high probability state) higher than 0, which is the normal probability (normal pattern low probability state). is possible. As a result, the opening time of the normal variable winning device 37 per unit time is increased more than when the normal variable winning device 37 is in the normal low probability state. Here, in the normal variable winning device 37 in this embodiment, the normal pattern probability is set to "0" so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal game state.

In addition, in the time saving state, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (normal electric open time) and the number of times of opening (for example,
500 ms x 1 time), the opening time of the second hit stop pattern (electrical open time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 1700 ms x 2 times), the open time of the third hit stop pattern (electrical open time) and opening number of times (
For example, it is possible to set it to be 1700 ms×3 times).

In addition, the execution time of the normal pattern fluctuation display game, the normal pattern stop time, the number of times the normal pattern is opened, and the normal pattern open time are set appropriately so as to control the normal pattern fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 to the time saving operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (ordinary figure fluctuation time) of the above-mentioned normal figure fluctuation display game to be the second fluctuation display time shorter than the first fluctuation display time. (eg 10000 ms is 1000 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the normal pattern stop time for displaying the result of the normal pattern fluctuation display game to be a second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms 70
4 ms). In addition, in the time saving state, when the normal fluctuation display game results in a winning result and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (general electric open time) is set to the normal state (normal low probability state). It is possible to control the second opening time to be longer than one opening time (eg 100 ms to 1352 ms). In addition, in the time-saving state, the number of openings of the normal fluctuation prize winning device 37 (the number of openings of the general electric power) is greater than the first number of openings (for example, two times) for one winning result of the normal figure fluctuation display game. It is possible to set a second opening number of times (eg, four times). In addition, in the time-saving state, the probability of winning the normal pattern fluctuation display game (normal pattern probability) is changed to the normal probability in the case of the normal operation state (normal pattern low probability state, for example, 1/
251), it is possible to have a higher probability (normal pattern high probability state, for example, 250/251).

In the time saving state, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened by changing one or more of the normal pattern fluctuation time, the normal pattern stop time, the normal pattern opening number of times, the normal pattern opening time, and the normal pattern probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. It is also possible to set a plurality of types of time-saving states with different things to be changed. Alternatively, either the first opening mode or the second opening mode may be selected when a win is achieved. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first open mode and the second open mode may be different. Moreover, the high probability state and the time saving state can be generated independently of each other, both can be generated at the same time, or only one of them can be generated. In addition, the time saving state is the normal electricity support state (under normal electricity support or during electricity support)
can also be called

Next, the configuration of the collective display device will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 5 is a diagram showing an example of a batch display device according to the first embodiment. The collective display device 50 includes 7-segment LED_d1 and 7-segment LED_d2, and 16 LEDs from LED_d3 to LED_d18.
Have D. The collective display device 50 includes a 7-segment LED_d1 and a 7-segment LED_d
2, and LED_d3 to LED_d18 display various states.

Collective display device 50, by allocating various status display functions to 7-segment LED_d1 and 7-segment LED_d2, and LED_d3 to LED_d18, round display unit 51, special figure 1 reserved display unit 52, and special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 , a special figure 2 pattern display part 54, a normal figure pattern display part 55, a general figure reservation display part 56, a state display part 57, and a special figure 2 reservation display part 58. The round display unit 51 includes four LEDs, LED_d3 to LED_d6.
The number of rounds in the special game is displayed by the lighting mode of . The special figure 1 pending display unit 52 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 1 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d11 and LED_d12. The special figure 1 pattern display unit 53 has 8 L of 7 segment LED_d1
The pattern in the special figure 1 game is displayed by the lighting mode of the ED (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED). The special figure 2 design display unit 54 displays the design in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of the 8 LEDs (7 segment LEDs and 1 dot LED) of the 7 segment LED_d2. The general pattern display unit 55 displays the patterns in the general pattern game by lighting modes of three LEDs, LED_d8, LED_d10, and LED_d18. The normal-pattern reservation display unit 56 displays the number of reserves in the normal-pattern game by the lighting modes of the two LEDs, LED_d15 and LED_d16. The state display unit 57 displays LED_d7, LE
The game state in the special figure game is displayed by the lighting modes of the three LEDs D_d9 and LED_d17. The special figure 2 reservation display unit 58 displays the number of reservations in the special figure 2 game by the lighting mode of two LEDs, LED_d13 and LED_d14.

The control of the gaming machine that performs such games will be described below. First, the control executed by the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly consists of main processing shown in FIGS. 6 to 8 and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be explained. FIG. 6 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of main processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 7 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 8 is a diagram (part 3) showing a flowchart of the main processing of the first embodiment. The main process is a process executed by the game control unit (CPU 111A).

Main processing is started when the power is turned on. In this main process, FIG.
As shown in FIG. 8, first, processing for prohibiting interrupts (step S1) is performed, and then a stack pointer for setting a stack pointer, which is the top address of an area where values such as registers are saved when an interrupt occurs. A setting process (step S2) is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and RA is set to a predetermined register (for example, D register).
The upper address of the M start address is set (step S4). For the first embodiment,
The range of addresses in the RAM 111C is 0000h to 01FFh, with 00h or 01h being the higher order. In step S4, the leading 0 in the address range of the RAM 111C
Set 0h.

Next, a firing stop signal is output to set the firing permission signal to a prohibited state (step S5).
. The launch permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 is outputting a firing stop signal, and the shooting of game balls is prohibited.

After that, the state of input port 3 (third input port 124) is read (step S6),
Processing for setting a power-on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, by setting a predetermined initial value, sub-control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) for performing various controls according to instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means A waiting time (eg, 3 seconds) is set to wait for the program to start successfully. As a result, when the power is turned on, if the game control device 100 starts up first and the command is sent to the slave control device before the slave control device (for example, the payout control device 200 or the effect control device 300) starts up, and the slave control device can avoid missing commands. That is, the game control device 100 delays the start of the main control means (game control device 100) when the power is turned on, and waits for the start of the sub-control device (payout control device 200, effect control device 300, etc.). It constitutes waiting means for setting a waiting time.

Also, the timing of the power-on delay timer is used to determine the validity of the data held in the RAM area (
This is performed using a storage area not subject to checksum calculation (RAM area, registers, etc. not subject to validity determination). As a result, when calculating check data such as a checksum of the RAM area, it is not necessary to exclude a part of the RAM area from the calculation, so that the control at power-on can be prevented from becoming complicated.

An initialization switch signal is input to the third input port 124. By reading the state of the third input port 124 before the start of the standby time, the RAM initialization switch 112 can be operated. can be reliably detected. That is, if the state of the RAM initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the RAM initialization switch 112 may be operated after the standby time has elapsed, or the RAM initialization switch may be changed from power-on until the standby time has elapsed. 11
It is necessary to continue to operate 2. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power, and the initialization operation performed at the time of turning on the power will be detected. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the

A detection signal from the set value change switch 126 and a detection signal from the setting key switch 127 are input to the third input port 124, and the state of the third input port 124 is detected before the standby time starts. By reading, the operation of the setting value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 can be reliably detected. That is, after the waiting time has elapsed, the set value change switch 1
26 and the setting key switch 127, the set value change switch 126 and the setting key switch 127 are operated after waiting for the elapse of the standby time, or the set value change switch 126 is operated from power-on until the elapse of the standby time. And the setting key switch 127 needs to be operated continuously. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, even if you do not perform such a troublesome operation, it will be detected by performing an operation immediately after turning on the power. It is possible to prevent a situation in which a setting confirmation operation cannot be accepted.

Next, processing for setting a power-on delay timer (for example, about 3 seconds) (step S7)
After that, the process of measuring the standby time and monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the standby time (steps S8 to S12) is performed. First, the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read through the port and the data bus and the number of times (for example, two times) is set (step S8) to check whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. A determination is made (step S9).

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10).
. Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S1
0; N) is returned to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitor signal is on (step S9). Further, when the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y),
In other words, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the game machine 10 waits for the power supply to be cut off. In this way, by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise, etc., and appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. be able to.

That is, the game control device 100 serves as power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of power failure during a predetermined waiting time. As a result, it is possible to cope with a power failure that occurs during the period in which the activation of the game control device 100, which constitutes the main control means, is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately deal with problems that occur when the power is turned on. Note that access to the RAM 111C is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the memory contents at the time of the previous power shutdown are still retained.
When a power failure occurs here, there is no need to perform backup processing or the like. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the standby time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM 111C, and the burden of control can be reduced.

On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if no power failure has occurred, the power-on delay timer is updated by "-1" (step S11), and the value of the timer changes to "0". ” (step S12). If the timer value is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). Moreover, when the value of the timer is "0" (step S12; Y), that is, when the waiting time has ended, the RAM 111C
, EEPROM or other readable and writable RWM (Read Write Memory) is permitted (step S13), and off data is output to all output ports (set to no output state) (step S14).

Next, the serial port (a port pre-installed in the game microcomputer 111,
In this first embodiment, use for communication with the production control device 300 and the payout control device 200) is set (step S15), and the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 1 ( For example, 5Ah) is determined (step S16).

If the value of power failure inspection area 1 is normal (step S16; Y), it is determined whether the value of power failure inspection area 2 in RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data 2 (for example, A5h). (Step S17), if the value of power failure inspection area 2 is normal (Step S17; Y
), a checksum calculation process for calculating the checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (step S1
8).

In addition, in the checksum calculation process, the data of the work area for game control and the data of the work area for status display may be calculated as a checksum, or the data of the work area for game control and the work area for status display The checksum may be calculated separately from the data of the area, or the checksum may be calculated only from the data of the work area for game control. The work area for game control is a work area used for game control among the storage areas in the RWM. The work area for status display is a work area used for status display among the storage areas in the RWM.

Next, it is determined whether or not the checksum calculated in step S18 and the checksum at the time of power failure match (step S19). If the checksums match (step S19; Y)
sets the RAM clear top address 2 as the top address for RAM clear (step S20). The RAM clear head address 2 is an address that excludes the probability setting value from being cleared.

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed from the state of the third input port 124 (
step S21). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S21; Y), proceed to step S50 (see FIG. 8), and if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S21; N),
Proceed to step S22.

Next, it is determined whether or not the body frame (front frame) 12 is in the open state from the state of the third input port 124 (step S22). When the body frame 12 is in the open state (step S22; Y
), the process proceeds to step S23, and if the body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S22; N)
goes to step S24.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23). If the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S23; Y), the process proceeds to step S50, and if the setting key switch 127 is not ON (step S23; N), the process proceeds to step S24.

Next, it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24). When the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (
At step S24; Y), the process proceeds to step S56, and when the set value change switch 126 is not in the ON state (step S24; N), the process proceeds to step S25.

Next, it is determined whether or not the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON based on the state of the third input port 124 (step S25). If the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON (step S25; Y), the process proceeds to step S59, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned ON.
If it is not in the N state (step S25; N), the process advances to step S26 (FIG. 7) to perform the processing for the normal recovery from the power failure.

If it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or if the checksum is not normal (step S1
9; If it is determined as N), the process proceeds to step S46 to guide RAM clearing by setting change.

Next, when the process proceeds to step S26, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S26), and the special figure status (the state indicated by the data set in the special figure status area described later) ) to determine whether the special game is in a high probability (
step S27). Then, when the special figure game is in high probability (step S27; Y), the process proceeds to step S28, and when the special figure game is not in high probability (step S27; N), the process proceeds to step S30.

When the special figure game is in the high probability, the ON information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S28), and the ON data of the high probability notification LED is saved in the segment area (step S29).

Next, the command at the time of power failure recovery corresponding to the special game processing number is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31.
Here, the areas to be initialized in step S26 are a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an area related to error monitoring. In addition, in step S26, the payout control device 200
A busy signal status area for storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether or not the command can be accepted, is also cleared, and the state of the payout busy signal is set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the payout busy signal has not been determined. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area for storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared and set to an indeterminate state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal has not been determined.

In the case of the first embodiment, in step S30, a plurality of commands such as model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, probability setting value information command, screen designation command to send. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information about the number of presentations and high-probability number information is transmitted. In addition, the command for specifying the screen means that the control state of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are both normal processing (during fluctuation,
In the case of a big winning (first special game state) or a small winning (second special game state), it is a command to display a customer waiting demo screen. In some cases, it is a command to display a recovery screen.

In step S31, a CT for generating a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC (Counter/Timer Circuit)) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator)
Perform processing to activate the C circuit. Incidentally, the CTC circuit is provided in the clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111 . The clock generator includes a frequency dividing circuit that divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and the CPU 1 based on the frequency-divided signal.
11A is provided with a CTC circuit for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined period (for example, 4 ms) and a signal CTC for triggering random number update to be supplied to the random number generating circuit.

After the CTC start-up process of step S31, a process of starting and setting the random number generation circuit is performed (step S32). Specifically, the CPU 111 sets a code (specified value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit.
performed by A. Hard random numbers generated by the hardware of the random number generator (
Here, the bit transposition pattern of the jackpot random number) is also set. A bit permutation pattern is a pattern that defines how to permute the extracted random number bit arrangement (arrangement before bit transposition) when storing it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after bit transposition) by permuting it in a predetermined order. be. By replacing the bits of the random number according to this bit permutation pattern, it is possible to break the regularity of the random number and improve the secrecy of the random number. The bit transposition pattern may be a single fixed pattern, or may be selected from a plurality of prepared patterns. In addition, the user may be able to set arbitrarily.

After that, predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on
Extract the value of the corresponding various initial random numbers (in the case of the first embodiment, the initial value of the jackpot design initial value random number, the small winning design initial value random number, the winning initial value random number, the winning design initial value random number) (start value) in a predetermined area of the RWM (step S33), and then the interrupt is permitted (step S34).

Here, the "jackpot design initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (jackpot pattern random number) that determines the jackpot stop pattern of the special pattern, and the "small hit design initial value random number" is the small hit stop of the special pattern. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the design (small hit design random number). In addition, the "hit initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (hit random number) that determines the hit of the normal pattern fluctuation game, and the "hit pattern initial value random number" determines the winning pattern of the normal pattern fluctuation game. It is a random number that is the initial value of the random number (per pattern random number). It should be noted that the small winning symbol random number does not exist in models without a small winning, and the winning symbol initial value random number may not exist depending on the model.

In the random number generating circuit in the CPU 111A used in the first embodiment, the initial value of the soft random number register is changed each time power is turned on. By setting the starting value), the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software can be broken, making it difficult for the player to acquire illegal random numbers.

Subsequently, an initial value random number update process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and destroy the regularity of the random numbers. This initial value random number update process is a process of updating (incrementing) each initial value random number by, for example, "+1". In this way, the randomness of the random numbers can be enhanced by continuing to update the initial value random numbers as long as time permits in the main processing.

Although it is not particularly limited, in the first embodiment, random numbers generated in a random number generating circuit are used for the jackpot random numbers, jackpot pattern random numbers, small hit pattern random numbers, hit random numbers, and hit pattern random numbers. configured to generate However, the jackpot random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" that is updated based on a clock that is equal to or faster than the CPU operating clock, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, winning random number, and winning pattern random number are determined by the program. CTC output (CTC of timer interrupt processing (CT
C0) is a "slow counter" that is updated based on another CTC (CTC2)).
In addition, in the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and hit pattern random number, each initial value random number (generated by software) is used to change the start value each time the random number is cycled. ” is adopted. In addition, each random number above is "+1" or "-1
, or random update in which all the values within the range appear randomly without duplication until a cycle is completed. That is, the jackpot random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the jackpot pattern random number, small hit pattern random number, hit random number, and hit pattern random number are random numbers updated by hardware and software.

After the initial value random number update process in step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) that the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 is read and checked via the port and data bus.
is set (step S36), and it is determined whether or not the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number update process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number updating process and the power failure monitoring signal check (loop process) are repeated. By enabling the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), if a timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt processing due to the waiting by the initial value random number update processing.

The initial value random number update process in step S35 may be performed in the main process or in the timer interrupt process. In order to avoid executing the initial value random number update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to disable interrupts and then update to cancel the interrupts. If the initial value random number update process is not performed in the timer interrupt process as in the embodiment, but only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. This has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal has been on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38).
). Then, if the ON state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S
38;N), the process returns to the determination of whether or not the power failure monitor signal is ON (step S37). Further, when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks (step S38;
Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, a process of temporarily prohibiting interrupts (step S39) and a process of outputting OFF data to all output ports (step S40) are performed.

After that, the power failure inspection area check data 1 is saved in the power failure inspection area 1 (step S41
), the power failure inspection area check data 2 is saved in the power failure inspection area 2 (step S42).
Furthermore, checksum calculation processing (step S43) for calculating the checksum at the time of power shutdown of the RWM, processing for saving the calculated checksum in the checksum area (step S44).
), a process of prohibiting access to the RAM (step S45) is performed, and then the game machine is waited for the power supply to be turned off. In this way, by saving the check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating the checksum when the power is shut off, it is possible to check whether the information stored in the RWM before the power shutoff has been correctly backed up. It can be judged at the time of re-insertion.

Next, when it is determined that the check data in the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S16; N or step S17; N), or the checksum is not normal (step S1
9; When it is determined that N), guidance for RAM clearing by setting change performed after step S46 will be described.

When guiding the RAM clearing by setting change, the RAM clearing head address 1 is set as the head address at the time of RAM clearing (step S46). The RAM clear top address 1 is the top address of the game control area. The RAM clear top address 1 is an address that designates all of the work area for game control and the stack area for game control as objects to be cleared.

Next, it is determined whether or not the body frame (front frame) 12 is in the open state from the state of the third input port 124 (step S47). When the body frame 12 is in the open state (step S47; Y
), the process proceeds to step S48, and if the body frame 12 is not in the open state (step S47; N)
goes to step S49.

Next, it is determined whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state from the state of the third input port 124 (step S48). If the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S48; Y), the process proceeds to step S50. If the setting key switch 127 is not ON (step S48; N), the process proceeds to step S49.

In step S49, a command for setting change instruction is sent to the production control board (production control device 300).
By transmitting to , guidance of RAM clear by setting change is performed via the production control device 300. For example, the game machine 10 can display guidance by the display device 41,
The guide sound (including voice) output by 9b guides the RAM clearing due to the setting change.

The game machine 10 performs a process of prohibiting access to the RAM without saving the check data in the power failure inspection area after guiding the RAM clearing by changing the setting (step S45).
), and then wait until the game machine is turned off. As a result, the gaming machine 10
By prompting the user to change the setting prior to the initialization when the data is abnormal, it is possible to prevent the setting value from being initialized at a timing unintended by the administrator.

Next, when it is determined that the probability set value is being changed (step S21; Y), or when it is determined that the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S23; Y, step S48;
Y), the processing related to changing the probability set value performed after step S50 will be described.

In the process for changing the probability set value, the data in the clear target area (game control work area) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM 111C) is cleared to zero (step S50), and the initial The initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S51). The initial value saved in step S51 includes information (for example, timer value) for outputting a security signal after starting to change the set value. The security signal may be output only for a predetermined period of time, or may be continuously output while the set value is being changed.

Further, a probability set value changing flag is set (step S52). The probability setting value changing flag indicates that the probability setting value is being changed when it is set, and indicates that the probability setting value is not being changed when it is reset.

Further, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S53), and the value in the probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the working probability setting value area (step S54). ).

Furthermore, by transmitting a command during probability setting change (for example, (probability setting) changing command) to the production control board (production control device 300), the probability setting is being changed to production control device 300 Notify (step S55). After executing the processing related to changing the probability set value up to step S55, the process proceeds to step S31.

Next, when the set value change switch 126 is in the ON state (step S24; Y), processing related to RAM initialization performed after step S56 will be described. In the processing relating to RAM initialization, RAM clear start address 2 is set as the start address for RAM clear (step S56). Note that the RAM clear start address 2 is an address that does not clear the probability setting value area.

Furthermore, the data in the clear target area (work area for game control) in the storage area (area not including the access prohibited area) of the RWM (for example, RAM 111C) is cleared to zero (step S57), and the area to be initialized is RAM initialized. Save the initial value when initializing (step S
58).

Furthermore, the command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S59), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S59, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2 reservation number command, probability information command, probability setting value information command, RAM initialization command (customer waiting demo screen is displayed, and a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying RAM initialization with light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information about the number of presentations and high-probability number information is transmitted.

From the above, the main control means (game control device 100) that controls the overall game, and the sub-control means (payout control device 200,
At the time of power-on, the main control means delays the activation of the main control means and waits for the activation of the slave control device. Means (game control device 100) and power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure during the predetermined waiting time.

Also, a power supply device 400 that supplies power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) , it is determined that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period of time.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
Initialization operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112) that can be operated from the outside, and initialization means (game control device 100) for initializing data stored in RAM 111C based on the operation of the initialization operation unit , and the operation state of the initialization operation unit is read before the standby time starts.

It should be noted that the game control device 100 of the first embodiment distinguishes between initialization processing (first initialization processing) at the time of data abnormality and initialization processing (second initialization processing) at the time of initialization operation. Since it has the functions (the first initialization means and the second initialization means) that are executed separately, it is possible to realize optimum and efficient initialization processing according to the situation.

In addition, the main control means (game control device 100) includes a RAM 111C capable of storing data,
Externally operable setting operation unit (setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 12
7), and a setting change means (game control device 100) for changing the setting value stored in the RAM 111C based on the operation of the setting operation unit to enable setting change, and a setting display unit ( The setting (setting value) can be confirmed by providing the probability setting value display device 136).

Also, the main control means (game control device 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the waiting time has elapsed.
[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing of the game control device 100 will be described. FIG. 9 is a diagram showing a flowchart of timer interrupt processing according to the first embodiment. This timer interrupt process is an interrupt process that occurs during the period from when the interrupt is permitted until when the interrupt is prohibited (steps S34 to S39) in the main process described above. The timer interrupt processing is processing executed by the CPU 111A.

Timer interrupt processing is started when a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator is input to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled and timer interrupt processing is started.

When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is specified (step S6
1). Switching to register bank 1 is equivalent to performing register save processing to move the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in main processing) to RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM head address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S62). In step S62, the same processing as step S4 in the main processing is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, an input process (step S63) of reading inputs and signals from various sensors and switches, that is, reading the state of each input port is performed. Then, output processing (step S64) for driving control of actuators such as solenoids (large winning opening solenoid 38b, general electric solenoid 37c) is performed based on the output data set in various processes.
When a firing stop signal is output in step S5 in the main processing, a firing permission signal is output by performing this output processing, and the firing permission signal can be set to the permission state. This launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device.
At that time, signal processing and the like are not performed. In addition, the launch permission signal, the game control device 10
A second signal (fire permission signal), which is a first signal indicating the state of firing permission viewed from 0 and indicates the state of firing permission viewed from the payout control device 200, is also generated in the payout control device 200 and fired. Output to the control device. In other words, two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device, and when both are permitted to launch, the game ball can be launched.

Next, random number update processing 1 (step S65) and random number update processing 2 (step S66) are performed. Here, the random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the jackpot pattern random number, the small hit pattern random number, the hit random number, and the hit pattern random number which are the targets of the initial value random number update process. . The random number update process 2 is a process of updating the variation pattern random number for determining the variation pattern in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 variation display games. Note that random number update processing 1
Alternatively, in addition to the random number update process 1, the random number update process 2 may stop the random number update during the setting change or change the update period.

After that, it is monitored whether or not there is a normal signal input from the starting port 1 switches 36a and 37a, the starting port 2 switch 92a, the normal gate switch 34a, the winning port switch 35a, and the big winning port switch 38a. A winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S67) for monitoring (whether the front frame or the glass frame is open, etc.) is performed. In addition, a starting port switch monitoring process (step S68) for monitoring winning of the starting port 1 switches 36a, 37a and the starting port 2 switch 92a is performed. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when a game ball wins in the starting winning opening 36 or the normal variable winning device 37 forming the first starting winning opening, or the starting winning opening 92 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (Big hit random numbers, etc.) are extracted, and the game result pre-determination is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning at the stage before the start of the special figure fluctuation display game.

Next, in step S69, probability setting value change processing is performed for changing the probability setting value. In step S70, the probability setting value changing flag is referred to determine whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S70; Y), the process proceeds to step S75, and the probability setting If the value is not being changed (step S70; N), the process proceeds to step S71. In step S71, the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is referred to determine whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress. If the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S71; N), the process proceeds to step S72. The probability setting value confirmation mode flag is a flag that is set or reset in the probability setting value confirmation process described later.

Next, payout command transmission processing (step S72) for outputting the commands set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, special figure 1 game processing for performing processing related to the special figure 1 variation display game (step S73a), Special figure 2 game processing (step S73b) for performing processing relating to the special figure 2 variation display game, and general figure game processing (step S74) for performing processing relating to the general figure variation display game are performed.

Next, the segment LED provided in the gaming machine 10 to display the display of the special figure variation display game and various information related to the game (for example, the LE of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 of the collective display device 50
D) segment LED editing process (step S75) to drive to display the desired content
), the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61 is checked to determine if there is an abnormality (step S76), the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 is checked to determine if there is an abnormality. board radio wave fraud monitoring processing (step S77). Then, external information editing processing (step S78) for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer, and status display editing output processing for status display (step S79) are performed, and the timer interrupt processing is completed.

Here, in the first embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of enabling interrupts) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying register bank 0) It is automatically performed at the time of return (at the end of timer interrupt processing). It should be noted that depending on the CPU used, there are game machines that require a command to execute a process for restoring the interrupt disabled state or a process for restoring the designation of the register bank.

[Output processing]
Next, details of the output process (step S64) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10 is a diagram showing a flowchart of output processing according to the first embodiment. In this output process, first, OFF data is output (reset) to the segment output port (third output port 134c) for outputting segment data of the collective display device 50 (
step S81). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port (first output port 134a) that outputs the data of the general electric solenoid 37c and the big winning opening solenoid 38b is synthesized and output (step S82).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the collective display device 50 is updated by "+1" within the range of "0" to "3" (step S83), and the digit of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is displayed. Line output data is obtained (step S84). Here, as an example of dynamically lighting LED_d1 to LED_d18 of the collective display device 50,
There are round display, special figure 1 pending display, special figure 1 pattern display, special figure 2 pattern display, general pattern display, general pattern reservation display, and state display (game state display such as time saving state and high probability state).

Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S85), and the combined data is output to the digit/external information output port (fourth output port 134d) for digit output and external information output (step S86). ). The external information synthesized in step S85 is
They are "door/frame open" and "security signal".

After that, the segment line output data is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S87), and the loaded data is output to the segment output port (third output port 134c) for segment output ( step S88).

Subsequently, various output data of external information to be output to the external information terminal board 71 are loaded and synthesized (step S89). The external information synthesized here includes "big win signal 1", "big win signal 2", "big win signal 3", "big win signal 4", "symbol determination number signal", "starting opening signal", and "main prize ball." signal”, etc. Next, the synthesized data and the launch permission output data are synthesized (step S90), and the synthesized data is sent to the external information/launch permission signal output port (fifth output port 134e) for external information output and firing permission signal output. (Step S9
1).

Next, the OFF output data for probability set value display is set. That is, the probability setting value display device 1
36 probability setting value display output port (second output port 13
4b) output (reset) OFF data (step S92).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S9
3). If the probability setting value display permission flag is set (step S93; Y), the process proceeds to step S94, and if the probability setting value display permission flag is not set (step S9
3;N) to step S95.

If the probability setting value display permission flag is set, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is loaded from the setting value display data area in the RWM (step S94).
In step S95, the probability setting value display data is output to the probability setting value display output port (second output port 134b).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 1 on the relay board 70. (step S96). After that, the data to be output to the test signal output port 2 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test-firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the relay board 7
The synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 2 on 0 (step S97).

Next, the data to be output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal to the test firing test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 3 on the relay board 70. (step S98). Further, the data to be output to the test signal output port 4 on the relay board 70 for outputting the test signal of the test firing tester is loaded and synthesized, and the relay board 70
The synthesized data is output to the upper test signal output port 4 (step S99). Then, the data to be output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 that outputs the test signal to the test firing test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test signal output port 5 on the relay board 70 ( Step S9a).

Next, the test signal output data of the probability setting values are loaded (step S9b). As for the test signal output data, the probability setting value display data (for example, 7 segment data) corresponding to the probability setting value is loaded from the setting value display data area in the RWM, but the probability setting value can be confirmed. If present, it may be a set probability value (eg, a number from 1 to 6) or other form of data.

Next, it is judged from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S9c). If the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S9c; Y), the process proceeds to step S9d. If the setting key switch 127 is not ON (step S9c; N), the process proceeds to step S9e.

When the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the test signal output data of the loaded probability setting values and the setting key switch ON information are synthesized (step S9d).
At step S9e, the combined data is output to the test signal output port 6 on the relay board 70, and the output process is terminated.

[Winning gate switch/state monitoring process]
Next, the winning opening switch/state monitoring process (step S67) in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 9) will be described. FIG. 11 is a diagram showing a flow chart of the winning opening switch/state monitoring process of the first embodiment. In this winning hole switch/state monitoring process, first, the probability setting value changing flag is referred to determine whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (step S
101). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S101; Y), the process proceeds to step S109, and if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S101; N), the process proceeds to step S102. In step S102, the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is referred to determine whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress.
), the process proceeds to step S109, and if the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S102;
N) to step S103.

Next, the winning opening monitoring table 1 (for example, the number of the port to which the detection signal from the counting switch is input and the data indicating the bit positions in the signal port) is prepared (step S103). Next, a fraudulent and winning monitoring process (step S104) is executed to monitor whether there is fraudulent winning of a prize (unauthorized winning) even though the winning opening is not open, and to detect normal winning. .

After that, a winning opening monitoring table for the winning opening switch (starting opening 1 switch 37a) in the general electrical system is prepared (step S105), and fraud & winning monitoring processing ( Step S106) is executed.

Next, a winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring processing, that is, a winning opening switch that can always win a prize (
Here, a winning opening monitoring table for the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 92a, and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) is prepared (step S107), and the winning number counter updating process (step S108) is performed to update the winning number. ).

Next, the value of the state scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of switches and signals to be monitored for the error state of the gaming machine 10 is to be monitored this time is set to "0". to "3" (step S109). After that, depending on the value of the state scan counter, any of the switch abnormality 1 error output due to the occurrence of disconnection of the switch connector, the shot ball failure error from the payout control device 200, the overflow error from the overflow switch, and the payout abnormality error A gaming machine state monitoring table 1 is prepared for setting the monitoring of errors based on the above (step S110).
). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S111) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

Next, a gaming machine state monitoring table 2 is prepared for setting an error monitoring target based on one of glass frame opening, main body frame opening, frame radio wave fraud, and touch switch according to the value of the state scan counter. (Step S112). Then, gaming machine state check processing (step S113) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S114).
If the value of the state scan counter is not "0" (step S114; N), the winning opening switch/state monitoring process is terminated. In this case, gaming machine status monitoring table 3 to be referred to next
This is the case where there is no gaming machine status monitoring target. If the value of the state scan counter is "0" (step S114; Y), the gaming machine state based on the switch abnormality 2 error output due to the disconnection of the switch connector or the like is output according to the value of the state scan counter. A game machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared for setting the monitoring of (step S115)
. Then, gaming machine state check processing (step S
116) is performed, payout busy signal check processing (step S117) is performed, and winning opening switch/state monitoring processing is terminated. Note that the payout busy signal check process is not performed every time, but is performed once every four times, and the remaining three times are passed, so that the monitoring period is 16 ms.

[Probability setting value change processing]
Next, the details of the probability set value changing process (step S69) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a flowchart of probability setting value change processing according to the first embodiment.

First, referring to the probability setting value changing flag, it is determined whether or not the probability setting value is being changed (
step S121). If the probability setting value is being changed (step S121; Y), the process proceeds to step S123; if the probability setting value is not being changed (step S121; N), step S1
22, the probability set value confirmation process (step S122) is executed, and then the probability set value change process is terminated. Details of the probability set value confirmation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 13 .

If the probability set value is being changed, update the probability set value turn-off timer. Specifically, the value of the probability set value turn-off timer is referred to, and if the value of the probability set value turn off timer is not "0", the value of the probability set value turn off timer is decremented by "1" to update the value of the probability set value turn off timer (step S123). .

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the probability setting value turn-off timer is "0" (step S124).
, if the value of the probability setting value turn-off timer is "0" (step S124; Y), step S
Proceeding to 125, if the value of the probability set value turn-off timer is not "0" (step S124; N)
to step S126.

Next, the probability setting value changed flag is referred to determine whether or not the probability setting value has been changed (step S126). If the probability setting value has been changed, the process proceeds to step S127. to step S133. The probability setting value changed flag is a flag that is set when the probability setting value is changed (the probability setting value is confirmed).

If the probability set value has been changed (step S126; Y), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127).
). If the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y), the processing for RAM initialization after changing the probability set value is performed in step S128 and thereafter, and if the setting key switch 127 is not in the OFF state (step S127; N ) terminates the probability setting value change process.

Next, when the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step S127; Y),
The processing related to RAM initialization performed after step S128 will be described. In the processing relating to RAM initialization, RAM clear start address 3 is set as the start address for RAM clear (step S128). The RAM clear top address 3 is an address that does not clear the probability set value area, the random number area for variation pattern (random numbers updated in the random number update process 2), and the initial value random number area. As a result, the game machine 10 can effectively use the random number churning during the setting change. Note that the RAM clear start address 3 may be an address that excludes the probability set value area from the clearing target and includes the fluctuation pattern random number area and the initial value random number area in the clearing target.

Next, the RAM area to be cleared is cleared to zero (step S129), and the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S130). Note that step S13
The initial value saved at 0 includes information (eg, timer value) for outputting a security signal. The security signal may be output only for a predetermined period of time, or may be continuously output while the set value is being changed.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S131). By including information related to setting change (for example, probability set value display data, etc.) in the target of RAM clearing, the probability setting value after changing the probability setting value and the information related to the setting change before changing the probability setting value Inconsistencies are prevented.

Furthermore, the command of the probability setting change end is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S132), and the process proceeds to step S34 (see FIG. 7) of the main process. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S132, model designation command, special figure 1 reservation number command, special figure 2
Hold number command, probability information command, probability setting value information command, probability setting change end command (While displaying the customer waiting demo screen, for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) R
A command for notifying AM initialization), etc., are transmitted. Also, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information about the number of presentations and high-probability number information is transmitted. Note that the probability setting change end command may also serve as a RAM clear notification in addition to the probability setting change end notification or instead of the probability setting change end notification. again,
In step S132, a RAM initialization command may be transmitted in addition to the probability setting change end command or instead of the probability setting change end command.

If the probability set value has not been changed (step S126; N), the process from step S133 is performed. In step S133, it is determined whether or not there is an input from the set value change switch 126 (step S133). If there is an input from the set value change switch 126, the process proceeds to step S134, and if there is no input from the set value change switch 126 (step S133; N), the process proceeds to step S137.

If there is an input from the set value change switch 126 (step S133; Y), the value in the work probability set value area (work probability set value) is incremented by "1" to change from "0" to "5".
(step S134). The working probability setting value is
Six levels from 0 to 5 are used, but the number is not limited to this, and may be 3 levels, 10 levels, or the like, as long as the values correspond to the set probability values. Also, the working probability setting values correspond to the probability setting values one-to-one, but may have a one-to-many correspondence relationship with the probability setting values. For example, when the probability setting values are in three stages from "0" to "2", the working probability setting values are from "0" to "5".
working probability setting values ``0'', ``1'', and ``2'', respectively.
1", "2, 3", and "4, 5" may be associated with each other.

Next, the probability setting value display data corresponding to the working probability setting value is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S135), and the initial value (for example, 10) is saved in the probability setting value turn-off timer area.
0ms) is saved (step S136). The probability setting value turn-off timer area is an area for providing a blank display on the probability setting value display device 136 . As a result, the probability set value display device 136 can perform blank display each time a set value change operation (input from the set value change switch 126) is performed.

Next, in step S137, it is determined whether or not there is an operation for confirming the setting value change. For example, a touch switch signal can be used as the confirmation operation for changing the set value. The operation for confirming the setting value change may use an input different from the touch switch signal, may use an input signal from a dedicated operation switch provided separately, or may use an input from two or more switches. A signal combination or the like may be used. If there is an operation to confirm setting value change, the process proceeds to step S138, and if there is no operation to confirm setting value change (step S137; N), the probability setting value change process is terminated.

If there is an operation to confirm the setting value change (step S137; Y), the value in the working probability setting value area is loaded and saved in the probability setting value area (step S138), and the probability setting value corresponding to the probability setting value is displayed. The data is saved in the probability setting value display data area (step S139), and the probability setting value changed flag is set (step S140).

Furthermore, the command of probability set value change is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S141), and the probability set value change process is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S141, a command to change the probability setting value (to display the customer waiting demo screen and notify the probability setting value change by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 reservation number command, a special figure 2 reservation number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, etc. may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of presentation or information on the number of times with high probability may be transmitted.

[Probability setting value confirmation process]
Next, the details of the probability set value confirmation process (step S122) in the probability set value change process described above will be described. FIG. 13 is a diagram showing a flowchart of probability setting value confirmation processing according to the first embodiment.

In step S151, the probability setting value confirmation mode in-progress flag is referred to determine whether or not the probability setting value confirmation mode is in progress.
), the process proceeds to step S159, and proceeds to step S152 if the probability setting value confirmation mode is not in progress.

If the probability set value confirmation mode is not in progress (step S151; N), the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S152), and it is determined whether or not the game is being played (step S153).
), if the game is not in progress, the process proceeds to step S154, and if the game is in progress (step S153
; Y) ends the probability set value confirmation processing. The term "playing" refers to a game state in which there is a high probability that the player is playing a game, and includes, for example, special figure fluctuations, normal figure fluctuations, special figure hits, and normal figure hits. Also, during the game may include a game state with a special figure 1 reserved number or a special figure 2 reserved number.

If the game is not being played (step S153; N), it is determined from the state of the third input port 124 whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state (step S154). If the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state, the process proceeds to step S155, and the setting key switch 12
7 is not ON (step S154; N), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated.

If the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S154; Y), the probability set value confirmation mode flag is set (step S155), the probability set value display permission flag is set (step S156), and the security signal control timer is set. The initial value is saved in the area (step S157). By saving the initial value in the security signal control timer area, the security signal is output only for the set probability display time set as the initial value. The security signal is not limited to the probability setting value display time set as the initial value, and may be continuously output during the probability setting value confirmation mode.

Furthermore, the command of probability setting value confirmation is transmitted to the production|presentation control board (production control apparatus 300) (step S158), and probability setting value confirmation processing is complete|finished. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S158, a command for confirming the probability setting value (to display the customer waiting demo screen and notify the confirmation of the probability setting value by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 reservation number command, a special figure 2 reservation number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, etc. may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of presentation or information on the number of times with high probability may be transmitted.

If it is in the probability set value confirmation mode (step S151; Y), the third input port 124
It is determined whether or not the setting key switch 127 is in the ON state from the state of (step S15
9). If the setting key switch 127 is not ON, the process proceeds to step S160, and if the setting key switch 127 is ON (step S159; Y), the probability set value confirmation process is terminated.

If the setting key switch 127 is not ON (step S159; N), the probability set value confirmation mode flag is cleared (step S160), and the probability set value display permission flag is cleared (step S161).

Furthermore, the command of the probability setting value confirmation end is transmitted to the production control board (production control device 300) (step S162), and the probability setting value confirmation processing is ended. In the case of the first embodiment, in step S162, a command to end probability setting value confirmation (to display a customer waiting demo screen and notify probability setting value confirmation by light and sound for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) command), a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 reservation number command, a special figure 2 reservation number command, a probability information command, a probability setting value information command, etc. may be transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, information on the number of times of presentation or information on the number of times with high probability may be transmitted.

Next, the memory map of the RAM 111C will be explained using FIG. FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a memory map of the game control device of the first embodiment. memory map 111
M is a memory map of RAM 111C. The RAM 111C sets a game control work area, a game control stack area, a state display work area, and a state display stack area in order from the top of the memory. In addition, the RAM 111C clearly separates the stack area for game control and the work area for status display by setting an unused area of 16 bytes or more between the stack area for game control and the work area for status display. Also, RAM1
11C sets an unused area after the status display stack area, but the status display stack area may be set so as to include the end of the memory without providing the unused area. Also, the RAM 111C may set an unused area between the game control work area and the game control stack area, or between the state display work area and the state display stack area.

Since the game control work area places the probability setting value area at the beginning, the RAM clear top address 1 clears all of the game control work area (game control work area) and the game control stack area. do. In addition, the RAM clear leading address 2 is intended to clear the game control work area and the game control stack area excluding the probability setting value area. In addition, the RAM clear top address 3 is to clear the game control work area and the game control stack area excluding the probability setting value area, the fluctuation pattern random number area and the initial value random number area. Moreover, all of the RAM clear top address 1, the RAM clear top address 2, and the RAM clear top address 3 clear the area from the power failure inspection area 1 to the power failure inspection area 2 and the checksum area.

[Payment command transmission process]
Next, details of the payout command transmission process (step S72) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a flowchart of payout command transmission processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 16 is a diagram showing an example of the structure of the win number counter area of the first embodiment.

First, an example of the winning number counter area will be described. The winning number counter area 1, for example, as shown in FIG. The number-of-wins counter can store up to 65,535 wins. Next, as shown in FIG. 16, for example, the winning number counter area 2 consists of a 3 winning ball counter, a 10 winning ball counter, and a 14 winning ball counter, and each winning number counter can store up to 255 winnings. It has become. In checking the count number of these winning number counter areas, the above-described counters are checked in order from the top (from the 3 winning ball counter) by updating the address of the winning number counter area in step S202 or the like which will be described later.

Next, in FIG. 15, the left column is processing for updating (increasing) the number of times the main prize ball signal is output, and the right column is processing for transmitting a payout command.
In the payout command transmission process, first, as described with reference to FIG. Among them, it is determined whether or not the counter to be checked has a count number other than "0" (step S201). If there is no count (step S201; N), the address of the winning prize counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S202), and the check of the count numbers of all the counters in the winning prize counter area 2 is completed. It is determined whether or not (step S203).

If it is determined in step S201 that there is a count (step S201; Y),
The count number of the target winning number counter area 2 is subtracted (updated by "-1") (step S204), and the number of payouts corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 2 (for example, the above-mentioned 3, 10, 14) is acquired (step S205). Next, the value of the remaining number of prize balls area and the number of payouts are added (step S206), the addition result is saved in the remaining number of prize balls area (step S207), 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S208), and the It is determined whether the subtraction result is "0" or more (step S209). In step S209, the subtraction result is "0
" or more (step S209; Y), the number of times the main prize ball signal is output is "+1"
update (step S210), and save the subtraction result in the prize ball remaining number area (step S211)
).

In the main prize ball signal editing process in the external information editing process described later, a process of outputting the main prize ball signal is performed based on the number of main prize ball signal output times updated in step S210. Here, as the prize ball signal (main prize ball signal), 1 pulse is output from the main board (game control device 100) every 10 payout schedules, and the payout board (payout control device 2
00) outputs 1 pulse every 10 payouts.

Next, it is determined in step S203 that all checks have been completed (step S203;
Y), or if it is determined that the subtraction result is not "0" or more in the determination of step S209 (step S209; N), the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0", the payout command transmission timer is updated by "-1" (step S212). If this payout command transmission process is the first timer interrupt process, the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" because the initial value set in the last step S221 of this payout command transmission process is not set. , no subtraction will be performed.

Next, it is determined whether or not the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213
), and if it is determined that the value of the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S213; Y), it is determined whether or not the payout busy signal is busy (step S214). Whether or not the payout busy signal is busy is determined by referring to the payout busy signal flag, not by referring to the state of the port. Here, the conditions for the payout busy signal to turn on (busy) are: "during payout operation", "during ball lending operation", "shot ball running out error", "overflow error", "framing radio wave illegal occurrence Medium", "Abnormality in payout ball detection switch (switch to monitor paid out balls)", "Insufficient payout error", "Excess payout error", "Award to be paid out in the memory of the payout control board When there is a count of the number of balls (the number of unpaid prize balls=the number of acquired game balls remaining) (=not 0).

Next, when the payout busy signal is not busy (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 has a count (step S215), and the target counter of the winning number counter area 1 is determined. (step S215; N), the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S216), and it is determined whether or not all areas have been checked (step S217). If the check of all areas has not been completed (step S217; N), the process returns to step S215.

In step S215, if there is a count in the target counter in the winning number counter area 1 (step S215; Y), the target winning number counter is updated by "-1" (step S2
18) Acquires the payout number command corresponding to the address of the winning number counter area 1 (step S219), and writes the acquired command to the payout serial transmission buffer (step S2).
20). Then, an initial value (for example, 200 ms) is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S221).

In step S213, the value of the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S
213; N), if it is determined that the payout busy signal is busy in step S214 (step S214; Y), then in step S217, all areas have been checked (step S217 ;Y), or when the process of step S221 ends, this payout command transmission process ends.

It should be noted that, depending on the determination results of steps S213 and S214, the processing is terminated without executing steps S215 and subsequent steps. I am sending it from In addition, the transmission of the payout command is also conditional on the payout control board being in a state where the prize balls can be paid out.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting port switch monitoring process (step S68) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the starting port switch monitoring process of the first embodiment.

In the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, starting opening 1 (starting winning opening 36, normal fluctuation winning device 3
7) The winning monitoring table is prepared (step A101), hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the start gate 1 (step A103).
).

In step A103, when it is determined that there is no winning to the starting port 1 (step A103;
In N), the process proceeds to step A109 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A103, if it is determined that there is a prize to the starting port 1 (step A1
03; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is a predetermined state in which the player should hit to the right (for example, normal electric support state, during a big hit, etc.) (step A104).

If it is determined in step A104 that it is not in a predetermined state that should be hit to the right (step A10
In 4;N), the process proceeds to step A107 and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, in step A104, when it is determined that the predetermined state to hit to the right (step A104; Y), to prepare a right hitting instruction notification command (step A105), effect command setting processing (step A106) do That is, the gaming machine 1 of the first embodiment
In the case of 0, except for the general electric support state, it is almost impossible to win unless it is left-handed to the starting port 1, and if there is a prize at the starting port 1 in a predetermined state that should be right-handed, it is a predetermined state that should be right-handed. However, since it can be estimated that the ball is hit to the left, the production control device 300 is configured to transmit a right-handed instruction notification command to the production control device 300 and perform a notification (warning) instructing to hit to the right.

Next, after preparing a table for setting hold information by start port 1 (step A10
7), the special figure starting port 1 switch processing (step A108) is performed.
Next, prepare a prize-winning monitoring table for the starting port 2 (starting prize-winning port 92) (step A109)
Then, a hardware random number acquisition process (step A110) is performed, and it is determined whether or not there is a winning at the start gate 2 (step A111).

If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning to the starting port 2 (step A111;
At N), the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated.
On the other hand, in step A111, if it is determined that there is a prize to the starting port 2 (step A1
At 11; Y), it is determined whether or not the game state is in the normal electric support state (time saving state) (step A112). It is determined whether or not there is (step A113). Further, when it is determined at step A113 that the big hit is not in progress (step A113; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure variation display game is during the general electric support final variation (step A114).

At step A114, when it is determined that the general electric support is not in the final fluctuation (step A114; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A115), and effect command setting processing (step A116) is performed. That is, if it is neither the general electric support state, the jackpot, or the general electric support final fluctuation, it should be hit to the left, so the process of transmitting the instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 is performed.

Then, if it is determined in step A112 that it is in the general electricity support state (step A112; Y), if it is determined that the jackpot is being hit in step A113 (step A113; Y), in step A114 the general electricity support final If it is determined to be fluctuating (step A114; Y), and if the process of step A116 is completed, the process proceeds to step A117.

If it moves to step A117, after preparing the table which sets the information of the hold by the starting mouth 2 (step A117), special figure starting mouth 2 switch processing (step A118) is performed, and starting mouth switch monitoring processing is complete|finished.

In addition, when it is determined that there is a prize to the starting port 2 in the above step A111, for example, before step A112 is executed, normal power irregularity (normal A step is provided for determining whether or not there has been fraud in which a winning to the variable prize winning device 37 is detected, and when it is determined that this electric fraud is occurring, the starting port switch monitoring process is terminated without executing step A112 and subsequent steps. As a configuration, if there is a general electric fraud, the second starting memory (starting memory of special figure 2) may not be generated any more.

[Hard random number acquisition process]
Next, hardware random number acquisition processing (step A102
, A110) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a diagram showing a flowchart of hard random number acquisition processing according to the first embodiment.

In the hardware random number acquisition process, first, the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37)
and the starting opening 2 (starting winning opening 92), setting no winning information of the starting opening to be monitored (step A121), starting opening 1 switches 36a, 37a and starting opening 2 switch 92a
Among them, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122)
. If there is no input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. On the other hand, if there is an input to the starting switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123).
, determine whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124
).

If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number has been extracted, the hard random number acquisition process is terminated. Also, if there is latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded into the monitored hard random number latch register and prepared (step A125
). Then, of the starting gate 1 and the starting gate 2, the winning information of the monitored start gate is set (step A126), and the hardware random number acquisition process is terminated.

[Special figure start gate 1 switch processing]
Next, the special figure starting port 1 switch processing (step A
108) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure starting port 1 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting opening 1 switch processing is a process that is performed when there is an input of the starting opening 1 switches 36a and 37a that are monitored (starting winning of the special figure 1 that is monitored).
In the special figure starting port 1 switch processing, first, the starting port signal 1 output, which is the number of times information regarding the number of winnings to the monitoring target starting port 1 switches 36a, 37a is output to the external management device of the game machine 10 The number of times is loaded (step A131), the loaded value is updated by "+1" (step A132), and it is determined whether or not the output number of times overflows (step A1
33). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM start signal 1 output count area (step A134), and step A1
35 is processed. On the other hand, when the number of outputs overflows (step A133;
Y) skips step A134 and proceeds to the process of step A135. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal 1 output frequency area. If the loaded value is "255", the updated value becomes "0" when updated by "+1", and it is determined that the output count overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the update target special figure 1 reservation number (special figure 1 start memory number) corresponding to the start port 1 switch 36a, 37a to be monitored is less than the upper limit (for example, less than 4 pieces) (step A135). If the update target special figure 1 pending number is not less than the upper limit (step A135
; N) ends the special figure start port 1 switch process. If the special figure 1 pending number to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), set the special figure 1 information setting flag used for setting the variation information (for example, for distributing the prefetch variation pattern) ( Step A136), update the special figure 1 pending number to be updated by "+1" (step A137).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 1 reserved number (random number storage area for special figure 1) is calculated (step A138), and the jackpot random number prepared in step A125 is stored in the RWM jackpot random number storage area. (step A139). Next, the special figure 1 jackpot pattern random number is extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A141).

Next, extract the small hit pattern random number of special figure 1, prepare it, save it in the small hit pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A142), change the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 It saves in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of corresponding RWM (step A143), special figure reservation information decision processing (step A144) it does. After that, prepare a decoration special figure 1 reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reservation number to be monitored (step A145),
Effect command setting processing (step A146) is performed, and the special figure starting port 1 switch processing is terminated.

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the starting winning port 36 or the starting winning region of the normal variable winning device 37, and extracts a special figure variable display game. A starting winning memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a starting memory that is the right to execute. In addition, the start winning memory means (RAM 111C) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the starting port 1 (starting winning port 36, normal variable winning device 37) as the first starting value with a predetermined number as the upper limit. Store as memory.

[Special figure start gate 2 switch processing]
Next, the special figure starting port 2 switch processing (step A
118) will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure starting port 2 switch processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure starting opening 2 switch processing is a process that is performed when there is an input of the starting opening 2 switch 92a which is a monitoring target (starting prize of the special figure 2 which is a monitoring target).
In the special figure starting port 2 switch processing, first, the starting port signal 2 output count, which is the number of times of outputting information regarding the number of winnings to the starting port 2 switch 92a to the management device outside the gaming machine 10, is loaded ( Step A151), update the loaded value by "+1" (step A152
), and it is determined whether or not the number of outputs overflows (step A153). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A153; N), the updated value is saved in the RWM starting signal 2 output number area (step A154), and the process proceeds to step A155. On the other hand, if the number of outputs overflows (step A153; Y), step A
154 is passed and the process proceeds to step A155. In the first embodiment, a value from "0" to "255" can be stored in the starting port signal 2 output frequency area. When the loaded value is "255", if it is updated by "+1", the updated value becomes "0",
It is configured to determine that the number of outputs overflows.

Next, it is determined whether or not the update target special figure 2 pending (starting memory) number corresponding to the monitoring target start port 2 switch 92a is less than the upper limit (for example, less than 4 pieces) (step A155).
If the special figure 2 reservation number to be updated is not less than the upper limit (step A155; N), the special figure start opening 2 switch processing is terminated. If the special figure 2 pending number to be updated is less than the upper limit (step A155; Y), set the special figure 2 information setting flag used for setting the variation information (for example, for distributing the prefetch variation pattern) ( Step A156), update the special figure 2 pending number to be updated by "+1" (step A157).

Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (random number storage area for special figure 2) is calculated (step A158), and the jackpot random number prepared at step A125 is RWM's jackpot random number storage area (step A159). Next, the special figure 2 jackpot pattern random number is extracted and prepared (step A160), and saved in the jackpot pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A161).

Next, extract the small hit pattern random number of special figure 2, prepare it, save it in the small hit pattern random number storage area of RWM (step A162), change the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 It saves in the fluctuation pattern random number storage area of corresponding RWM (step A163), special figure reservation information decision processing (step A164) it does. After that, prepare a decoration special figure 2 reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number to be monitored (step A165),
Effect command setting processing (step A166) is performed, and the special figure starting port 2 switch processing is terminated.

Here, the RAM 111C of the game microcomputer 111 of the game control device 100 extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of the game ball into the start prize winning area of the start prize winning port 92, and it becomes the execution right of the special figure variation display game. It constitutes a start winning memory means for storing a predetermined number as an upper limit as a memory. Further, the start winning memory means (RAM 111C) stores various random values extracted based on the winning of the game ball into the start opening 2 (start winning opening 92) as a second start memory up to a predetermined number.

[Special Figure Reservation Information Judgment Process]
Next, the details of the special figure reservation information determination process (step A144, step A164) in the special figure start opening 1 switch process and the special figure start opening 2 switch process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure reservation information determination processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure reservation information determination process is a look-ahead process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start memory before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory.

In the special figure reservation information determination process, first, it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (high probability) (step A172). In step A172, when it determines with it being in high probability (step A172; Y), it complete|finishes special figure reservation information determination processing.

On the other hand, in step A172, if it is determined that the probability is not high (step A172; N
), it is determined whether or not the jackpot is in progress (step A173). In step A173, when it determines with it being a big hit (step A173; Y), it complete|finishes special figure reservation information determination processing.

On the other hand, in step A173, when it is determined that it is not in the big hit (step A173; N
), a big-hit determination process (step A174) is performed to determine whether or not the big-hit is a big-hit according to whether or not the big-hit random number matches the big-hit determination value.

After that, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the big hit determination process is a big hit (step A17
5). Then, if the judgment result is a big hit (step A175; Y), the big hit pattern random number check table corresponding to the target starting switch (in other words, special figure type; special figure 1 or special figure 2) Set (step A176), acquire the stop symbol information corresponding to the jackpot symbol random number prepared in step A140 or A160 (step A177), move to the process of step A184, and perform the subsequent processes.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A175; N), a small hit determination process (step A179) that determines whether or not it is a small hit depending on whether the big hit random value matches the small hit determination value. Do. Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the small hit determination process is a small hit (step A180). And, if the judgment result is not a small hit (step A180
;N) sets the stop symbol information of the lost (step A183), shifts to the processing of step A184, and performs the subsequent processing.

On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A180; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set, and the small hit stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A142 or A162. is set (step A182), the process proceeds to step A184, and the subsequent processes are performed.

Then, when the process proceeds to step A184, step A177, step A182, or step A183 to prepare a look-ahead stop symbol command corresponding to the stop symbol information acquired or set (step A184), production command setting process (step A18
5). Next, a special figure information setting process (step A186) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and a variation pattern setting process (step A187) for setting the variation mode of the special figure variation display game. do

After that, the first half variation number indicating the first half variation pattern (variation pattern until the start of the reach action) and the second half variation number indicating the second half variation pattern (the variation pattern after the start of the reach action) in the variation mode of the special figure variation display game Prefetch variation pattern corresponding to A command is prepared (step A188), effect command setting processing (step A189) is performed, and the special figure reservation information determination processing is terminated.

In addition, the special figure information setting process in step A186 and the variation pattern setting process in step A187 are executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure normal process (special figure 1 normal process or special figure 2 normal process described later). is the same as the processing That is, when the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A144, since the special figure type is special figure 1, the processing of steps A186 and A187 is the special figure 1 information setting process and special figure 1 variation which will be described later. When the pattern setting process is the same and the special figure reservation information determination process is executed in step A164, the special figure type is special figure 2, so the processing of steps A186 and A187 is special figure 2 information to be described later. It is the same as the setting process and special figure 2 variation pattern setting process.

By the above processing, the look-ahead stop pattern command including the result of the special figure variation display game based on the start memory of the look-ahead target and the look-ahead variation pattern command including the information of the variation pattern in the special figure variation display game based on the start memory are generated. It is prepared and transmitted to the production control device 300 . As a result, the judgment result (read-ahead result) of the result-related information (whether it is a big hit or the type of variation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is produced before the start timing of the special figure variation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The device 300 can be informed, in particular the display device 41
By changing the decorative special figure start memory display displayed in , it is possible to inform the player of the result related information before the start timing of the special figure fluctuation display game.

That is, the game control device 100 determines the random number stored as the starting memory in the starting winning memory means (RAM 111C) before executing the variable display game based on the starting memory (for example, whether or not a special result will be obtained). Judgment) constitutes a preliminary judgment means. The random number value stored in correspondence with the starting memory is judged in advance not only when the starting memory is generated, but also at any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is performed. good.

[Special figure 1 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 game process (step S73a) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 1 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 game processing, monitoring of the input of the big winning opening switch 38a, control of the entire processing related to the special figure 1 variable display game, special figure 1 (identification information that is displayed in a variable manner in the special figure 1 variable display game)
display settings. In the special figure 1 game process, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is in the middle of a big hit or a small hit (a big hit game state or a small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 2 variation display game) (step A1). . If it is not during the special figure 2 jackpot or small hit (step A1
At ;N), a big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In this big winning opening switch monitoring process, a process of monitoring the detection of a game ball by the big winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38 is performed.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the special figure 2 is during the big hit or during the small hit (step A1; Y), and when the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is completed, the process proceeds to step A3, If the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already timed up, to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number Set the special figure 1 game sequence branch table to be referred to in the register (step A5)
, obtains the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure 1 game process number using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure 1 game processing number (step A7).

At step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "0", the start of variation of the special figure 1 variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure 1 variation display game, the setting of the effect, and the special Fig. 1 Special figure 1 normal processing (step A8) for setting information necessary for performing processing during fluctuation
do

At step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 1, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 display process, etc. 1 During fluctuation processing (step A9) is performed.

In step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 1 variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the kind of big win and the size of each big win are performed. Setting the fanfare time according to the winning opening pattern, fanfare /
Special figure 1 display process (
Step A10) is performed.

At step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the big winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the big winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A11).

In step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "4", if the big hit round is not the final round, the interval command is set, and if the big hit round is the final round, the ending command is set; A process (step A12) during the opening of the big prize winning opening, which performs a process of setting information necessary for performing the remaining ball process, etc., is performed.

At step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is not the final round, the fanfare/interval process is performed. For example, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning hole to be discharged, and the big winning hole remaining ball processing (step A13) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 1 jackpot end process. Do.

At step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "6", the special figure 1 jackpot end processing (step A14) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

At step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "7", the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. Processing (step A15) during a small hit fanfare for setting information necessary for performing is performed.

At step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the transition process during the small hit, the command for the small hit end screen, the setting of information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. Perform small hit middle processing (step A16).

At step A7, if the special figure 1 game processing number is "9", small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 small hit end processing is performed.

At step A7, when the special figure 1 game processing number is "10", the special figure 1 small winning end processing (step A18) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 1 normal processing is performed.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) relating to the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is performed, and the special figure game process. exit. On the other hand, in step A4, if the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer is not "0" (step A4; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the process proceeds to step A19, and the subsequent processes do

Incidentally, a small hit is a result mode that does not involve the operation of a conditional device, and a big win is a special result that accompanies the operation of a conditional device. The condition device operates when a big hit occurs in the special figure fluctuation display game (stop display of the big hit pattern). It means that a specific flag for continuously operating the variable prize winning device 38 is set (the character product continuous operating device is operated). The fact that the conditional device does not operate means that the aforementioned flag is not set as in the case of, for example, winning a small prize lottery. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag that is turned on and off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch that is electrically turned on and off. In addition, "conditional device" is a term commonly used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is a necessary condition for continuous operation of electric accessories, and the same applies in this specification. It is used as a term with a meaning.

[Tokuzu 2 game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 game process (step S73b) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 23 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 2 game processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 game processing, monitoring of the input of the big winning opening switch 38a, control of the entire processing related to the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, special figure 2 (identification information that is variably displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game)
Set the display of . In the special figure 2 game processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is in the middle of a big hit or a small hit (a big hit game state or a small hit game state according to the result of the special figure 1 variation display game) (step A31). . If it is not during the special figure 1 jackpot or small hit (step A
31;N), a big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is performed. In this large winning opening switch monitoring process, the large winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variable winning device 38
Performs processing for monitoring the detection of game balls in .

Next, when it is determined that it is during the special figure 1 big hit or small hit (step A31; Y)
And, when the big winning opening switch monitoring process (step A32) is completed, step A33
, and if the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0", it is updated by "-1" (step A3
3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether or not the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34). If the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A34; Y), that is, if the time has expired or has already timed up, the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0". It is determined whether or not there is (step A35). If the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A35; N), the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is updated by "-1" (step A36), and special figure 2 in RWM Long fluctuation timer value (for example, 6
0000 ms) is saved (step A37), and the process proceeds to step A59.

On the other hand, if the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A35;
In Y), the special figure 2 game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the process corresponding to the special figure 2 game process number is set in the register (step A38), and the special figure 2 game process number is set using the table Acquire the branch destination address of the process corresponding to (step A39)
. Then, a subroutine call is performed according to the special figure 2 game processing number (step A4
7).

At step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "0", monitor the start of variation of the special figure 2 variation display game, set the variation start of the special figure 2 variation display game, set the effect, Fig. 2 Special figure 2 normal processing (step A4
8).

At step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "1", the setting of the stop display time of the special figure 2, the setting of the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 display process, etc. 2 Perform processing during fluctuation (step A49).

At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "2", if the game result of the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit, setting a fanfare command according to the kind of big win,
Processing during special figure 2 display (step A50) for setting fanfare time according to the jackpot opening pattern of each jackpot and setting information necessary for performing processing during fanfare/interval is performed.

At step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "3", the setting of the opening time of the large winning opening, the update of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the processing during the opening of the large winning opening, etc. Perform fanfare/interval processing (step A51).

At step A47, if the special game processing number is "4", if the jackpot round is not the final round, an interval command is set, and if it is the final round, an ending command is set; A large winning opening opening process (step A52) is performed to set information necessary for ball processing.

At step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "5", if the big hit round is not the final round, the information necessary for fanfare/interval processing is set, etc. For example, the process of setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning hole to be discharged, and the big winning hole remaining ball processing (step A53) for setting the information necessary for performing the special figure 2 jackpot ending process. Do.

At step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "6", special figure 2 big hit end processing (step A54) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

In step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "7", the setting of the opening time and opening pattern of the predetermined large winning opening when the small hit occurs, the setting of the fanfare command, and the processing during the small hit are performed. Small hit fanfare middle processing (
Step A55) is performed.

At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "8", the setting of the command for the operation transition processing during the small hit, the command for the small hit end screen, the setting of information necessary for performing the small hit remaining ball processing, etc. Perform small hit middle processing (step A56).

At step A47, if the special figure 2 game processing number is "9", small hit remaining ball processing (step A57) for setting information necessary for performing special figure 2 small hit end processing is performed.

At step A47, when the special figure 2 game processing number is "10", the special figure 2 small hit end processing (step A58) for setting information necessary for performing the special figure 2 normal processing is performed.

Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the variation of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 (step A59), the symbol variation control process (step A60) relating to the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is performed, and the special figure game process. exit. On the other hand, in step A34, if the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not "0" (step A34; N), that is, if the time is not up, or if the process of step A37 is completed, step A59 Move to processing and perform subsequent processing.

[Special figure 1 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 normal processing (step A8) in the special figure 1 game processing described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 24 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 1 normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 can start to fluctuate (that is, whether or not the special figure 1 variation display game can be started) (step A251). In this judgment, the game state is
If it is in the state of the period from the end of the special figure 2 hit (big hit or small hit) fluctuation end (the start of the special figure 2 display processing) to the end of the hit operation (big hit game state or small hit game state), that is, the special When FIG. 2 hits, it is determined that special figure 1 cannot start fluctuation, and if it is not the period, special figure 1 decides that fluctuation start is possible.

And when it is determined that the special figure 1 can start fluctuation (step A251; Y), whether or not the left-handed instruction notification has been completed (that is, the left-handed instruction notification command is sent to the effect control device 300,
After that, it is determined whether or not the right-handed instruction notification command has been transmitted (step A2
52). In step A252, if the left-handed instruction notification flag is set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction has been notified, and if the left-handed instruction notification flag is not set, it is determined that the left-handed instruction has not been notified. may be configured.

If the left-handed instruction has not been notified (step A252; N), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A253), effect command setting processing (step A254) is performed, and a left-handed instruction notification flag is set (step A255).

If the left-handed instruction has been notified (step A252; Y) and if step A255 is completed, the process proceeds to step A256, and the special figure 1 reservation number (first start memory number) is "0" It is determined whether or not (step A256). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 1 pending number is not "0" (step A256; N), a variation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure variation display game is prepared (step A257), and the production command Setting processing (step A258) is performed, special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A259) is performed, special figure 1
Prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the number of reservations (step A260), perform production command setting processing (step A261), special figure 1 in the special figure status area in RWM
Set (add information) information indicating that the game is changing (executing the special figure 1 variation display game) (step A262), and determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A26
3).

In addition, the special figure status area includes information indicating that the special figure 1 is changing (running the special figure 1 variation display game) and information indicating that the special figure 2 is changing (running the special figure 2 variation display game), It is an area to be stored independently, and the state indicated by the information set in this special figure status area is the special figure status. When step A262 is executed, the special figure status becomes either of "special figure 1 changing" and "special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing".

In addition, in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process (step A259), the process of saving "1", which is the processing number related to the special figure 1 fluctuation process, in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step A31 described later
8, A319), processing to save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A322 described later), processing for setting the fluctuation time as the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (steps A307, A497 described later ), etc. are performed.

Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A263; N), it is determined whether it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264), and if it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264;
N), set the special figure 1 fluctuation check flag (step A265). It should be noted that whether or not the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress is determined by a high-probability final fluctuation flag, which will be described later. That is, if the high-probability final change flag is set, it is determined that the high-probability final change is in progress.

Then, when step A265 is completed, when it is determined to be in the high probability (step A263; Y), and when it is determined to be in the high probability final fluctuation (step A264;
Y) performs the special figure 1 fluctuating process transition setting process (step A266) and ends the special figure 1 usual process.

On the other hand, if it is determined that the special figure 1 is not able to start fluctuation (step A251; N), and if the number of special figure 1 reservations is "0" at step A256 (step A256; Y), as the processing number Set "0" (step A267), save the processing number, that is, "0" in the special figure 1 game processing number area which is an area for storing the special figure 1 game processing number in RWM (step A268), 1 End normal processing.

Thus, in this embodiment, the determination result of step A251 is affirmative,
If the special figure 1 pending number is not "0", the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A259) etc. is executed, and even if the special figure 2 is fluctuating (special figure 2 fluctuation display game is running) , the special figure 1 variable display game is started. That is, when the game control device 100 has the first start memory in the first start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the first start memory is changed to the variable display based on the second start memory. It constitutes control means that can be executed at the same time as the game.

[Special figure 2 normal processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 normal processing (step A48) in the above-described special figure 2 game processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 25 is a diagram showing a flowchart of special figure 2 normal processing of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 normal processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 can start fluctuation (ie, whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game can be started) (step A271). In this judgment, the game state is
If it is in the state of the period from the end of the special figure 1 hit (big hit or small hit) fluctuation end (the start of the special figure 1 display processing) to the end of the hit operation (big hit game state or small hit game state), that is, the special When FIG. 1 hits, it is determined that the special figure 2 is not possible to start the fluctuation, and if it is not the period, the special figure 2 is judged to be possible to start the fluctuation.

And, when it is determined that special figure 2 can start fluctuation (step A271; Y), special figure 2
It is determined whether or not the number of reservations (the number of second starting memories) is "0" (step A272). Then, when it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is not "0" (step A272; N), prepare a variation start probability information command corresponding to the probability state of the current special figure variation display game (step A27
3) Performs production command setting processing (step A274), performs special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A275), and special figure 2 is changing in special figure status area in RWM (special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) is set (information is added) (step A276),
It is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability (step A277).

Here, the state indicated by the information set in the special figure status area (that is, the special figure status) is, when step A276 is executed, "special figure 2 changing" and "special figure 1 changing + special figure 2 changing ” will be in one of the states.

Also, in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A275), the process of saving "1", which is the processing number related to the special figure 2 fluctuation process, in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step A34 described later
8, A349), processing to save the fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A352 described later), processing in which the fluctuation time is set as the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (steps A337, A497 described later ), etc. are performed.

For example, after executing step A275, prepare a decoration special figure reservation number command corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number, then execute the production command setting process, and then move to step A276 Configuration (that is, special figure 2 Also, it may be configured to transmit the decoration special figure pending number command to the production control device 300 in the usual process).

Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A277; N), it is determined whether it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278), and if it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278;
N), set the special figure 2 fluctuation check flag (step A279).

Then, when step A279 is completed, when it is determined to be in the high probability (step A277; Y), and when it is determined to be in the high probability final fluctuation (step A278;
Y) performs the special figure 2 fluctuation process transition setting process (step A280), and ends the special figure 2 usual process.

On the other hand, when the special figure 2 reservation number is "0" (step A272; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 reservation number is "0" (step A281), and the special figure 1 reservation number is When it is determined to be "0" (step A281; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (step A282). And, when the special figure 1 is not fluctuating (step A282; N), it is determined whether or not the customer waiting demonstration has been started (step A283),
If the customer waiting demonstration has not started yet (step A283; N), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demonstration flag area (step A284). Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command corresponding to the current probability state is prepared (step A285), and effect command setting processing (step A286) is performed. In addition, when the effect command setting process is performed, a prepared command (in this case, a customer waiting demo command) is transmitted to the effect control device 300 .

And, if step A286 is completed, if it is determined that the special figure 2 is not able to start fluctuation (step A271; N), if the special figure 1 pending number is not "0" (step A281
; N), if the special figure 1 is fluctuating (step A282; Y), and if the customer waiting demonstration has already started (step A283; Y), set "0" as the processing number ( Step A287), the processing number, ie, "0", is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, which is an area for storing the special figure 2 game processing number in RWM (step A288), and the special figure 2 normal processing ends.

Thus, in this embodiment, the determination result of step A271 is affirmative,
If the special figure 2 pending number is not "0", special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A275) etc. are executed, even if special figure 1 is fluctuating (special figure 1 fluctuation display game is running) , the special figure 2 variable display game is started. That is, when the second start memory means (game control device 100) has the second start memory, the game control device 100 changes the variable display game based on the second start memory to the variable display game based on the first start memory. It constitutes control means that can be executed at the same time as the game.

[Special figure 1 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuation start processing (step A259) in the special figure 1 normal processing described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 and 27. FIG. FIG. 26 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 27 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of special figure 1 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 1 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game). In the special figure 1 variation start process, first, a special figure 1 information setting flag indicating the type of special figure variation display game to be executed (here special figure 1) is set (step A301), and the first special figure variation display game A jackpot flag 1 setting process (step A302) is performed to set deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 1 for determining whether or not it is a jackpot.

Next, special figure 1 stop design setting process (step A
303), perform special figure 1 information setting processing (step A304) for setting special figure 1 information, which is a parameter for setting the variation pattern of special figure 1, and change the first special figure variation display game Prepare a special figure 1 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to pattern setting is set (step A305). After that, a special figure 1 variation pattern setting process (step A306) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the first special figure variation display game is performed, and variation start information setting for setting information on the start of variation of the special figure variation display game. Processing (step A307) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is high probability (step A308).

Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A308; N), it is determined whether it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309), and if it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A309;
N), it is determined whether or not special figure 2 is changing (special figure 2 variation display game is being executed) (step A310). If the special figure 2 is fluctuating (step A310; Y), it is determined whether or not the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311). special figure 2
If the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is not "0" (step A311; N), it is determined whether the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A
312), when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is not, for example, "4" or more (step A312; N), the remaining fluctuation time of the special figure 2 is calculated (step A313).

It should be noted that the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer, when the special figure 2 game processing timer is a sufficient time value within the 2-byte range (for example, 60000 ms), in the fluctuation start information setting process of step A337 described later It is set to "0" (see, for example, step A500 below).

In addition, the fluctuation time of the special figure 2 (execution time of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game) can be calculated from the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area). Specifically, step A
At 313, the long fluctuation timer value (for example, 60000
m seconds) to the result of multiplying the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer, by adding the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer area at that time, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 can be calculated.

Also, if the long fluctuation timer value is, for example, 60000 ms (= 60 seconds), the fact that the value of the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is 4 or more means that the remaining fluctuation time of special figure 2 is 240 Seconds (= 4 x 60 seconds) or longer, which is longer than the longest fluctuation time of Toku-zu 1,
In that case, since it is not necessary to execute steps A315 and A316, which will be described later, step A312 is provided to determine this. Therefore, step A312
The numerical value "4" in is whether or not the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 is longer than the maximum variation time of the special figure 1. do not have.

Next, when step A313 is completed and when the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer is "0" (step A311; Y), the process moves to step A314, and the special figure 1 to be started from now on variation time (for example, the variation time set in step A306)
However, the remaining variation time of the special figure 2 currently fluctuating (the calculation result of step A313, or the special figure 2
If the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is zero, it is determined whether it is shorter than the time determined by the value of the special figure 2 game processing timer) (step A314).

And, if the variation time of special figure 1 is not shorter than the remaining variation time of special figure 2 (step A3
14; N) prepares a command to notify that the fluctuation time of special figure 1 is longer (step A315), and performs effect command setting processing (step A316).

Next, if it is during high probability (step A308; Y), if it is during high probability final fluctuation (
Step A309; Y), if special figure 2 is not fluctuating (step A310; N), special figure 2
If the number of repetitions of the game processing timer is, for example, "4" or more (step A312;
Y), if the variation time of special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining variation time of special figure 2 (step A314; Y
), and when step A316 is completed, the process proceeds to step A317 (FIG. 27).

When the process proceeds to step A317, the high probability fluctuation number update process (step A317) is performed, "1" is set as the processing number (step A318), and the special figure 1 which is an area for storing the special figure 1 game processing number in RWM The corresponding processing number, that is, "1" is displayed in the game processing number area.
' is saved (step A319), and the customer waiting demonstration flag area, which is an area for setting the customer waiting demonstration flag in the RWM, is cleared (step A320). After that, save the special figure 1 fluctuation start signal (turn on the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal) in the test signal output data area (step A321), and save the fluctuation flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area of RWM (
Step A322), save the initial value (for example, 100ms) of the blinking control timer in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area of the RWM (the blinking period timer of the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53) (step A323), The initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to the blank design) is saved in the pattern number area during the FIG. 1 fluctuation (step A324), and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is terminated. The reason why "0" is saved in the symbol number area during special figure 1 fluctuation in step A324 is to start the variable display of special figure 1 from a blank design.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start processing (step A275) in the special figure 2 normal processing described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 and 29. FIG. FIG. 28 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 29 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation start processing of the first embodiment.

The special figure 2 variation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game). In the special figure 2 variation start process, first, a special figure 2 information setting flag indicating the type of the special figure variation display game to be executed (here special figure 2) is set (step A331), and the second special figure variation display game A jackpot flag 2 setting process (step A332) is performed to set deviation information and jackpot information to the jackpot flag 2 for determining whether or not it is a jackpot.

Next, special figure 2 stop design setting processing (step A
333), perform special figure 2 information setting processing (step A334) for setting special figure 2 information which is a parameter for setting the special figure 2 variation pattern, and change the second special figure variation display game Prepare a special figure 2 variation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to pattern setting is set (step A335). After that, a special figure 2 variation pattern setting process (step A336) for setting a variation pattern which is a variation mode in the second special figure variation display game is performed, and variation start information setting for setting information on the start of variation of the special figure variation display game Processing (step A337) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the probability state of the special figure variation display game is in the high probability (step A338).

Then, if it is not in the high probability (step A338; N), it is determined whether it is in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339), and if it is not in the high probability final fluctuation (step A339;
N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 is changing (the special figure 1 variation display game is being executed) (step A340). When the special figure 1 is changing (step A340; Y), the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 is calculated (step A343). In addition, the remaining variation time of the special figure 1 can be calculated from the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer (the value of the special figure 1 game processing timer area).

Next, when step A343 is completed, the process moves to step A344, and the fluctuation time of special figure 2 about to start from now (for example, the fluctuation time set in step A336) is currently fluctuating special figure 1 It is determined whether or not it is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (calculated result of step A343) (step A344).

And if the variation time of special figure 2 is not shorter than the remaining variation time of special figure 1 (step A3
44; N) prepares a command to notify that the fluctuation time of special figure 2 is longer (step A345), and performs the effect command setting process (step A346).

Next, if it is during high probability (step A338; Y), if it is during high probability final fluctuation (
Step A339; Y), if Toku-zu 1 is not fluctuating (Step A340; N), Toku-zu 2
If the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 is shorter than the remaining fluctuation time (step A344; Y), and
When step A346 is completed, the process proceeds to step A347 (FIG. 29).

When the process proceeds to step A347, the high probability fluctuation count update process (step A347) is performed, "1" is set as the processing number (step A348), and the special figure 2 is an area for storing the special figure 2 game processing number in RWM. The corresponding processing number, that is, "1" is displayed in the game processing number area.
' is saved (step A349), and the customer waiting demonstration flag area, which is an area for setting the customer waiting demonstration flag in the RWM, is cleared (step A350). After that, save the special figure 2 fluctuation start signal (turn on the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal) in the test signal output data area (step A351), and save the fluctuation flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area of RWM (
Step A352), save the initial value (for example, 100ms) of the blinking control timer (the blinking period timer of the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area of RWM (step A353), The initial value (for example, "0" corresponding to the blank design) is saved in the pattern number area during the FIG. 2 fluctuation (step A354), and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is terminated. It should be noted that the reason why "0" is saved in the special figure 2 fluctuation pattern number area in step A354 is to start the variation display of the special figure 2 from the blank design.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A307, A337) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31. FIG.
FIG. 30 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of a change start information setting process according to the first embodiment;
is. FIG. 31 is a diagram (
2).

In the fluctuation start information setting process, first, the target fluctuation pattern random number 1, the fluctuation pattern random number 2,
And the information in the random number storage area for the fluctuation pattern random number 3 is cleared. In other words, it is determined whether or not the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A491), and if the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A
In 491; Y), the information (for holding ball 1) in the random number storage area (for holding ball 1) of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2, and fluctuation pattern random number 3 of special figure 1 is cleared (step A491a ). Also, if the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step A491; N), the information of the random number storage area of the variation pattern random number 1, the variation pattern random number 2, and the variation pattern random number 3 of the special figure 2 is cleared (step A491b).

Next, the first half variation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half variation time value corresponding to the first half variation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is obtained (step A495).

Then, the first half variable time value and the second half variable time value are added (step A496), and the added value is the target special figure game processing timer area (that is, special figure 1 game processing timer area during information setting of special figure 1, During the information setting of the special figure 2, it saves in the special figure 2 game processing timer area) (step A497).

Next, it is determined whether or not special figure 1 information is being set (step A498), and if the special figure 1 information is not being set (step A498; N), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 is a long fluctuation start (step A49
9), if it is not a long fluctuation start of special figure 2 (step A499; N), in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (an area that stores the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer in RWM) " 0” is saved (step A500).

On the other hand, if it is a long fluctuation start of special figure 2 (step A499; Y), "9" is saved in the repetition number area of the special figure 2 game processing timer (step A501). And when the information setting of special figure 1 is in progress (step A498; Y), when the processing of steps A500 and A501 is completed, the process proceeds to step A502.

In addition, in order to change the time that is not enough with a 2-byte special game processing timer, special figure 2
The number of repetitions (the number of repetitions of the special figure 2 game processing timer) is set for the long fluctuation. Also, as the addition result of step A496, for example, 60000 ms is set in the special figure 2 game processing timer area at step A497, and when "9" is saved as the number of repetitions at step A501, timer interrupt processing (step A33 described above) The value of the special figure 2 game processing timer is decremented, and when the time is up, the number of repetitions of the special figure game processing timer is decremented by 1 in the above-described step A36, and further in the above-described step A37, the special figure 2 game processing timer area. 60000ms is set. Therefore, in this case, as a result, the total variable time of Special Figure 2 is 60000ms×10=10 minute variable time in this embodiment. Actually, since it is a timer interrupt of 4 ms, it can be set up to about 262 seconds with 2 bytes.

Next, at step A502, the variable command data (MODE) corresponding to the first half variable number is prepared (step A502), and the variable command data (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variable number is prepared (step A503). ), effect command setting processing is performed (step A504).

Although detailed explanation is omitted, in the effect command setting process, the prepared command data (MODE and ACTION) are written into the effect serial transmission buffer as long as the effect serial transmission buffer is not full. As a result, an effect command composed of prepared command data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 by serial communication using the serial communication function of the CPU 111A in the game control device 100 . The same applies when the effect command setting process is executed by being called in another step. Also, in the case of this flowchart, the command is transmitted in a 2-byte configuration such as "MODE" and "ACTION" like an effect command, but it may be transmitted in a more byte configuration. In those cases, the flow chart should correspond to the multi-byte configuration.

Next, when step A504 ends, it is determined whether or not the information of special figure 1 is being set (step A
505), if the information of the special figure 1 is being set (step A505; Y), the special figure 1 reservation number is updated by "-1" (step A506), the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 1 After setting, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507), the information of the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508), and the fluctuation start information setting process is completed.

On the other hand, if the information of the special figure 1 is not set (step A505; N), the special figure 2 reservation number is updated by "-1" (step A506a), and the address of the random number storage area of the special figure 2 is set Then, the random number storage area of the address is shifted (step A507a), the information on the free area after the shift is cleared (step A508a), and the fluctuation start information setting process is terminated.

Information about the start of the special figure variation display game is set by the above processing. i.e.
The game control device 100 serves as determination means for determining various random numbers stored in the starting memory means (RAM 111C). Also, the game control device 100 serves as variation pattern determination means capable of determining the variation pattern of the identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information in the starting memory.

Then, the information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games is transmitted to the production control device 300 by the production command setting process described above, and in the production control device 300, based on the reception of the information on the start of the special figure fluctuation display game, According to the determined variation pattern, detailed performance contents in the decoration special figure variation display game are set, and the decoration special figure variation display game is executed. Information on the start of these special figure fluctuation display games includes a decoration special figure reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), a decoration special figure command including information on the stop pattern, and a variation of the special figure fluctuation display game Variation commands including information on patterns (sometimes referred to as variation pattern commands, etc.) are included, and each production command is transmitted to the production control device 300 in a predetermined order as shown in the flowchart of the present embodiment, for example. .

[High-probability fluctuation frequency update process]
Next, high probability fluctuation number update processing in special figure 1 fluctuation start process and special figure 2 fluctuation start process (
Details of steps A317 and A347) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 shows the first
It is a diagram showing a flowchart of high probability fluctuation frequency update processing of the embodiment.

In the high probability fluctuation count update process, first, it is determined whether the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game is in the high probability (step A551), and if it is not in the special figure high probability (step A551; N
), the high-probability variation count update process ends.

In addition, when one of the types of special figure variation display games of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is in the jackpot gaming state, the winning probability of the other variation display game is always controlled to be low, but one is low. In the case of a hit, the other may be in high probability.

If it is in the high probability (step A551; Y), the number of high probability fluctuations managing the number of executions of the special figure fluctuation display game to be in the high probability state is updated by "-1" (step A552), and the high probability fluctuation It is determined whether or not the number of times is "0" (step A553).

If the high probability variation count is not "0" (step A553; N), the high probability variation count update process is terminated. If the number of high probability fluctuations is "0" (step A553; Y),
A signal relating to high-probability termination is saved in the external information output data area (step A555).
It should be noted that the signal relating to the high-probability end is a signal that turns off the big win 2 signal.

And the signal regarding the end of high probability & time saving (high probability & no time saving or high probability & time saving) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A556). In addition, the signal related to the end of high probability & time reduction is a signal to turn off the special symbol 1 high probability state signal, a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 high probability state signal, and a special symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal to turn off a signal to
It includes a signal to turn off the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal and a signal to turn off the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal. Also, even in the special figure high probability, since only the probability state changes in the general figure, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric accessory 1 open extension state signal are always turned off.

Then, save the number in the low probability in the game state display number area (step A557), save the special figure low probability & no time saving flag in the special figure game mode flag area (step A559
), set the high probability final fluctuation flag corresponding to the pattern (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to start fluctuation (step A560), and end the high probability fluctuation frequency update process.

In addition, the high probability final variation flag includes information that can determine the type of the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 or special figure 2) that is the high probability final variation. Also, in the high-probability final fluctuation, the internal probability becomes low at the start of the fluctuation. This is the probability final change flag. Thus, in the case of the present embodiment, in the high probability final fluctuation, the probability state of the target special figure (the setting state in the game control device 100) is returned to the low probability at the start of fluctuation. As a result, when the game ball enters the starting hole during the special figure variation which is the final round in the high probability state, it is possible to prevent the problem that the hit judgment for this starting prize is judged with a high probability.

[Special figure 1 processing during fluctuation]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 fluctuating process (step A9) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 33 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 1 fluctuation of the first embodiment. FIG. 34 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 1 fluctuation of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 fluctuation process, first, the number of times of output of the fixed number of symbols is updated by "+1" (step A5
71), load the command from the decoration special figure 1 command area (decoration special figure 1 command including the information of the stop pattern about the special figure 1), prepare (step A572), and perform the effect command setting process (step A573) .

Next, prepare a decorative special figure 1 stop command (symbol stop command for special figure 1) (step A574), perform production command setting processing (step A575), high probability final depending on the state of the high probability final variation flag It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A576). Then, if it is not a high probability final variation (step A576; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is displayed in the special figure 1 variation display game this time. (step A577), and if it is a high probability final fluctuation (step A576; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation is this special figure 1
The stop display time of the variable display game is set (step A578), and the process proceeds to step A579. Here, the stop display time set in steps A577 and A578 is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A579, for example.

As an example of the display time of the special figure 1, in the case of the first embodiment, 600 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is the lost symbol pattern, and the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern. In some cases, 2000 ms is set as the display time, and 136 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a small hit symbol pattern.
Also, the display time of the high-probability final variation is set to 7000 ms.

Next, when moving to step A579 (FIG. 34), it is determined whether or not the current (currently running) special figure 1 variation display game is lost based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 1 setting process. (Step A579), in case of failure (Step A579; Y), Step A
Move to 594, if not lost (step A579; N), the current special figure 2 is also changing (
It is determined whether or not special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step A580).

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the special figure 2 is fluctuating is performed by either the information of the special figure 2 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area, or the information of the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area can be done. That is, if "1" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area, it may be determined that it is changing, and if the special figure 2 is changing is set in the special figure status area, it is determined that it is changing It may be a configuration, it may be a configuration that determines that it is fluctuating if the flag is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area, or it may be a configuration that determines a combination of these conditions.

And, when the special figure 2 is also fluctuating (step A580; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (step A581), and the special figure 2 displaying process is not being executed In case (step A581; N), the design determination number output number is updated by "+1" (step A
582).

Next, if step A582 is completed and if the special figure 2 displaying process is being executed (step A581; Y), the special figure 1 display time (the time set in step A577 etc.) For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of special figure 2 (step A58
3), save the display time of the special figure 2 in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A5
84). By the processing of steps A583 and A584, when the special figure 2 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 2 is reset. Due to this resetting, the display time of Toku-zu 2 is basically extended, but in some cases it may be shortened.

After that, load the command (decorative special figure 2 command including the information of the stop symbol about the special figure 2) from the decorative special figure 2 command area, prepare (step A585), and perform the production command setting process (step A586). Next, prepare a decorative special figure 2 stop command (symbol stop command for special figure 2) (step A587), production command setting process (step A
588) is performed, and the processing transition setting processing 2 (step A589) during special figure 2 display is performed.

In addition, according to the processing of steps A579 to A589 described above, when the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of this time in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure that is fluctuating at the same time 2 is forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A589 is completed, and when special figure 2 is not fluctuating (step A5
80; N) loads the command from the decorative special figure 1 command area, saves it in the winning pattern command area (step A590), and determines whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game of this time is a small hit (step A591) .

Then, if it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A591; N), information from the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (special figure 1
Load the special figure 1 round number upper limit information that determines the round number upper limit value), save it in the round number upper limit information area (step A592), load the information from the special figure 1 large winning opening information area, and win a big prize Save in the mouth open information area (step A593).

Next, if this special figure 1 variation display game is lost (step A579; Y), if this special figure 1 variation display game is a small hit (step A591; Y), and step A5
If step 93 has been completed, the process proceeds to step A594. When moving to step A594,
Load the information (stop design number) from the special figure 1 stop design save area, save it in the special figure 1 stop design area (step A594), perform the special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1 (step A595), Special figure 1 end processing during fluctuation. In addition, in the special figure 1 stop symbol evacuation area, special figure 1
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

Thus, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Also, the game control device 100 serves as means for ending the variation display game based on the second start memory that is being executed at the same time when the variation display game based on the first start memory results in a special result (win).

[Special Figure 2 Fluctuation Processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuating process (step A49) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 35 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of special figure 2 fluctuation processing of the first embodiment. FIG. 36 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 2 fluctuation of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 fluctuation process, first, the design determination number output number is updated by "+1" (step A6
01), load the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area (decorative special figure 2 command including the information of the stop pattern for the special figure 2), prepare (step A602), and perform the production command setting process (step A603) .

Next, prepare a decorative special figure 2 stop command (symbol stop command for special figure 2) (step A604), perform production command setting processing (step A605), high probability final depending on the state of the high probability final variation flag It is determined whether or not there is a change (step A606). Then, if it is not a high probability final variation (step A606; N), the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern saved in the stop symbol pattern area in the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process is displayed in the special figure 2 variation display game this time. (step A607), and if it is a high probability final fluctuation (step A606; Y), the display time at the time of the high probability final fluctuation is this special figure 2
It is set as the stop display time of the variable display game (step A608), and the process proceeds to step A609. Here, the stop display time set in steps A607 and A608 is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area in a step (not shown) provided immediately before step A609, for example.

As an example of the display time of the special figure 2, in the case of the first embodiment, 600 ms is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is the lost symbol pattern, and the stop symbol pattern is the jackpot symbol pattern. 600 ms is set as the display time even in the case where there is, and 600 ms is set as the display time even when the stop symbol pattern is the small hit symbol pattern. Also, the display time of the high-probability final variation is set to 7000 ms. In the case of the first embodiment, the same display time is set for the stop symbol pattern, the big-hit symbol pattern, and the small-hit symbol pattern, but different display times may be set for each.

Next, when moving to step A609 (FIG. 36), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of this time (currently being executed) is lost based on the information determined and set in the big hit flag 2 setting process. (Step A609), in case of failure (Step A609; Y), Step A
624, if it is not lost (step A609; N), the current special figure 1 is also changing (
It is determined whether or not special figure 2 variation display game is being executed (step A610).

It should be noted that the determination of whether or not the special figure 1 is fluctuating is performed by either the information of the special figure 1 game processing number area, the information of the special figure status area, or the information of the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area can be done. That is, if "1" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area, it may be determined that it is changing, and if special figure 1 is changing is set in the special figure status area, it is determined that it is changing It may be a configuration, it may be configured to determine that it is fluctuating if the fluctuating flag is saved in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area, or it may be a configuration that is determined by a combination of these conditions.

And, if the special figure 1 is also fluctuating (step A610; Y), it is determined whether or not the special figure 1 displaying process is being executed (step A611), and the special figure 1 displaying process is not being executed In case (step A611; N), the design determination number output number is updated by "+1" (step A
612).

Next, if step A612 is completed and if special figure 1 display processing is being executed (step A611; Y), the display time of special figure 2 this time (step A607 etc.) to For example, the result of adding 4 ms is set as the display time of special figure 1 (step A61
3), save the display time of the special figure 1 in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A6
14). By the processing of steps A613 and A614, when the special figure 1 has already started the stop display, the display time of the special figure 1 is reset. Due to this resetting, the display time of Toku-zu 1 is basically extended, but in some cases it may be shortened.

After that, load the command (decorative special figure 1 command including the information of the stop symbol about the special figure 1) from the decorative special figure 1 command area, prepare (step A615), and perform the production command setting process (step A616). Next, prepare a decorative special figure 1 stop command (symbol stop command for special figure 1) (step A617), production command setting process (step A
618) is performed, and the process shift setting process 2 (step A619) during special figure 1 display is performed.

In addition, according to the processing of steps A609 to A619 described above, if the special figure 2 fluctuation display game of this time in which the decoration pattern is stopped and displayed is a hit (big hit or small hit), the special figure that is changing at the same time The variable display of 1 is forcibly terminated.

Next, when step A619 is completed and when special figure 1 is not changing (step A6
10; N) loads the command from the decorative special figure 2 command area, saves it in the hit pattern command area (step A620), and determines whether or not this special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit (step A621) .

Then, if it is a big hit and not a small hit (step A621; N), information (special figure 2
Load the special figure 2 round number upper limit information that determines the round number upper limit value), save it in the round number upper limit information area (step A622), load the information from the special figure 2 large winning opening information area, and win a big prize Save in the open mouth information area (step A623).

Next, if this special figure 2 variation display game is lost (step A609; Y), if this special figure 2 variation display game is a small hit (step A621; Y), and step A6
23 is completed, the process proceeds to step A624. When moving to step A624,
Load the information (stop design number) from the special figure 2 stop design save area, save it in the special figure 2 stop design area (step A624), perform the special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1 (step A625), End the special figure 2 during fluctuation processing. In addition, in the special figure 2 stop symbol evacuation area, special figure 2
A predetermined stop symbol number is saved in the stop symbol setting process.

Thus, the game control device 100 serves as stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game. Also, the game control device 100 serves as a means for terminating the variation display game currently being executed based on the first start memory when the variation display game based on the second start memory results in a special result (win).

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 1 (step A
595) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 37 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 1 during special figure 1 display of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1, first, "2" which is the process number related to the special figure 1 displaying process is set as the process number (step A631), and the special figure 1 game process number area The process Save the number, namely "2" (step A632).

Next, the signal related to the special figure 1 fluctuation end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A633). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is a signal that turns off the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 pattern display unit 53,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display section 53 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A634), and the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 1]
Next, special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 1 (step A
625) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 38 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the process shift setting process 1 during special figure 2 display of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 displaying processing transition setting process 1, first, "2" which is the processing number related to the special figure 2 displaying process is set as the processing number (step A641), and the special figure 2 game processing number area The processing Save the number, namely "2" (step A642).

Next, the signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A643). In addition, the signal related to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a signal that turns off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 design display section 54 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step A644), and the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 1 is ended.

[Special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2]
Next, special figure 1 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step A
619) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a flowchart of processing transition setting processing 2 during special figure 1 display of the first embodiment. It should be noted that this special figure 1 display process transition setting process 2, when the special figure 2 variation display game that started the variation is a hit, ends the special figure 1 variation display game that has been fluctuating at the same time forcibly losing. This is a process to allow That is, it is a process for setting information when the game is forced to stop when the other symbol hits.

In the special figure 1 displaying processing transition setting process 2, first, "2" which is the processing number related to the special figure 1 displaying process is set as the processing number (step A651), and the processing is performed in the special figure 1 game processing number area Save the number, namely "2" (step A652).

Next, the signal related to the special figure 1 fluctuation end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A653). In addition, the signal regarding the special figure 1 fluctuation end is a signal that turns off the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 1 fluctuation display game in the special figure 1 pattern display unit 53,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 1 symbol display unit 53 is saved in the special figure 1 variation control flag area (step A654), and the stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in RWM ) (step A655). In addition, in the stop symbol pattern area, a predetermined stop symbol pattern (depending on the extracted random number, a winning stop symbol pattern is usually already set in the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process) for the special figure 1 variable display game being executed. ) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a win, it is forcibly rewritten to the lost stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in steps A656 to A661 subsequent to this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular steps, it is cleared or set again due to forced termination due to a mistake.

Next, clear the special figure 1 round number upper limit information area (area for storing special figure 1 round number upper limit information in RWM) (step A656), special figure 1 big winning opening information area (RW
Area for storing special figure 1 big winning mouth open information in M) clear (step A657),
The offset information is saved in the small hit flag 1 area (step A658). The deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 1 area (step A659). Here, the small hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 1 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 1, and information on whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a small hit or whether it is a big hit. It is an area of RWM that stores such information, and information is normally set in the jackpot flag 1 setting process,
That information is reconfigured here.

Next, clear the special figure 1 stop design save area (step A660), save the deviation stop design number in the special figure 1 stop design area (step A661), and end the special figure 1 displaying process transition setting process 2 .

[Special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2]
Next, special figure 2 display processing transition setting processing 2 (step A
589) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a flow chart of processing shift setting processing 2 during special figure 2 display of the first embodiment. It should be noted that this special figure 2 display process transition setting process 2, when the special figure 1 variation display game that started the variation is a hit, the special figure 2 variation display game that was fluctuating at the same time is forcibly ended with a loss. This is a process to allow That is, it is a process for setting information when the game is forced to stop when the other symbol hits.

In the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2, first, "2", which is the process number related to the special figure 2 displaying process, is set as the process number (step A671), and the special figure 2 game process number area The process Save the number, namely "2" (step A672).

Next, the signal related to the special figure 2 fluctuation end is saved in the test signal output data area (step A673). In addition, the signal related to the end of the special figure 2 fluctuation is a signal that turns off the special symbol 2 fluctuation signal.

After that, as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game in the special figure 2 pattern display unit 54,
The stop flag related to the fluctuation stop in the special figure 2 symbol display unit 54 is saved in the special figure 2 variation control flag area (step A674), and the stop symbol pattern is stored in the stop symbol pattern area (area for storing the stop symbol pattern in RWM ) (step A675). In addition, in this stop design pattern area, for the special figure 2 variable display game being executed, a predetermined stop design pattern (depending on the extracted random number, it is a winning stop design pattern) is usually already set in the special figure 2 stop design setting process. ) is saved, but here, even if the saved stop symbol pattern is a win, it is forcibly rewritten to the lost stop symbol pattern. Similarly, in steps A676 to A681 subsequent to this routine, even if there is data once set in the regular steps, it is cleared or set again due to forced termination due to a mistake.

Next, clear the special figure 2 round number upper limit information area (area for storing special figure 2 round number upper limit information in RWM) (step A676), special figure 2 large winning opening information area (RW
Area for storing special figure 2 big winning mouth open information in M) clear (step A677),
The offset information is saved in the small hit flag 2 area (step A678). The deviation information is saved in the jackpot flag 2 area (step A679). Here, the small hit flag 2 area and the big hit flag 2 area are the small hit flag area and the big hit flag area for the special figure 2, and information on whether or not the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is a small hit or whether it is a big hit. It is an area of RWM that stores such information, and information is normally set in the jackpot flag 2 setting process,
That information is reconfigured here.

Next, clear the special figure 2 stop design save area (step A680), save the deviation stop design number in the special figure 2 stop design area (step A681), and end the special figure 2 displaying process transition setting process 2 .

[Special figure 1 display processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 displaying process (step A10) in the special figure 1 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 41 is a diagram (part 1) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 1 display of the first embodiment. FIG. 42 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 1 display of the first embodiment. FIG. 43 is a diagram (part 3) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 1 display of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 1 display process, first, the small hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A701), and the information of the small hit flag 1 area of RWM Clear (step A702).

Then, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A703), and the information of the big hit flag 1 area of RWM is cleared (step A704). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A705), and if it is determined to be a big hit (step A705; Y), the first special figure variation display game big hit (special figure 1 Jackpot) saves the signal related to the start of the RWM test signal output data area (step A706), prepares the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (step A707), performs the production command setting process (step A708), and the number of rounds An upper limit value table is set (step A709). In addition, the signal related to the start of the special figure 1 jackpot is a signal to turn on the condition device operating signal, a signal to turn on the character continuous operation device operating signal, and a signal to turn on the special symbol 1 winning signal. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A709), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "
4", and others, such as "8" or "2", are acquired, and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A710). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

Next, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the winning symbol command area of RWM, prepared (step A712), and the effect command setting process (step A71
3). Subsequently, prepare a fanfare command corresponding to the pattern information (stop pattern number or stop pattern pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop pattern setting process (step A
714), effect command setting processing (step A715) is performed.

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A716). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A716, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON for jackpots other than 2R jackpot, ON for high probability 2R jackpot, and OFF for low probability 2R jackpot. The big win 3 signal is turned on for a big win other than 2R sudden probability, turned off for a high probability 2R sudden probability big hit, and turned on for a low probability 2R sudden probability big hit.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000m
s, 4700ms, 7700ms, or 300ms) (step A717)
, the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 1 game processing timer area (step A718).

Clear the information in the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings (step A720), save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the flag area for fraud monitoring period (step A721), and step A72.
Go to 4.

When the process proceeds to step A724, 3 is set as the processing number (step A724), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 1 game processing number area (step A725), and the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (step A726) is performed, and the processing during special figure 1 display is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A705, if the jackpot flag 1 is not a jackpot (step A705
;N) determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727
), when it is determined that the small hit flag 1 is a small hit (step A727; Y), it is determined whether or not the high probability final variation is in progress (step A728).

Then, in step A728, if it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A
In 728; Y), prepare a probability information command relating to information that sets the probability of winning results in the normal pattern variation display game and the special pattern variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A729). , effect command setting processing (step A730) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A731), and the right hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (step A732). In step A732, assuming that a right-handed instruction is notified in a high-probability state, the high-probability final variation is determined and the high-probability state ends, so the right-handed instruction notification flag is cleared. exemplified. However, if the present embodiment is a mode that does not perform right-handed instruction notification in a high probability state, step A
732 is the deleted configuration (or step A 732
Then, there is also a configuration in which the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared).

Next, when step A732 is completed and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A
728;N), load a command from the hit symbol command area and prepare (step A
733), effect command setting processing (step A734) is performed. Subsequently, prepare a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the pattern information (stop pattern number or stop pattern pattern) set in the special figure 1 stop pattern setting process (step A735), and effect command setting process (step A736) and determines whether or not the game state is a predetermined state in which left-handed hitting is to be performed (for example, neither the general electric support state nor the jackpot state nor the special mode state) (step A737).

When it is determined in step A737 that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A73
In 7; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit to the left is saved in the test signal output data area (step A738). It should be noted that the signal relating to the instruction to hit left is, for example, a signal that turns off firing position designation signal 1 . Next, in order to turn off the display LED during right hitting, the game state display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A739), and the process proceeds to step A743.

On the other hand, if it is not determined that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A737; N), the signal related to the right-handed instruction is saved in the test signal output data area (step A740).
). The signal related to the instruction to hit to the right is, for example, a signal that turns on firing position designation signal 1 . Next, in order to light the right-handed display LED, the right-handed number is saved in the game state display number 2 area (step A741), and the process proceeds to step A743.

When the process proceeds to step A743, the information in the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings is cleared (step A743), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area for fraud monitoring period for the major winning opening (step A744), and the process proceeds to step A747. .

When the process proceeds to step A747, special figure 1 small per fanfare middle process transition setting process (step A747) is performed, and special figure 1 during display process is terminated. In addition, in the special figure 1 small winning fanfare middle process transition setting process, the process of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 1 game processing number area, the small winning fanfare time (for example, 4
m seconds) is saved.

On the other hand, in step A727, when it is determined that the small hit flag 1 is not a small hit (step A727; N), it is determined whether or not it is during the high probability final fluctuation (step A748).
Then, in step A748, if it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A
In 748; Y), prepare a probability information command relating to information that sets the probability of winning results in the normal pattern variation display game and the special pattern variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A749). , effect command setting processing (step A750) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A751), and the right hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (step A752), it is determined whether or not the special figure 2 variable display game is hitting (during the big hit or the small hit) (step A753). It should be noted that step A752 is merely an example assuming a mode in which an instruction to hit to the right is given in a high-probability state, similarly to step A732 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 2 fluctuation display game is not hit (step A753; N)
, the signal related to the left-handed instruction (fire position designation signal 1 is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A754), and in order to extinguish the display LED during right-handed hitting, the game state display number 2 area is left The number being hit is saved (step A755). In addition, in this embodiment, when the special figure 2 variable display game is in the middle of the hit (during the big hit or the small hit), the big winning opening (special variable winning device 38) that is opened at that time is hit right. To be in a state to be, if the special figure 2 is hit (step A753; Y), steps A754, A7
55 to move to step A756. Also, when step A755 is completed, the process proceeds to step A756.

Then, when moving to step A756, the special figure 1 of the special figure status area in RWM
Clear (information subtraction) (step A756) the information indicating that it is changing (executing the special figure 1 fluctuation display game) (step A756), and the processing number related to the special figure 1 normal processing in the special figure 1 game processing number area, that is, "0"
is saved (step A757), and the processing during special figure 1 display is terminated. Note that step A75
When 6 is executed, the special figure status is either the state in which only the special figure 2 is fluctuating, or the state in which neither the special figure 1 nor the special figure 2 is fluctuating.

[Special figure 2 display process]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 displaying process (step A50) in the special figure 2 game process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 44 is a diagram (Part 1) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 2 display of the first embodiment. FIG. 45 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 2 display of the first embodiment. FIG. 46 is a diagram (part 3) showing a flowchart of processing during special figure 2 display of the first embodiment.

In the special figure 2 display process, first, the small hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A761), and the information of the small hit flag 2 area of RWM is loaded. Clear (step A762).

Then, the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A763), and the information of the big hit flag 2 area of RWM is cleared (step A764). Then, it is determined whether or not the loaded jackpot flag 2 is a jackpot (step A765). Jackpot) saves the signal related to the start of the RWM test signal output data area (step A766), prepares the special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation cancellation command (step A767), performs the production command setting process (step A768), and the number of rounds An upper limit table is set (step A769). In addition, the signal related to the start of the special figure 2 jackpot is a signal that turns on the condition device operating signal, a signal that turns on the continuous action device operating signal, and a signal that turns on the special symbol 2 winning signal. include.

Next, after setting the round number upper limit table (step A769), the round number upper limit value corresponding to the round number upper limit information (in the case of the first embodiment, for example, "16" or "
4", and others, such as "8" and "2") are acquired and saved in the round number upper limit area of the RWM (step A770). Subsequently, a round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A771).

Next, the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the winning special figure command area of RWM and prepared (step A772), and the production command setting process (step A77
3). Subsequently, prepare a fanfare command corresponding to the design information (stop design number or stop design pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop design setting process (step A
774), effect command setting processing (step A775) is performed.

Next, the big winning hole opening information and the signal corresponding to the state of the probability of winning results in the normal figure variation display game and the special figure variation display game are saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A776). In the case of the first embodiment, in step A776, the big win 2 signal and the big win 3 signal are saved as the signals corresponding to the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. It should be noted that each ON/OFF is determined by the big winning opening opening information and the state of the probability. For example, the jackpot 2 signal is ON for jackpots other than 2R jackpot, ON for high probability 2R jackpot, and OFF for low probability 2R jackpot. The big win 3 signal is turned on for a big win other than 2R sudden probability, turned off for a high probability 2R sudden probability big hit, and turned on for a low probability 2R sudden probability big hit.

After that, the jackpot fanfare time (for example, 5000m
s, 4700ms, 7700ms, or 300ms) (step A777)
, the set jackpot fanfare time is saved in the special figure 2 game processing timer area (step A778).

Clear the information in the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings (step A780), save the flag outside the fraud monitoring period in the flag area for fraud monitoring period (step A781), and step A78.
Go to 4.

When the process proceeds to step A784, 3 is set as the processing number (step A784), the processing number, that is, "3" is saved in the special figure 2 game processing number area (step A785), and the fanfare/interval processing transition setting processing (step A786) is performed, and the processing during special figure 2 display is terminated.

On the other hand, in step A765, if the jackpot flag 2 is not a jackpot (step A765
;N) determines whether or not the loaded small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787
), when it is determined that the small hit flag 2 is a small hit (step A787; Y), it is determined whether or not the high probability final variation is in progress (step A788).

Then, in step A788, when it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A
In 788; Y), prepare a probability information command relating to information that sets the probability of winning results in the normal pattern variation display game and the special pattern variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A789). , effect command setting processing (step A790) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A791), and the right hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (step A792). In step A792, assuming a mode in which a right-handed instruction is notified in a high-probability state, it is determined as a high-probability final variation and the high-probability state has ended, so the configuration of clearing the right-handed instruction notification flag exemplified. However, if the present embodiment is a mode that does not perform right-handed instruction notification in a high probability state, step A
792 is the deleted configuration (or step A792
Then, there is also a configuration in which the left-handed instruction notification flag is cleared).

Next, when step A792 is completed and when the high probability final fluctuation is not in progress (step A
788;N), load a command from the hit symbol command area and prepare (step A
793), effect command setting processing (step A794) is performed. Subsequently, prepare a small hit fanfare command corresponding to the pattern information (stop pattern number or stop pattern pattern) set in the special figure 2 stop pattern setting process (step A795), and effect command setting process (step A796) to determine whether or not the game state is a predetermined state in which left-handed hitting is to be performed (for example, neither the general electric support state nor the jackpot state nor the special mode state) (step A797).

If it is determined in step A797 that the predetermined state should be left-handed (step A79
7; Y), the signal relating to the instruction to hit left is saved in the test signal output data area (step A798). It should be noted that the signal relating to the instruction to hit left is, for example, a signal that turns off firing position designation signal 1 . Next, in order to turn off the display LED during right hitting, the game state display number 2
The number in the left-handed state is saved in the area (step A799), and the process proceeds to step A803.

When the process moves to step A803, the information in the area for the number of fraudulent prize winnings is cleared (step A803), the flag outside the fraud monitoring period is saved in the flag area for fraudulent monitoring period for major winning openings (step A804), and the process proceeds to step A807. .

When the process proceeds to step A807, special figure 2 small hit fanfare middle process transition setting process (step A807) is performed, and the special figure 2 display process is terminated. In addition, in the special figure 2 small winning fanfare medium process transition setting process, the process of saving "7" as the processing number in the special figure 2 game processing number area, the small winning fanfare time (for example, 4
m seconds) is saved.

On the other hand, in step A787, when it is determined that the small hit flag 2 is not a small hit (step A787; N), it is determined whether or not it is during the high probability final fluctuation (step A808).
Then, in step A808, when it is determined that the high-probability final fluctuation is in progress (step A
In 808; Y), prepare a probability information command relating to information that sets the probability of winning results in the normal pattern variation display game and the special pattern variation display game to the normal probability state (low probability state) (step A809). , effect command setting processing (step A810) is performed. Subsequently, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the transmission command area at the time of power failure recovery to save the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A811), and the right hitting instruction notification flag is cleared (step A812), determine whether or not the special figure 1 variable display game is a big hit (
Step A813). It should be noted that step A812 is merely an example assuming a mode in which an instruction to hit to the right is given in a high-probability state, similarly to step A792 described above.

Next, when it is determined that the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is not in the big hit (step A813; N
), the signal related to the left-handed instruction (turning off the firing position designation signal 1) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A814), and the game state display number 2 area is saved in order to turn off the display LED during right-handed hitting. The number in the left-handed state is saved (step A815). In addition, in this embodiment, when the special figure 1 variable display game is in the midst of a big hit, the big winning opening (
Special variable winning device 38) is aimed at the right hand, so if the special figure 1 is in the middle of a big hit (step A813; Y), skip steps A814 and A815 and move to step A816. . In addition, in this embodiment, when the special figure 1 is not in the big hit (step A8
13; N) (including the case where the special figure 1 is in the small hit), after executing steps A814 and A815, the process proceeds to step A816. However, the content of the processing related to such a right-handed and left-handed player changes depending on the board configuration of the gaming machine and game characteristics, and is merely an example. Also, here, when step A815 ends, the process proceeds to step A816.

Then, when moving to step A816, the special figure 2 of the special figure status area in RWM
Clear (information subtraction) (step A816) information indicating that it is fluctuating (running the special figure 2 fluctuation display game), and the special figure 2 game processing number area The processing number related to special figure 2 normal processing, that is, "0"
Save (step A817), and end the special figure 2 display process. Note that step A81
When 6 is executed, the special figure status is either a state in which only special figure 1 is changing, or a state in which neither special figure 1 nor special figure 2 is changing.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S78) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 47 and 48. FIG. FIG. 47 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment. FIG. 48 is a diagram (part 2) showing a flowchart of external information editing processing according to the first embodiment.

In the external information editing process, payout command transmission process (step S72), winning opening switch /
Based on the monitoring results of the status monitoring process (step S67), the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S76), and the board radio fraud monitoring process (step S77), external devices such as information collecting terminals and game hall internal management devices, and trial shooting tests It performs processing such as creating information to be output to the device and setting it in the output buffer.

In the external information editing process, first, a process of setting information according to the error state and security state is performed. In the process of setting information according to the error state and security state, when a glass frame open error is occurring (step C71; Y) and a body frame open error is occurring (step C72; Y), the door/frame The ON data of the release signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C73), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C74). That is, the occurrence of the glass frame open error and the body frame open error are output as external information and test signals.

On the other hand, if neither the glass frame open error nor the body frame open error has occurred (steps C71 to C72; N), the OFF data of the door/frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C75), the security signal OFF data is saved in the external information output data area (step C76).

Next, a security signal control timer that counts a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time the data stored in the RAM is initialized by operating the initialization switch or the like is set to "0".
If not, it is updated by "-1" (step C77). Note that the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to "0". And the value of the security signal control timer is "0"
(step C78).

If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step C78; N), that is, if the time has not expired, the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step C79). On the other hand, if the value of the security signal control timer is "0"
(step C78; Y), that is, if the time is up, step C79
is passed. That is, during the period from when the data stored in the RAM is initialized in the main processing described above and the initial value (for example, 256 ms) is saved in the security signal control timer until the security signal control timer times out, ON data of the security signal is output as external information.

Next, magnet fraud is occurring (step C80; Y), board radio fraud is occurring (step C81;
Y), frame radio fraud is occurring (step C82; Y), big winning mouth fraud is occurring (step C83
; Y), or when special figure 2 abnormal fluctuation is occurring (step C84; Y), the security signal ON data is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the gaming machine error state signal ON data is saved. Save in the test signal output data area (step C86). In addition, even when electric fraud is occurring, similarly, the ON data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step C85), and the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area. (Step C86) It is good also as composition.

On the other hand, if neither magnet fraud, board radio fraud, frame radio fraud, general electricity fraud, big winning mouth fraud, or special figure 2 abnormal change has occurred (steps C80 to C84; N), switch abnormality 1 or It is determined whether or not the switch abnormality of the switch abnormality 2 is occurring (step C87).
If none of the switch abnormalities are occurring (step C87; N), the OFF data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C88).

If any switch abnormality is occurring (step C87; Y), the ON data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step C8).
6). Here, special figure 2 abnormal fluctuations, switch abnormalities, etc. are abnormalities monitored by the winning opening switch / state monitoring process in the timer interrupt process.

Next, after completing step C86 or C88, in the external information editing process, start port 1 (
The starting opening 1 signal editing process (step C89) for editing the winning signal (starting opening 1 signal) of the starting winning opening 36, which is the starting winning opening of the special figure 1, the normal variable winning device 37), and the starting opening 2 (special A starting hole 2 signal editing process (step C90) for editing the winning signal (starting hole 2 signal) of the starting winning hole 92, which is the starting winning hole shown in FIG. 2, is performed. Subsequently, a main prize ball signal editing process (step C91) for editing the main prize ball signal related to the number of prize balls to be paid out is performed, and the pattern confirmation number signal is based on the pattern confirmation number output number (symbol confirmation number signal output number). is edited (step C92), and the external information editing process is terminated.

[Main processing]
Next, the main processing of the effect control device 300 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 49 is a diagram showing a flowchart of main processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment.

The main process is a process executed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300 when power supply to the pachinko machine 1 is started.
[Step D11] The controller prohibits interrupts.

[Step D<b>12 ] The controller initializes the CPU 311 .
[Step D<b>13 ] The controller initializes the VDP 312 .
[Step D14] The controller permits an interrupt.

[Step D15] The controller permits generation of display data. That is, the control unit
A display circuit (not shown) in the DP 312 is permitted to access the VRAM (not shown) in the VDP 312 and generate display data.

[Step D16] The controller sets a random number seed. This is a process of setting a pseudo-random number generation sequence using, for example, the srand function. Here, the control unit may use a fixed value such as 0 (zero) as an argument given to the srand function, or use a value created based on the ID value of the CPU etc. so that it differs for each gaming machine. You may

[Step D17] The control unit uses the RWM of the effect control device 300 (for example, the RAM 322)
The initial value at the time of power-on is saved in an area to be initialized (for example, a flag area for production (storage area used as various flags described later in the control processing of the production control device 300)).

[Step D18] The controller clears the WDT (watchdog timer).
[Step D19] The control unit executes effect button input processing. The effect button input process is a process of editing when the effect buttons (the selection button switch 25a and the decision button switch 25b) are operated when enabled. Since the effect button does not turn on and off at high speed, the control unit may perform processing for sensing the input of the effect button within the effect button input process, or may be performed within a short cycle timer interrupt (not shown). good.

[Step D20] The control unit executes hall/player setting mode processing. Hall/player setting mode processing includes setting the changeable range of the brightness of the LEDs and the display device 41, volume, etc.,
This is a process of accepting an operation such as changing the brightness of the LED or the display device 41 and the sound volume by the player.

[Step D21] The control unit executes random number update processing. For example, the random number update process is performed by r
This is a process of updating the pseudo-random numbers at least once in each control cycle of the main process using an and function. Since the rand function generates a random number based on the designated generation sequence each time recalculation is performed, the control unit can obtain the random number simply by executing the rand function. A counter that increments by "1" like the main board (game control device 100) may be used as the random number.

[Step D22] The controller executes a received command check process. The received command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.
[Step D23] The control unit executes effect display editing processing. The effect display editing process is performed by V
This is processing for setting various commands and their parameters for instructing the DP 312 about the content of drawing on the display device 41 . For example, the control unit sets commands in a table in the effect display editing process.

[Step D24] The control unit executes drawing command preparation end setting. The drawing command preparation end setting is a process of setting that preparation of all commands to the VDP 312 set in the effect display editing process is completed.

[Step D25] The controller determines whether or not it is time to switch frames. If it is time to switch frames, the process proceeds to step D26. If it is time to switch frames, it waits for the time to switch frames. Here, the frame switching timing is determined by the V blank interrupt (
It is timing that arrives at a time interval corresponding to a processing cycle (for example, 1/30 second≈33.333 ms) created based on the cycle (for example, 1/60 second) of V sync interrupt). Note that the V blank interrupt occurs each time the VDP 312 completes one scan of the entire screen for drawing. The period of generation of this V blank interrupt is, for example, 1/60 second as described above. In the case of this embodiment, when the same drawing is repeated twice and the V blank interrupt occurs twice, the frame is switched. (For example, 1/30 sec ≈ 33.33 ms
)become. However, the frame switching timing is not limited to this mode, and the frame switching timing can be changed arbitrarily. Frame switching may be performed periodically.

By the frame switching timing determination process, subsequent processes (steps D26 to D30 and subsequent steps D18 to D24) are executed at the frame switching timing for each processing cycle. Note that the time management that needs to be synchronized with the content of the presentation is performed in units of frames (that is, in units of processing cycles). If the processing period is 1/30 second, for example, 3 frames will be 100 ms. This is the same as that the main board (game control device) manages the time value in units of 4ms of the timer interrupt period.

[Step D26] The controller controls VDP3 according to the command set in step D23.
12 is instructed to draw the screen. For example, the control unit sequentially transmits commands set in a table to instruct the VDP 312 to draw the screen.

[Step D27] The controller executes sound control processing. The sound control process is a process related to volume control of sounds from the speakers (the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b).

[Step D28] The controller executes decoration control processing. The decoration control process is a process for controlling various LEDs of the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the like.
[Step D29] The controller executes a movable body control process. The movable body control process is a process of controlling a movable body (for example, board effect device 44) including various motors and SOL (solenoid).

[Step D30] The control section executes a firing information control process. The launch information control process sets the launch-related information based on the launch status flag, and the special figure rotation state (the number of special figure fluctuations per game for a predetermined amount (that is, a predetermined number of rental balls)). mode correction.

[Step D31] The control unit executes information disclosure processing. The information disclosure process is a process of disclosing performance information regarding game performance to the player.
After executing step D31, the control unit returns to step D18, and thereafter returns to step D1.
8 to step D31 are repeatedly executed. That is, step D18 to step D
31 is a loop process (
Sometimes referred to as main loop processing).

Note that the control unit executes the processing of steps D27 to D29 in the main loop processing in order to match the screen effects. A signal for driving control, etc.) is actually output to the port in a short cycle timer interrupt (not shown). However, if an IC specialized for controlling various devices is used, there may be cases where signals, etc., are not output by timer interrupts, just by giving instructions through serial communication or the like.

[Receive command check processing]
Next, reception command check processing will be described using FIG. FIG. 50 is a diagram showing a flowchart of received command check processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command check process is a process executed by the control unit in step D22 of the main process.

The received command (effect command) consists of MODE data (1 byte) and ACTIO
N data (1 byte), and effect commands are sequentially transmitted from the game control device (main board) 100 to the effect control device 300 . Such data constituting a command is hereinafter referred to as command data or command data.

In addition, the processing of command reception from the main board is performed by "command reception interrupt processing" (not shown).
performed by That is, in the serial communication of this example, transmission and reception are automatically performed by the hardware (by the function of the CPU itself), and when the command reception is completed, an interrupt (command reception interrupt) is generated to notify the user. It is sufficient to just retrieve it from the buffer, but in the above "command reception interrupt processing", each time there is a command reception interrupt, the command is loaded from the serial reception buffer, and after checking whether there is an error in the loaded command data, the command is processed. Data (MODE and ACTION data) is stored in the command buffer, and the value of the command reception counter is incremented by "1" for the stored amount. In the description of the control process, simply "storing" means storing and storing in a readable manner in a predetermined storage area for later use in the control process (the same applies hereinafter). Also, the command buffer is, for example, a ring buffer. This command buffer is configured by a storage area in the RAM 311a (or RAM 322) of the CPU 311, for example. The capacity of the command buffer should be equal to or larger than the number of commands that can be transmitted from the main board in the system control period (the processing period described above; for example, 1/30 second).

[Step D41] The controller loads the value of the command reception counter as the command reception count. Note that the command reception counter is the RWM (RAM 322 or RAM 311a)
is set to Since the command reception counter is cleared to "0" in principle at step D43, it stores the number of commands received during one frame (1/30 second) (time for one period of the processing period described above).

[Step D42] The control section determines whether or not the number of command receptions is "0 (zero)". terminates the received command check process. In the present application, as in step D41, "loading" data in the control process means RAM (the effect control device 300 in this example).
means to retrieve data from RAM 322 or RAM 311a).

[Step D43] The controller decrements the contents of the command reception counter area (that is, the value of the command reception counter) by the number of received commands.
Assuming that A is the value of the command reception counter and B is the number of commands received, step D41
Immediately after the execution of , "A=B". Immediately after execution of step D43, "A=AB=
0” is a normal movement, but in the aspect of this example, the effect control device 300 is a game control device (
Since the command reception interrupt from the main circuit board 100 is not disabled and given the highest priority, there is a possibility that the value of A has increased between the processing of step D41 and the processing of step D43. Therefore, if the processing of step D43 is set to "A←0" (that is, the processing of setting the value of the command reception counter to zero), the command count will be shifted.
In , a subtraction process of "A - B" is performed. However, when serial communication is used to send and receive commands from the main board as in this embodiment, interrupts are disabled so that the value of A does not increase during the processing from step D41 to step D153. Then, the processing content of step D43 may be set to "A←0".

[Step D44] The control section reads the contents of the receive command buffer (corresponding to the command buffer, hereinafter simply referred to as the command buffer) (that is, the command data stored at the address corresponding to the read pointer of the command buffer). Copy to command area (sometimes called command storage area). The command area is, for example, a storage area in the RAM 322 or the RAM 311a, and is a so-called FIFO type (first-in first-out type) buffer.

[Step D45] Since the control unit has read the data in the command buffer, it updates the value of the command read index, which is the read pointer of the command buffer, by increasing it by "1", for example, within the range of "0" to "31". Do. Note that "0" to "31" here
corresponds to the capacity of the command buffer (for example, "32").

[Step D46] The control unit determines whether or not the commands for the number of received commands have been copied (
That is, it is determined whether steps D44 and D45 have been repeatedly executed for the number of command receptions. The control unit advances to step D47 if copying of the commands equal to the number of commands received has been completed, and advances to step D44 if copying has not been completed.

[Step D47] The control unit loads (reads) the contents of the command area (the data stored first among the data in the command area that has not yet been read, i.e., the data to be read next). do.

[Step D48] The control section executes a received command analysis process. The received command analysis process is a process of analyzing the data of the loaded command (hereinafter referred to as the current command). The received command analysis processing will be described later using FIG.

[Step D49] The controller updates the address of the command area (the address of the data to be read next).
[Step D50] The controller determines whether or not the analysis of the commands equal to the number of commands received has been completed (that is, whether steps D47 to D49 have been repeatedly executed for the number of commands received). The control unit proceeds to step D47 if analysis of the commands equal to the number of commands received has not been completed, and ends the received command check processing if analysis has been completed.

[Receive command analysis processing]
Next, the received command analysis processing will be explained using FIG. FIG. 51 is a diagram showing a flowchart of received command analysis processing in the effect control device of the first embodiment. The received command analysis process is a process executed by the control unit in step D48 of the received command check process.

[Step D51] The control unit sets the upper byte of the current command data loaded in step D47 of the received command check process to MODE and the lower byte to ACT.
are stored separately. In addition, in the case of a variation command that commands a special figure variation pattern, the upper byte data stored as MODE commands the first half variation pattern, AC
The lower byte of data stored as T commands the second half variation pattern.

[Step D52] The controller determines whether the MODE value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. If the value of MODE is within the normal range, the control unit
, and if the value of MODE is not within the normal range, terminate the received command analysis process. note that,
Some MODE values are not defined and are not used, and in the case of such unused values, it is determined in step D52 that they are not within the normal range.

[Step D53] The controller determines whether the ACT value separated in step D51 is within the normal range. If the ACT value is within the normal range, the control unit proceeds to step D54, and if the ACT value is not within the normal range, ends the received command analysis process.

Further, determination in step D53 as to whether or not the value of ACT separated in step D51 is within the normal range is performed, for example, as follows. That is, the valid ACT value differs for each MODE, and the upper and lower limits of the valid ACT value are determined by a predetermined ACTION check table (
In step D53, it is checked whether the separated ACT values fall within the range between the upper limit and the lower limit. omission check is not possible).

[Step D54] The control section determines whether or not the separated ACT values for the separated MODE values are a correct combination. The control unit proceeds to step D55 if the ACT values are a correct combination, and ends the received command analysis process if the combination is not correct. A match check table, for example, can be used to determine whether or not the ACT values are a correct combination. The match check table is a table in which all ACT values (ACTION values) valid for MODE values are registered in order from the leading address, and is provided for each MODE value. If there is a separated ACT value in this matching check table corresponding to the MODE value, it can be determined that the combination is correct, and if there is no separated ACT value in the matching check table, it is correct. It can be determined that it is not a combination.

It should be noted that the determination as to whether or not the ACT values are a correct combination is performed including a missing check to determine whether or not the MODE is a normal combination of ACT values. Although there are multiple valid ACTs for one MODE, their values are not necessarily continuous (that is, there are values that are not discontinuous and values that are missing), so the command is a valid value. Since only valid values are defined in the match check table, it is checked one by one to see if it matches any of them.

[Step D55] The controller determines whether or not the MODE data is within the range of the variable command. If the MODE value is within the variable command range, the control unit executes the variable command process (details omitted) (step D56), and proceeds to step D57 if the MODE data is not within the variable command range. .

Here, the MODE data is the MODE data separated and stored in step D51 (the same applies to step D57 and the like described later). Also, the variation command (sometimes referred to as variation command or variation pattern command) is a command to command the variation pattern of the special figure, and the range that the data of this variation command can take is the variation command range.

[Step D57] The controller determines whether or not the MODE data is within the jackpot command range. The control unit executes a jackpot command process (details omitted) when the MODE data is within the jackpot command range (step D58), and proceeds to step D59 when the MODE data is not within the jackpot command range. . The jackpot command is a command for commanding an operation (display of a fanfare screen, a round screen, etc.) during the jackpot effect, and the range of the jackpot command data is the jackpot command range.

[Step D59] The control section determines whether or not the MODE data is within the range of the symbol-based command. If the value of MODE is within the range of the symbol-based command, the control unit executes symbol-based command processing (details omitted) (step D60), and proceeds to step D61 if the data of MODE is not within the range of the symbol-based command. . Symbol system command (sometimes referred to as a symbol command or a decorative special figure command) is a command that instructs information about the special figure symbol (for example, what to do with the special figure stop symbol etc.), this symbol command The range that can be taken by the data of is the pattern system command range.

[Step D61] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the single-shot command range. If the MODE value is within the single-shot command range, the control unit executes single-shot command processing (details omitted) (step D62), and if the MODE data is not within the single-shot command range, proceeds to step D63. . In addition, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command, a command that stands alone is called a one-shot command. Single-shot commands (sometimes referred to as single-shot commands) include a customer waiting demo command, a pending number command, a pattern stop command, a probability information command, an error/illegal command, and a model designation command. The range that the data of this one-shot command can take is the one-shot system command range.

[Step D63] The control section determines whether or not the MODE data is within the range of the look-ahead symbol system command. If the MODE data is within the prefetch symbol system command range, the control unit executes prefetch symbol system command processing (details omitted) (step D64), and if the MODE data is not within the prefetch symbol system command range, step Go to D65.

[Step D65] The control unit determines whether or not the MODE data is within the prefetch variation command range. If the MODE data is within the prefetch variation command range, the control unit executes prefetch variation command processing (details omitted) (step D66), and receives if the MODE data is not within the prefetch variation command range. End command analysis processing.

In addition, the look-ahead symbol system command and the look-ahead variation system command are commands for look-ahead production. Further, when any one of steps D56, D58, D60, D62, D64, and D66 ends, the received command analysis process ends.

Here, the look-ahead effect (also referred to as a look-ahead notice or a look-ahead notice effect) is the start winning memory of the special figure variable display game not executed (suspension of the start winning memory or simply suspension)
In order to notify the player in advance with a predetermined degree of reliability whether or not the game will result in a big hit (or what kind of variation pattern it will be) when the variation display game corresponding to the game is subsequently executed, the display of the start winning memory is suspended or the like. It is a production such as performing in a manner different from usual. Then, the look-ahead system command (look-ahead variation system command and look-ahead pattern system command) is a command to notify in advance the variation pattern and stop design corresponding to the holding of the start winning memory to be the target of the look-ahead effect, and the game at the time of start winning It is transmitted from the control device 100 to the effect control device 300 . It should be noted that normal variation-based commands and symbol-based commands that are not look-ahead are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the start of the variable display.

Next, the information disclosure function that enables the user to perceive setting information without excessive gambling will be described with reference to FIGS. 52 to 67. FIG. First, an overview of the information disclosure function will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 52 is a diagram showing an example of an overview of the information disclosure function of the first embodiment.

The game control device 100 includes a set value change switch (set value change SW) 126 to change the set value of the game performance. The setting value ranges from "0" to "5", and the hit probability of the special game can be changed in six stages. In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a probability setting value display device 136, and the setting value set using the setting value change switch 126 is changed from "0" to "
5” can be confirmed by the numerical display.

The game control device 100 includes a set value change switch 126 and a probability set value display device 136 on the game control board, and the game control device 100 is provided on the back side of the front frame 12 of the game machine 10. virtually no chance of being observed by any player. In addition, the game control device 100 transmits various commands to the effect control device 300, but does not transmit to the effect control device 300 including information on setting values in various commands. As a result, the gaming machine 10
eliminates the opportunity to check the set value by other than the game control device 100, and aims to suppress the leakage of the set value.

The effect control device 300 does not receive commands including information on set values from the game control device 100, but receives various commands accompanying game progress according to the set values. The effect control device 300 stores the game history in the FeRAM323 based on the received various commands. Since the FeRAM 323 is a non-volatile storage unit, it can store the game history for a predetermined period without losing it even when the power is turned off. The effect control device 300 calculates game performance from the accumulated game history.

The production control device 300 has a push button 25. - 特許庁Note that the push button 25 is
Selection button switch 2, which is an operation unit capable of receiving operation input and has been described with reference to FIG.
5a and enter button switch 25b. Here, the selection button switch 25a and the enter button switch 25b described with reference to FIG. 4 will be described again. The selection button switch 25a and the determination button switch 25b are connected to the detection signal of the touch sensor and the push button S.
It is a signal detected by combination with the W detection signal. For example, the state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation corresponding to the selection operation and the push button SW detects the depression operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the selection button switch 25a. again,
The state in which the touch sensor detects the touch operation corresponding to the enter operation and the push button SW detects the push operation of the option setting unit 25 corresponds to the ON state of the enter button switch 25b. Hereinafter, the option setting section 25 is set to a push button or a PB (Push Button).
called. The performance control device 300 allows the player to select display contents of performance information related to the game performance of the gaming machine 10 or select performance information notification opportunities by operating the push button 25 .

The performance control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 with default display content or selected display content. Also, the effect control device 300 can display the calculated performance information on the display device 41 at a default notification opportunity or a selected notification opportunity. In addition, the display device 41 is one form of notification means, and the effect control device 3
00 can use other effect means (for example, speakers 19a, 19b, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, board effect device 44, other sub-display devices, LEDs, etc.) as notification means.

Thereby, the performance control device 300 can disclose the performance information as a performance value according to the operation of the game machine 10, and as a result, the setting information can be perceived. In addition, since the effect control device 300 does not directly disclose the information about the set value to the player, the gambling nature is not excessively stimulated. Moreover, since the performance control device 300 does not receive the information about the set value from the game control device 100, the performance control device 300 does not leak the set value to the outside. In this way, the game machine 10 makes it possible to perceive the setting information without excessively fanning gambling.

Next, information disclosure processing executed by the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 53 is a diagram showing a flowchart of information disclosure processing according to the first embodiment. The information disclosure process is a process in which the effect control device 300 discloses the game performance corresponding to the set value without acquiring information on the set value from the game control device 100 . The information disclosure process is performed by the production control device 3
00 control unit (CPU 311). The information disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D31 (see FIG. 49) of the main process.

[Step D71] The controller executes a setting process. The setting process is a process of receiving an operation from a player (or an administrator or the like) and setting disclosure contents. For the setting process,
This will be described later with reference to FIGS. 54 and 55. FIG.

[Step D72] The control section executes collection processing. The collection process is a process of collecting game histories. Collection processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 56 and 57. FIG.
[Step D73] The control section executes a counting process. Aggregation processing is processing for calculating (aggregating) game performance from the collected gaming histories. 58 to 60 will be described later for the aggregation process.
will be used to explain.

[Step D74] The control section executes output information editing processing. The output information editing process is a process of editing the output mode of the calculated game performance. The output information editing process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D75] The control unit executes the in-game disclosure process. The in-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance during the game (special figure game) in the edited output mode. The in-game disclosure process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Step D76] The control unit executes the non-game disclosure process, and ends the information disclosure process after executing the non-game disclosure process. Disclosure processing during non-game is processing for disclosing the game performance in an edited output mode other than during the game (special figure game). The non-game disclosure process will be described later with reference to FIG.

Next, setting processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 is a diagram showing a flowchart of setting processing according to the first embodiment. The setting process is a process of receiving a player's operation and setting disclosure content. A setting process is a process performed by the control part (CPU311) of the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. The setting process is a process executed by the control unit in step D71 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D81] The control unit determines whether or not it is time to accept settings. The setting acceptance timing is a timing set in advance as a timing at which a setting operation can be accepted. The control unit proceeds to step D82 when it is the setting reception timing, and terminates the setting processing when it is not the setting reception timing.

[Step D82] The controller causes the display device 41 to display a setting screen. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can guide the player to perform setting operations according to the displayed content.
[Step D83] The control unit sets the aggregation period according to the setting operation. The collection period is
This is the period to be aggregated, out of the period during which the history is collected (history collection period). The control unit sets the aggregation period by making it possible to select whether the entire history collection period is to be the aggregation period or part of the history collection period is to be the aggregation period. In addition, when part of the history collection period is set as the aggregation period, the control unit can set either the beginning and the end, or the beginning and the end, and the size of the period. Thereby, the control unit can set the period desired by the player as the counting period.

[Step D84] The controller sets the output information according to the setting operation. The output information is
Performance information to be output from among the calculated performance information. The control unit sets the output information by making it possible to select whether all of the calculated performance information is to be output or part of the calculated performance information is to be output. Thereby, the control unit can output the performance information desired by the player.

[Step D85] The controller sets the filter according to the setting operation. The filter is
The calculated performance information is filtered according to the game state. The control unit sets the filter so that it is possible to select whether to output all game states for the calculated performance information or to output a specific game state for the calculated performance information. Thereby, the control unit can output the performance information in the game state desired by the player.

[Step D86] The control unit asks the player to confirm the setting contents. If the player confirms the setting contents, the process proceeds to step D87. End the process.

[Step D87] The control section updates the settings with the content accepted by the setting operation, and ends the setting process. Note that the control unit may set a valid period (for example, 3 hours) for the updated settings, and restore the default settings after the valid period has passed. Also, the control unit
A default setting return condition (for example, a transition to a customer waiting state) may be set in the updated setting content, and the default setting may be restored after the condition is satisfied.

Next, the display screen of the display device 41 during setting processing will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 55 is a diagram showing an example of a setting screen according to the first embodiment.
A display screen 350 shown in FIG. 55(1) is the display screen displayed in step D82. The display screen 350 includes the title of the setting screen and guidance for the setting operation in its display contents. for example,
The display screen 350 displays "Setting Guess Assist" as the title of the setting screen, and displays operation guidance using the push buttons 25 as guidance for the setting operation.

A display screen 351 shown in FIG. 55(2) is the display screen displayed in step D83. The display screen 351 is a display screen during setting of the aggregation period, and includes the title and options during the aggregation period setting in the display contents. For example, the display screen 351 displays "
Aggregation period setting" is displayed, and options in the aggregation period setting are "1. All period", "2. Fluctuation period event", "3. Fluctuation period timer", and "4. Fluctuation period user setting". . In addition, the display screen 351 displays the option being selected among the options for which the aggregation period is being set so as to be distinguishable from the other options. For example, the display screen 351 underlines the option "4. Variable period user setting" to indicate that it is being selected.

Note that the option “1. All period” is an option for totaling the entire period of the accumulated history information. The option "2. Fluctuating period event" is an option to set a predetermined event trigger in the accumulated history information as the start and end, or the start or end.
The option "3. variable period timer" is an option to set a predetermined timer trigger in the accumulated history information as the start and end, or the start or end. The option "4. Variable period user setting" is an option for the user to set one of the start and end of the accumulated history information, or the start and end (the other is default).

A display screen 352 shown in FIG. 55(3) is a display screen when "4. Fluctuating period user setting" is selected as an option during aggregation period setting. The display screen 352 is a display screen during option setting in the option "4. Variable period user setting", and includes the title and option setting details during option setting in the option "4. Variable period user setting". For example, the display screen 352 may display “Variable Period” as the title during option setting.
User setting” is displayed, and a total range (range from “from here” to “to here” indicated by hatching) selected from history information accumulated as option setting contents is displayed.

A display screen 353 shown in FIG. 55(4) is the display screen displayed in step D84. The display screen 353 is a display screen during output information setting, and includes the title and options during output information setting in the display contents. For example, the display screen 353 displays "
"Output information setting" is displayed, and "1. Hit probability" and "2. Corresponding set value" are displayed as options in the output information setting. In addition, the display screen 353 displays the selected option among the options in the output information setting so as to be distinguishable from the other options. For example, display screen 353 shows the option "
1. Hit probability” is underlined to indicate that it is being selected. It should be noted that the selection during setting of the output information may exclusively select an option, or may allow selection of two or more options at the same time.

The option "1. winning probability" is an option that outputs the winning probability in the special game (the combination probability of the special game 1 and the special game 2, or each probability). Choice "
2. "Corresponding set value" is an option that outputs a set value (estimated value) corresponding to the hit probability.

A display screen 354 shown in FIG. 55(5) is the display screen displayed in step D85. A display screen 354 is a display screen during filter setting, and includes the title and options during filter setting in the display contents. For example, display screen 354 may display "
Filter setting" is displayed, and options in the filter setting are "1. All modes", "2. Mode A", "3. Mode B", "4. Mode C", "5. Low probability", "6 .High probability”, “7
. Electric support” and “8. Non-electric support” are displayed. In addition, the display screen 354 displays the option being selected among the options in the filter setting so as to be distinguishable from other options. for example,
The display screen 354 underlines the option "6. High probability" to indicate that it is being selected.

In addition, option "1. All modes" is an option that targets all of the production modes (or probability states) in the special figure game as output information. Choices "2. Mode A", "3.
. Mode B" and "4. Mode C" are options for output information for the corresponding effect mode among the effect modes in the special game. The option "5. low probability" is an option that targets the output information for the low probability state among the probability states of the special figure game. The option "6. high probability" is an option that targets the output information for the high probability state among the probability states of the special figure game. The option "7. Electric sapo" is an option that targets the output information for a state (electric sapo) having a general electric support among the general electric support states of the special game. The option “8.

A display screen 355 shown in FIG. 55(6) is the display screen displayed in step D86. The display screen 355 is a display screen for confirming setting contents, and includes a title during confirmation of setting contents and options for confirming setting contents in the display contents. For example, the display screen 355 displays "Confirm setting contents" as the title during confirmation of setting contents, and "OK" and "Cancel" as options during confirmation of setting contents.

Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can disclose the information desired by the player.
Next, collection processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 56 is a diagram showing a flowchart of collection processing according to the first embodiment. The collection process is a process of collecting game histories. Collection processing is processing performed by the control unit (CPU 311 ) of the effect control device 300 . The collection process is a process executed by the control unit in step D72 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D91] The control section determines whether or not there is an instruction to reset the game history. The game history reset instruction is desirably input by the administrator, for example, by operating the RAM initialization switch 112 of the game control device 100 . The control unit proceeds to step D92 when there is a game history reset instruction, and proceeds to step D95 when there is no game history reset instruction.

[Step D92] The controller clears the game history storage area (game history storage area). For example, the control unit clears the gaming history stored in the FeRAM 323 to zero.
[Step D93] The control unit generates dummy data of game history. Dummy data is
This is data for preventing the calculation of game performance that greatly deviates from the design value when the game history is small, and is generated, for example, based on the average game performance of all set values. The dummy data may be prepared in advance.

[Step D94] The controller stores the generated dummy data in the game history storage area.
[Step D95] The control section determines whether or not a command (target command) including information from which game history is to be collected has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D96 if the target command is received, and terminates the collection process if the target command is not received.

[Step D96] The control unit acquires event information when the target command is received.
[Step D97] The control unit acquires the game state when the target command is received. The gaming state to be acquired is a gaming state used for filtering the target of the output information, and includes, for example, the type of production mode, the probability state of the special game, the general electric support state of the special game, and the like.

[Step D98] The control unit associates information from which game history is to be collected with the game state when the target command is received, and stores the information as a game history in the game history storage area. note that,
The game history storage area is, for example, a ring buffer, and can store the latest game history for a predetermined period by overwriting old data with new data. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can accumulate a gaming history for a predetermined period including dummy data. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can accumulate game histories corresponding to actual operating conditions by replacing dummy data with game histories.

Next, the game history stored in the game history storage area will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 5
7 is a diagram illustrating an example of collected data according to the first embodiment;
The control unit treats one symbol variation of the special symbol game and one hit of the special symbol game detected from the target command as one event, respectively, to be stored in the game history. The control unit assigns an event ID (ID) to each event, and records the event type (type) and event occurrence time (time). In addition, the control unit, for each event, the probability state of the special game of event occurrence (probability fluctuation), the general electric support state of the special game (electric support), the type of production mode (
production mode).

For example, the game history with the ID "xxx111" has the type "fluctuation (symbol fluctuation)" and the time "t
xxx111”, indicating that the game state at the time of event occurrence is probability variation “high (high probability)”, electric support “available (general electric support state)”, and production mode “A”. Also, the ID "xx
x211” has a type of “fluctuation” and a time of “txxx211”, and the gaming state at the time of the event occurrence is probability fluctuation “low (low probability)”, electric support “yes”, production mode “A”. indicates In addition, the game history with the ID "xxx311" has the type "fluctuation" and the time "txxx3
11”, indicating that the game state at the time of event occurrence is probability variation “low”, electric support “none (non-general electric support state)”, and presentation mode “B”. In addition, the game history of ID "xxx701" is type "win (jackpot)", time "txxx701", and the game state at the time of event occurrence is probability change "- (undefined)", electric support "-", effect Indicates that the mode is "-". Note that even if the game state at the time the event occurs is undefined for an event of type "win", the control unit refers to the game state at the time of the event of the type "fluctuation" just before the occurrence of a win. The game state of variable display can be specified.

Next, counting processing will be described with reference to FIG. 58 . FIG. 58 is a diagram showing a flow chart of tallying processing according to the first embodiment. Aggregation processing is processing for calculating game performance from the collected game histories. Aggregation processing is processing performed by the control unit (CPU 311 ) of the effect control device 300 . Aggregation processing is processing executed by the control unit in step D73 of the information disclosure processing.

[Step D101] The control unit determines whether it is time to count. The control unit
The time when the processing resource of the production control device 300 has a surplus is set as the total timing. For example, the control unit uses a state (customer waiting state, etc.) when the game is not in progress, or a symbol stop time after symbol variation during a game, as the counting timing. If it is time to totalize, the control unit controls step D102
, and ends the aggregation process if it is not the aggregation timing.

[Step D102] The control unit acquires the aggregation period according to the setting.
[Step D103] The control unit totals the game histories within the totalization period among the game histories stored in the game history storage area for each game state.

[Step D104] The control unit stores the aggregated result (aggregated data) in the output information storage area (FeR
AM 323) to end the tallying process.
Next, the aggregated data stored in the output information storage area will be described with reference to FIG. 59 is a diagram illustrating an example of aggregated data according to the first embodiment; FIG. The user-set period tally data shown in FIG. 59 is tally data obtained by tallying the game histories within the user-set tally period among the game histories stored in the game history storage area.

The user-set period tally data includes a winning probability for each game state and a corresponding set value. The game states that are individually aggregated in the user-set period aggregation data are "low probability, - (regardless of general electricity support state),"low probability, with electricity support","low probability, no electricity support", "In high probability,
-", "high probability, with electric sapo", "high probability, no electric sapo". In addition, the production modes that are individually aggregated in the user-set period aggregation data are "all modes", "mode A", and "
Mode B" and "Mode C". For example, the game state "low probability, -" is a hit probability "
1/210” and the corresponding set value “3” are the totalization results. The corresponding set value is an estimated value of the set value, and a set value having a game performance (hit probability) close to the hit probability of "1/210" is selected as the counting result.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can tally according to the gaming state. In addition, the game machine 10 can perform sufficiently reliable totalization depending on the game state even when the number of data is not sufficient by performing totalization for each game state. For example, game machine 10
Even if the number of hits data is not sufficiently obtained in the low probability, there is a case where the number of hits in the data is sufficiently obtained in the high probability. In addition, since the game machine 10 counts for each of a plurality of game states or a plurality of performance modes, it is possible to provide a counted result that the player believes regardless of whether the counted result is true or false. For example, the gaming machine 10 can give a high degree of satisfaction to a player who believes that the effect mode "mode A" is a tally result that correctly reflects the performance of the gaming machine. Such player's mistakes are corrected in the process of convergence to the true value along with data accumulation, and the gaming machine 10 can provide the player with the process of convergence to the true value as a new interest.

Note that although the user-set period total data has been described, the same can be applied to the total data for other total periods. In addition, the gaming machine 10 may aggregate aggregated data in other aggregated periods in parallel when aggregated aggregated data in one aggregated period is aggregated. It is also possible not to aggregate the aggregated data of other aggregated periods when the aggregated data of the period is aggregated.

It should be noted that too misguided tally results will confuse the player, so the game machine 1
0 can set the minimum amount of information about aggregated data. Next, how to secure the minimum amount of information of aggregated data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 60 is a diagram showing an example of securing the minimum amount of information in aggregated data according to the first embodiment.

Fig. 6 shows the aggregated data that secures the minimum amount of information when the history information of the day is used as the aggregated data.
0(1). Since the history information of the day exceeds the minimum amount of information, all of them are used as total data. The minimum amount of information is a preset threshold.

Next, FIG. 60(2) shows aggregated data for which the minimum amount of information is not ensured when using today's history information as aggregated data. Since the history information of the current day does not exceed the minimum amount of information, the shortage is supplemented with dummy data. The amount of dummy data to be supplemented can be reduced by increasing the current day history information.

Another example is shown in FIG. 60(3) when the history information of the current day is used as total data and the minimum amount of information is not ensured. Since the today's history information does not exceed the minimum amount of information, the shortage is supplemented with the previous day's history information. The amount of previous day history information to be supplemented can be reduced by increasing today's history information.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can ensure the minimum amount of information for the aggregated data, and can suppress the risk of presenting an irrelevant aggregated result to the player.
Next, the output information editing process will be explained using FIG. FIG. 61 is a diagram showing a flowchart of output information editing processing according to the first embodiment. The output information editing process is a process of editing the output mode of the calculated game performance. The output information editing process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300. FIG. The output information editing process is a process executed by the control unit in step D74 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D111] The control unit acquires the totalization result of the totalization process.
[Step D112] The control unit acquires the setting contents set in the setting process.
[Step D113] The control unit determines the output content (output mode) from the tabulated result according to the setting content.

[Step D114] The control unit determines the output timing of the output contents according to the setting contents or the game state, and ends the output information editing process. For example, the control unit determines whether a game is in progress,
If the game is in progress, it is determined at which timing the output contents are to be output depending on whether the game is fluctuating or not. More specifically, the control section can quickly determine the output timing when the game is not in progress. Further, the control unit can determine the output timing after waiting for the fulfillment of a preset output condition during a game. The output conditions set in advance take into consideration the consistency with the game effect and the influence on the progress of the game. For example, during variable display, the control unit controls the generation timing of an effect that can be replaced with the output content (for example, a character dialogue effect, etc.), or an effect that is allowed to overlap with the output content (for example, a cut-in effect, etc.). can be determined as the output timing. In addition, the control unit uses the timing of the occurrence of an effect that can be replaced with the output content (such as an interval effect) or an effect that is allowed to overlap with the output content (such as an ending effect) as the output timing when the hit is in progress. can decide.

Next, in-game disclosure processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 62 is a diagram showing a flowchart of in-game disclosure processing according to the first embodiment. The in-game disclosure process is a process of disclosing the game performance during the game (special figure game) in the edited output mode. The in-game disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311 ) of the effect control device 300 . The in-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control section in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D121] Based on the output timing determined in step D114 of the output information editing process, the control unit determines whether or not it is time to disclose information. The control unit proceeds to step D122 if it is the information disclosure timing, and terminates the in-game disclosure processing if the information disclosure timing is not.

[Step D122] The control unit determines whether or not the information disclosure lottery has been won. If the lottery for information disclosure is won, the control unit proceeds to step D123 and thereafter to disclose information.
On the other hand, if the lottery for information disclosure is not won, the control unit ends the in-game disclosure process without disclosing information.

In this manner, the control unit does not necessarily disclose information even at the information disclosure timing, but only when the lottery is won. It should be noted that the control unit sets "1
By disclosing information with a lottery probability of "less than", frequent information disclosure during the game is suppressed. Further, the control unit responds to the player's request for disclosure by disclosing information with a lottery probability of "1" at a disclosure possible timing during a non-game (for example, while waiting for a customer).

[Step D123] The control unit acquires the output content determined in step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D124] The control unit selects an effect pattern according to the output contents. For example, the control unit selects one of one or more selectable effect patterns prepared in advance (for example, cut-in, character lines, etc.).

[Step D125] The control unit sets the selected effect pattern so that it can be output by the notification means, and ends the in-game disclosure process.
Next, the information disclosure effect of the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64. FIG. FIG. 63 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of an information disclosure screen according to the first embodiment. FIG. 64 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of an information disclosure screen according to the first embodiment.

A display screen 500 shown in FIG. 63(1) is a display screen in which symbols are stopped, and symbols are displayed in a stopped state before the start of variation in the variation display game. The display screen 500 includes a large pattern group 501, a small pattern group 502, a special figure 1 reserved number display 503, a special figure 2 reserved number display 504, and a reserved display 505.
, and a pending digestion display 506 are displayed.

The large pattern group 501 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, large pattern group 5
01 is displayed in a large size by setting a variable display area in the approximate center of the display device 41 . The large symbol group 501 includes left symbols, middle symbols and right symbols.

In the display screen 500, the left symbol indicates that the symbol is stopped at "3", and the middle symbol indicates that
It shows that the symbol is stopped at "5", and the right symbol shows that the symbol is stopped at "7". That is, the large symbol group 501 on the display screen 500 indicates that the special symbol variation display game is in a stopped state (symbols are stopped).

The small symbol group 502 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group 502 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 501 . The small pattern group 502 is
It includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. On the display screen 500, the left, medium and right symbols that constitute the small symbol group 502 all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in a stopped state.

In general, the large pattern group 501 is displayed larger than the small pattern group 502, has a high degree of freedom of display position, and can change its display mode greatly. On the contrary, the small pattern group 502 is
Compared to the large pattern group 501, it is displayed in a smaller size and has a lower degree of freedom of display position (for example, fixed position).

The special figure 1 reserved number display 503 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game. On the display screen 500, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 1 game is "4".
The special figure 2 reserved number display 504 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. In the display screen 500, the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates that the reserved memory number of the special figure 2 game is "0". The number of pending storage that the pending display 505 displays corresponds to the sum of the number of pending storage that the special figure 1 pending number display 503 displays and the number of pending storage that the special figure 2 pending number display 504 displays.

For example, as shown in the display screen 500, when the special figure 1 pending number display 503 displays "4" and the special figure 2 pending number display 504 displays "0", the pending display 505 is four pending storage display indicates that the number of reserved memories is "4".

Suspension display 505, depending on its display mode (suspension storage display displayed in suspension display 505),
The number of reserved memories of the special figure fluctuation display game can be specified, and the degree of expectation for the game result for each reserved memory can be notified.

The pending digestion display 506 can indicate whether or not the special figure variable display game is in a variable display state and inform the degree of expectation for the game result by its display mode. In the display screen 500, the pending digestion display 506 has a blank (blank) inside the frame to indicate that the special figure variation display game is in a stopped state. After that, the gaming machine 10 starts the variable display.

A display screen 510 shown in FIG. 63(2) is a display screen after the start of the variable display. A display screen 510 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 500 and shows a screen during variable display (during three-symbol variation). On the display screen 510, the left, medium and right symbols of the large symbol group 501 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated. Also, on the display screen 510, the left, medium and right symbols of the small symbol group 502 are fluctuating, indicating that the special figure fluctuation display game is being fluctuated.

On the display screen 510, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is "3".
, the special figure 2 pending number display 504 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game is "0", and the pending display 505 shows that the number of reserved memories of the special figure fluctuation display game is "3 ”. In addition, on the display screen 510, a pending digestion display 506 displays a pending memory display that is being digested, indicating that the special figure variation display game is in the process of variation display.

A display screen 511 shown in FIG. 63(3) is a display screen when the ready-to-win effect is generated after the variable display is started. A display screen 511 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 510, and shows a screen during reach variation displaying "3" on the right and left symbols. The game machine 10 makes it possible to disclose information calculated from the game history when a predetermined effect occurs during reach fluctuation.

A display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63(4) is a display screen for a cut-in effect during a ready-to-win effect. A display screen 512 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 511, and shows a screen during reach fluctuation in which left and right patterns display "3". The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with a cut-in display 513 (cut-in production) for the variable display during the ready-to-win production. Cut-in display 513
produces a predetermined degree of expectation with a character 514 like a rocket and a background. Also, the cut-in display 513 displays disclosure information 515 . For example, the disclosure information 515 includes "1/200" as the winning probability in the gaming state during the tallying period set by the player. As a result, the game machine 10 can disclose information while cooperating with the game performance during the game.

Although the game machine 10 includes the disclosed information 515 in the display contents in the cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect, it is not limited to this, and other variable displays such as character effect, development effect, temporary stop, re-fluctuation, etc. It may be inside or during the symbol stop.

A display screen 516 shown in FIG. 64(1) is a display screen for an interval effect during winning.
The display screen 516 includes a win type display 517, a game guide 518, a round display 519, and disclosure information 520 in its display contents. The winning type display 517 indicates a winning name (for example, "X bonus") in terms of presentation. The game guide 518 guides the player that the hitting direction is the right game area. A round display 519 displays symbols (eg, stars) corresponding to rounds to indicate the current round number and final round number. The disclosure information 520 includes "1/210" as the winning probability in the gaming state during the tallying period set by the player. As a result, the game machine 10 can disclose information while cooperating with the game effect during the winning.

Although the game machine 10 includes the disclosure information 520 in the display content in the interval performance during winning, the disclosure information 520 is not limited to this and may be during the fanfare, during the round, during the ending, or the like.

A display screen 521 shown in FIG. 64(2) is a display screen during general electricity support (electricity support).
The display screen 521 includes a game state display 522, a game guide 518, and disclosure information 523 in its display contents. The game state display 522 indicates a game state name (for example, "electric support"). It should be noted that the game state display 522 may display a game effect name (for example, "mode A"). The disclosure information 523 indicates that the hit probability in the game state is "1
/21", and a character is displayed in relation to the disclosed information. For example, a tiger-like character suggests a setting that corresponds to a hit probability of "1/21" (eg, setting "2").

The gaming machine 10 may disclose information limited to the game state in addition to the player's setting or instead of the player's setting. For example, the gaming machine 10 has a display screen 5
21 may display the hit probability during the general electricity support (electricity support) as the disclosure information 523 . Similarly, the display screen 521 of the gaming machine 10 displays the hit probability in the high probability (including the latent probability variation), the high probability (excluding the latent probability variation), and other game states as the disclosure information 523. may

Also, on the display screen 521, the special figure 1 reserved number display 503 indicates that the number of reserved memories of the special figure 1 game is "0", and the special figure 2 reserved number display 504 indicates the reserved memory of the special figure 2 game. number is 4
”. Note that, on the display screen 521, priority is given to visibility of the disclosure information 523, and the pending display 505 and the pending completion display 506 are not displayed, but may be displayed.

A display screen 524 shown in FIG. 64(3) is a display screen (another example) during general electricity support (electricity support).
is. The display screen 524 includes a game state display 522, a game guide 518, and disclosure information 525 in its display contents. The game state display 522 indicates a game state name (for example, "electric support"). It should be noted that the disclosed information 525 is a tally period set by the player, and the winning probability in the game state is "
1/18", and a character is displayed in relation to the disclosed information. For example, a boy-like character suggests a setting corresponding to a hit probability of "1/18" (for example, a setting of "4").

A display screen 526 shown in FIG. 64(4) is a display screen during customer waiting. Display screen 526 includes disclosure information 527 and operation guidance 528 in its display contents. The disclosure information 527 displays "Mode A" as the game effect name (or game state name) set by the player, displays the winning probability "1/170" in the game effect "Mode A", and displays the winning probability " The setting "5") is displayed as the setting corresponding to "1/170". The operation guidance 528 displays the push button 25 corresponding to the operation section and the operation guidance. Note that the gaming machine 10 may update the total period, total contents, and display contents at any time according to the received operation for information disclosure during customer waiting.

The gaming machine 10 can also suggest the setting of the winning probability by adding to the character or by displaying the background instead of the character. Next, the setting suggestion of the hit probability by the background display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 65 is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion mode according to the first embodiment.

The background display during information disclosure has a plurality of types of display modes according to suggested setting values. An estimated set value of "0" displays the background in a white display mode (illustrated in solid light color). Estimated setting value "1"
displays the background in a blue (diagonally hatched) display mode. The estimated setting value "2" is
The background is displayed in a green display mode (illustrated by cross hatching). The estimated set value "3" displays the background in a red display mode (illustrated in solid dark color). The estimated set value "4" displays the background in a petal pattern display mode. An estimated setting value of "5" displays the background in a rainbow display mode.

As a result, the control unit can suggest the estimated set value with the background color of the predetermined effect display. For example, the control section can suggest the estimated set value "3" by setting the background display of the cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect to a plain dark color on the display screen 512 shown in FIG. 63(4). Note that the control unit may suggest the estimated set value not only in the background color of the effect display but also in other display locations. Also, the control unit may suggest the estimated set value by other display modes, not limited to colors and patterns.

Next, non-game disclosure processing will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 66 is a diagram showing a flowchart of non-game disclosure processing according to the first embodiment. Disclosure processing during non-game is processing for disclosing the game performance in an edited output mode other than during the game (special figure game). The non-game disclosure process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311 ) of the effect control device 300 . The non-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control section in step D76 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D131] The control section determines whether or not there is a disclosure request operation during a non-game.
For example, the control unit determines that a predetermined operation input from the push button 25 while waiting for a customer is a disclosure request operation during a non-game. The control unit proceeds to step D132 if there is a disclosure request operation during non-game, and ends the non-game disclosure processing if there is no disclosure request operation during non-game.

[Step D132] The control unit accepts an operation for selecting disclosure contents such as total period, game status, and display contents.
[Step D133] The control unit discloses information on the aggregated data in the game state for the aggregated period selected by the player. For example, the control unit discloses information through the display device 41 .

[Step D134] The control section determines whether or not to end information disclosure. The control unit determines that a predetermined operation input from the push button 25 while waiting for a customer is an information disclosure end operation. Also, the control unit determines that the game start is an information disclosure end operation. If the control unit does not end the information disclosure, it proceeds to step D132 and continues the information disclosure. On the other hand, the control unit ends the non-game disclosure process when ending the information disclosure.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 can disclose desired aggregated data to the player even during a non-game.
Next, the in-game disclosure process of the modified example will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a flowchart of in-game disclosure processing according to a modification of the first embodiment. The gaming machine 10 of the modification performs information disclosure at the time of an effect (for example, a push button effect) that accompanies the reception of the player's operation during the game. The in-game disclosure process of the modification is performed by the control unit (CP
U311). The modified in-game disclosure process is a process executed by the control unit in step D75 of the information disclosure process.

[Step D141] The control unit determines whether or not the player's operation is accepted during the reception time of the effect accompanying the reception of the player's operation. The control unit proceeds to step D142 if no player operation has been accepted, and proceeds to step D143 if a player operation has been accepted.

[Step D142] If the player's operation is not accepted, the control unit selects a game effect pattern (non-acceptance effect pattern) for when the player's operation is not accepted. The control unit sets the selected non-acceptance effect pattern and terminates the in-game disclosure process. In this way, the game machine 1
0 does not give the player an opportunity to disclose information when the player's operation is not accepted. Thereby, the gaming machine 10 can prompt the player to participate in the game.

[Step D143] When the player's operation is accepted, the control unit draws lots to decide whether or not to disclose the information. If the control unit loses the lottery for information disclosure, step D1
The process proceeds to D44, and when the lottery for information disclosure is won, the process proceeds to step D145.

[Step D144] When the lottery for information disclosure is lost, the control unit selects a game effect pattern (reception effect pattern) which is a game effect pattern in the case where the player's operation is accepted and which does not involve information disclosure. do. The control unit sets the selected reception effect pattern and ends the in-game disclosure process. In this manner, the gaming machine 10 prepares a case where the player is not given an opportunity to disclose information even when the player's operation is accepted. As a result, the gaming machine 10
Players can be urged to participate in the game by increasing the value as a privilege for information disclosure.

[Step D145] If the lottery for information disclosure is won, the control unit acquires the output content determined in step D113 of the output information editing process.
[Step D146] The control unit selects a game effect pattern (game effect pattern accompanied by information disclosure (disclosure effect pattern)) which is a game effect pattern in accordance with the output contents when the player's operation is accepted. The control unit sets the selected opening effect pattern and ends the in-game opening process. In this way, the gaming machine 10 gives the player an opportunity to disclose information while presenting rarity even when the player's operation is accepted. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can increase the value as a benefit for information disclosure and encourage the player to participate in the game.

Note that the game performance of the gaming machine 10 may change due to a change in settings. In addition, since the game machine 10 requires a power-on to change settings, it is desirable to aggregate data in units of history information within a range that does not straddle power-on if a sufficient amount of data can be secured. In addition, the game machine 10 compares the history information before and after the power is turned on to estimate whether or not the setting has been changed, and when it is estimated that there is no setting change even in the history information that spans power-on, the power is turned on. It may be regarded as history information in a range without straddling.

In addition, although the game machine 10 is capable of announcing the hit probability and the estimated set value, other performance information may be an object of notification. For example, the gaming machine 10 may notify the target of notification of the probability change rush rate, the electric sapo rush rate, the probability change, the number of consecutive wins during the electric sapo, the number of winning balls, the base, and the like.

It should be noted that the settings in the gaming machine 10 may be made as follows to prevent fraud.
(1) The game control device 100 changes the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 when changing settings.
And the processing of forcibly initializing the information stored in the RAM in the payout control device 200 is executed. As a result, the game machine 10 prevents game control over different set values.

(2) The game control device 100 outputs a security signal from the external information terminal board 71 at the time of setting change and setting confirmation. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can notify the externally connected device (for example, a hall computer or an information disclosure device such as a call lamp) that the setting has been changed or confirmed. The externally connected device to which the security signal is input can notify that the setting has been changed or confirmed by means of notification means (lamp, sound (including voice), etc.). The game control device 100 may output a common security signal for setting change and setting confirmation, or may output a security signal capable of distinguishing between setting change and setting confirmation.

(3) The game control device 100 is housed in a board box and attached to the back side of the front frame 12 . The game control device 100 is protected by a sealed board box except for necessary operation units (RAM initialization switch 112, set value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), various connectors, etc. facing outside. As a result, the main medium (game microcomputer 111, etc.) that triggers the transition of setting change or setting confirmation is protected by the sealed board box. In addition, the game control device 100 exposes the setting key switch 127 to the outside, and the necessary operation units (the RAM initialization switch 112, the set value change switch 126) other than the setting key switch 127 are enclosed by a substrate box. It can be protective.

(4) The game control device 100 does not have a setting key by requiring the operation of the setting key switch 127 to access the main medium (game microcomputer 111, etc.) that triggers setting change or setting confirmation. Eliminate third-party access to primary media. In addition, the game control device 1
00 may be configured to enable access to required operation units (RAM initialization switch 112, set value change switch 126) by operating the setting key switch 127. FIG. For example, the game control device 100 may be configured to enable physical operations to the RAM initialization switch 112 and the set value change switch 126 by operating the setting key switch 127 (for example, opening and closing the operation window). The operation of the key switch 127 may electrically or logically validate the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the set value change switch 126, or may be a combination of these.

(5) The game control device 100 includes a required operation unit (RAM initialization switch 112, set value change switch 126, setting key switch 127), a required information display unit (status display device 135
, probability set value display device 136 ) are controlled by the gaming microcomputer 111 . The game control device 100 may be provided with an error cancellation switch used for error cancellation and a game start switch for giving a game start opportunity. can be

(6) The game control device 100 includes a RAM initialization switch 112 and a setting key switch 127
, determine the four power-up states from the combination of the input states of . The game control device 100 has a RAM
When the initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the setting value can be changed, and when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON, the setting value can be confirmed. The setting is confirmed, and the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned ON.
, When the setting key switch 127 is OFF, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the game microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized into a RAM clear (RWM clear) state, and the RAM is initialized. When the switch 112 is turned off and the setting key switch 127 is turned off, it is assumed that the power has been turned on and the power has been restored (restored).

(7) The game machine 10 can change the settings in the setting change state in the following steps. The setting key is inserted while the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step 1). Operate (for example, turn) the setting key and set the setting key switch 1
27 to the ON state (step 2). Depressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (
ON) while turning on the power (power switch ON), the setting change state is entered (
step 3). In the setting change state, the set value is changed each time the set value change switch 126 is pressed (step 4). By operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state, the setting value is confirmed and the setting change state is terminated (
step 5).

At this time, steps 3 and 4 are displayed by notification means (for example, display by display device 41, sound (audio) by speakers 19a and 19b, and light emission by frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46).
In step 5, RAM clear is notified. In addition, external information output means (
For example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs security signals in steps 3 and 4, and stops outputting security signals in step 5. FIG. Incidentally, the game control device 100, step 5
RAM clear is executed in step 3 prior to the RAM clear notification in step 3 . i.e.
The game control device 100 gives priority to the setting change notification over the RAM clearing notification, thereby quickly performing the setting value change notification and improving the effect as fraud prevention measures. Also, the probability setting value display device 136 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set values in steps 3 and 4, and turns off in step 5. FIG. In addition, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 4, and step 5
to display the base value. The gaming machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the set probability display device 136 integrally. In that case, the status display device 135
, the set value is displayed in steps 3 and 4, and the base value is displayed in step 5. note that,
The game state of the game control device 100 is before the start of the game in steps 3 and 4, starts the game in step 5, and is in the middle of the game thereafter.

(8) In the setting confirmation state, the gaming machine 10 can confirm the setting in the following steps. The setting key is inserted while the setting key switch 127 is in the OFF state (step 1). Operate (for example, turn) the setting key and set the setting key switch 1
27 to the ON state (step 2). By turning on the power (power switch ON) without depressing the RAM initialization switch 112 (OFF), the setting confirmation state is entered (step 3). The setting confirmation state is ended by operating (for example, turning) the setting key and switching the setting key switch 127 to the OFF state (step 4).

At this time, setting confirmation is notified in step 3 by notification means (for example, display by display device 41, sound (sound) by speakers 19a and 19b, light emission by frame decoration device 18 and board decoration device 46). Further, the external information output means (for example, the external information terminal board 71) outputs a security signal in step 3 and stops outputting the security signal in step 4. FIG.
Further, the probability setting value display device 136 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and turns off in step 4. FIG. Also, the status display device 135 is turned off in steps 1 to 3,
Display the base value in step 4. The gaming machine 10 may be provided with the state display device 135 and the set probability display device 136 integrally. In this case, the status display device 135 turns off in steps 1 and 2, displays the set value in step 3, and displays the base value in step 4.
Note that the game state of the game control device 100 is before the game is started at step 3, the game is started at step 4, and the game is being played thereafter.

The game machine 10 is designed so that setting change and setting confirmation can be performed only before the game starts when the power is turned on. As a result, the gaming machine 10 eliminates the setting change and setting confirmation during the game,
This makes it easy to guarantee the operation during the game.

The gaming machine 10 of the first embodiment (including modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 includes a main control device (game control device 100) that performs game control by enabling selection of game-related settings from among a plurality of types, and a sub-control device that performs performance control based on commands from the main control device. A device (production control device 300) is provided. The slave control device has a control unit (CPU 311) that generates a game history based on a command, calculates game performance in a predetermined game state from the game history, and notifies the game performance at a predetermined notification trigger.

(2) The control section of (1) generates a game history based on a command that accompanies the progress of the game according to the set value.
(3) The control unit in (1) receives an operation from a player (or administrator, etc.) and sets notification contents (disclosure contents).

(4) The control unit of (1) informs (discloses) the game performance during the game (special game).
(5) The control unit of (1) notifies (discloses) the game performance except during the game (special game) (for example, while waiting for customers).

(6) The control unit of (1) enables setting of a period (aggregation period) during which history is collected (history collection period) to be aggregated.
(7) The control unit in (1) sets the minimum amount of information for the aggregated data, and supplements the shortfall of the minimum amount of information with dummy data.

(8) The control unit in (1) sets a minimum amount of information for aggregated data, and uses past history information (for example, previous day's history information, or similar aggregated data even before the previous day) to cover the shortfall of the minimum amount of information. history information, etc.).

[Second embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment will be described. Conventionally, even if it is a different input parameter (command) about the production|presentation control processing in the production|presentation control apparatus 300, if it is the same processing, such as using the same table data, one control program was shared. However, when it is desired to modify only some of the input parameters (commands) during the development process, the development burden tends to increase. Therefore, in the gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment, different control programs are prepared for different input parameters (commands) even for the same processing, such as using the same table data. As a result, in the gaming machine 10, when it is desired to modify the processing of some input parameters (commands) during the development process, it is sufficient to modify only the processing of the input parameters in the modification range, thereby reducing the burden of program development.

First, a typical variation display sequence of the special figure games (special figure 1 game, special figure 2 game) of the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 68 is a diagram showing an example of a variable display sequence according to the second embodiment.

The fluctuation display sequence shown in the figure is from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the fluctuation stop timing t3.
The time T00 up to is the variable display time (including the temporary stop time and excluding the symbol stop time). This variable display sequence is the time T01 from the variable start timing t0 to the timing t1.
is the first half fluctuation, the time T02 from the timing t1 to the timing t2 is the second half fluctuation, and the time T03 from the timing t2 to the fluctuation stop timing t3 is the temporary stop.

The effect control device 300 receives a variation start command from the game control device 100 to start symbol variation (variation start), and receives a stop command to stop symbol variation (variation stop). The variation start command may be one command, or may be a command set consisting of two or more commands (eg, stop symbol command, variation pattern command, hold command, etc.).

The performance control device 300 receives the variation start command and determines the content of performance control for each of the first half variation, second half variation, and temporary stop. Note that the second half change may include a temporary stop. Therefore, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control contents of the first half fluctuation by one effect control program, and determines the effect control contents of the second half change by another effect control program. In addition, when the fluctuation display sequence is the first half fluctuation, the second half fluctuation, and the temporary stop as the basic sequence,
One or more sub-renderings can be included as sub-sequences in the base sequence.

For example, the production control device 300 can selectively include the sub production of time T04 and the sub production of time T05 in the first half fluctuation from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1.

In addition, the production control device 300 determines (lottery) all production control contents before the first half fluctuation starts, and performs production control during fluctuation according to the decided production control contents. The contents of the effect control may be determined (lottery) at any time according to the progress of the control.

Next, the production distribution for each production control program for determining the content of production control in the variable display will be described with reference to FIG. 69 . FIG. 69 is a diagram showing an example of an effect control unit for variable display according to the second embodiment.

The table of FIG. 69 (1) shows the combination of the first half variation and the second half variation for each production control program.
The first half fluctuation “shortening loss”, “normal loss”, “step up loss”, and “pseudo continuous loss” do not have a paired second half change. That is, the first half fluctuation "shortening loss", "normal loss", "step up loss", and "pseudo continuous loss" pass the second half fluctuation and temporarily stop.

On the other hand, the first half fluctuation "normal reach", "step-up reach", and "pseudo continuous reach"
is paired with the second half variation "step-up allocation". The second half fluctuation "step-up distribution" is
Although details are omitted, there are two or more allocation patterns.

The production control device 300 has the first half fluctuation "shortening loss", "normal loss", "normal reach",
A performance control program corresponding to each of "step-up loss", "step-up reach", "pseudo-failure", and "pseudo-fed reach" is prepared. Moreover, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 prepares the production|presentation control program corresponding to every distribution pattern of a second half variation "step-up distribution."

The table in FIG. 69(2) shows a list of sub effects. The sub production is "PB (push button)
Notice” and “PB background change”. The effect control device 300 prepares a corresponding effect control program for each sub effect.

In addition, the production control program may be provided with one production control program corresponding to one input parameter (command), or one production control corresponding to two or more input parameters (command) A program may be provided. Also, the effect control program is not limited to an independent program as long as the control unit is independent, and may be a subroutine or the like in one program.

Next, the production control program and the reference table group in the first half variation will be explained using FIG. FIG. 70 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program and a reference table group in the effect control unit in the first half variation of the second embodiment.

The production control device 300 executes the first half fluctuation program (production control program) "program MP1" while referring to the reference table group (table set) "table set MA", so that the production control contents of the first half fluctuation "shortening loss" to decide.

In addition, the production control device 300 determines the production control contents of the first half fluctuation "normal loss" by executing the first half fluctuation program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB".

In addition, the production control device 300 determines the production control contents of the first half fluctuation "normal reach" by executing the first half fluctuation program "program MP3" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB".

In addition, the production control device 300 determines the production control contents of the first half fluctuation "step up loss" by executing the first half fluctuation program "program MP4" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC".

In addition, the production control device 300 determines the production control contents of the first half fluctuation "step up reach" by executing the first half fluctuation program "program MP5" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC".

In addition, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control contents of the first half change “pseudo consecutive loss” by executing the first half change program “program MP6” while referring to the reference table group “table set MD”.

In addition, the production control device 300 determines the production control contents of the first half fluctuation "pseudo continuous reach" by executing the first half fluctuation program "program MP7" while referring to the reference table group "table set MD".

Thus, the production control device 300 prepares the production control program for each first half variation.
Moreover, the production control device 300 prepares a table set for each first half variation. In addition, the table set may be prepared for each production control program (for example, table set "table set MA"), or may be shared by two or more production control programs (for example, table set " table set MB").

Next, the effect control program and the reference table group in the sub effect will be explained using FIG. FIG. 71 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program for a performance control unit and a reference table group in the sub performance of the second embodiment.

The effect control device 300 executes the sub effect program (effect control program) "program SP1" while referring to the reference table group (table set) "table set SA", thereby controlling the effect control contents of the sub effect "PB notice". to decide.

Also, the effect control device 300 determines the effect control contents of the sub effect "PB background change" by executing the sub effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB".

In this way, the effect control device 300 prepares the effect control program for each sub effect.
Moreover, the production control device 300 prepares a table set for each sub production. In addition, a table set may be prepared for each production control program (for example, a table set "table set SA"), or may be shared by two or more production control programs.

Although the combination of the control program of the performance control unit and the reference table group has been described for the first half variation and the sub performance, the second half variation is the same. In the following also, the first half variation and the sub effect will be described, and the description of the second half variation will be omitted.

Next, the production control program executed in the production control content determination process of the first half variation and the table set referred to will be described with reference to FIG. 72 . FIG. 72 is a diagram showing an example of a combination of a control program and a reference table group in the first half variable execution control of the second embodiment.

When the production control device 300 receives a variation start command related to normal loss, the first half variation program "program MP2" is performed while referring to the reference table group "table set MB".
' is executed to determine the effect control contents of the first half fluctuation "normal loss" from the fluctuation start timing t0 to the timing t1.

In addition, when the production control device 300 receives a fluctuation start command for normal reach,
By executing the first half variation program "program MP3" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB", the performance control contents of the first half variation "normal reach" from the variation start timing t0 to the timing t1 are determined.

Although the first-half variable programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are prepared separately, they refer to the same reference table group (reference table group "table set MB") and have the same control contents. be.

Also, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" make it possible to execute the sub effects "PB notice" and "PB background change" during the first half variation, respectively. For example, the effect control device 300 performs execution determination of the sub effect "PB notice" during execution of the first half variation program "program MP2" or "program MP3". Production control device 3
00 executes the sub-effect "PB notice" at time T04 by executing the sub-effect program "Program SP1" while referring to the reference table group "Table set SA". Determines the contents of the effect control. In addition, the effect control device 300 performs execution determination of the sub effect "PB background change" during the execution of the first half variation program "program MP2" or "program MP3". When the sub-effect "PB background change" is to be executed, the effect control device 300 executes the sub-effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB", thereby executing the sub-effect at time T04. The contents of the effect control of the "PB notice" are determined.

Next, the table set "table set MB" referred to during the execution of the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" by the effect control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a diagram showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the first half variation of the second embodiment.

The table set "table set MB" consists of the table "table MB1", the table "
Table MB2", Table MB3", Table MB4, and Table MB5.

Each table is a data table and includes an effect pattern selectable for each input parameter (command) and its selection probability (lottery probability). For example, the table "table MB1" includes production patterns "pattern 11", "pattern 12", "pattern 13", and "pattern 14". Also, the table "table MB2" includes effect patterns "pattern 21" and "pattern 22". Also, the table "table MB3" is
It includes production patterns “Pattern 31” and “Pattern 32”. In addition, the table "table MB4" includes effect patterns "pattern 41" and "pattern 42". In addition, the table "table MB5" includes production patterns "pattern 51" and "pattern 5
2”. It should be noted that each table may contain only one production pattern,
It may be two or more.

The solid lines connecting each table in the figure are the first half variation programs "program MP2", "
The control sequence of the program MP3' is shown. For example, the first-half variable programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" have a control sequence that first refers to the table "table MB1" and selects an effect pattern defined by the table "table MB1".
In the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3", when the effect pattern "pattern 11" is selected in the table "table MB1", the table "table MB2" is referred to and the effect pattern defined by the table "table MB2" is selected. has a control sequence for selecting In addition, the first half variation program "program MP2", "program M
P3" has a control sequence for referring to a table 'table MB3' and selecting an effect pattern defined by the table 'table MB3' when the effect pattern 'pattern 12' is selected in the table 'table MB1'. In addition, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" change the effect control contents of the sub effect "PB notice" when the effect pattern "pattern 13" or "pattern 14" is selected in the table "table MB1". It has a control sequence for executing (executing a sub-sequence) the sub-effect program "program SP1" to be determined.

Then, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences that end the first half variation and connect to the second half variation "second half A" when the performance pattern "pattern 21" is selected in the table "table MB2". have In addition, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" refer to the table "table MB4" when the effect pattern "pattern 22" is selected in the table "table MB2", and the table "table MB4" defines It has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern.

Then, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences that end the first half variation and connect to the second half variation "second half A" when the effect pattern "pattern 31" is selected in the table "table MB3". have In addition, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences that end the first half variation and connect to the second half variation "second half B" when the effect pattern "pattern 32" is selected in the table "table MB3". have

The first-half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" have effect pattern "pattern 41" or "pattern 42" in table "table MB4".
is selected, there is a control sequence that terminates the first half fluctuation and connects to the second half fluctuation "second half A".

Then, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" refer to the table "table MB5" after executing the sub effect program "program SP1".
It has a control sequence for selecting an effect pattern defined by the table "table MB5".

The first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are sub-effect programs for determining the effect control contents of the sub-effect "PB background change" when the effect pattern "pattern 51" is selected in the table "table MB5". "Program SP2
” (execution of subsequence). In addition, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" are control sequences for ending the first half variation and connecting to the second half variation "second half C" when the performance pattern "pattern 52" is selected in the table "table MB5". have

Then, the first half variation programs "program MP2" and "program MP3" complete the first half variation and the second half variation "second half C" after executing the sub performance program "program SP2".
has a control sequence to connect to

In this way, the effect control device 300 can determine the effect contents of the first half variation.
Next, the table set "table set SA" that the effect control device 300 refers to during execution of the sub effect program "program SP1" and the sub effect program "program SP2
74, the table set 'table set SB' referred to during execution of . FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example of a control program and a table selection pattern in the sub-effect of the second embodiment.

FIG. 74(1) shows the table set "table set SA" that the effect control device 300 refers to during execution of the sub effect program "program SP1". The table set 'table set SA' includes a table 'table SA1'. The table "table SA1" includes production patterns "pattern 61", "pattern 62", "pattern 63", and "pattern 64".

The solid line connecting the tables in the drawing indicates the control sequence of the sub performance program "program SP1". For example, the sub-effect program "Program SP1" includes the table "
It has a control sequence for referring to the table "table SA1" and selecting an effect pattern defined by the table "table SA1".

The sub effect program "program SP1" is a caller ( It has a control sequence for returning to the original program (execution source) (for example, the first half variation program "program MP2").

Note that the effect pattern "Pattern 61" (indicated by cross hatching) is a specific effect that requires attention to the consistency of the effect, for example, a hit effect. Win probability effect can be selected only by variable display that derives winning, and should not be selected by variable display that does not derive winning.

Sub production program "Program SP1" and table set "Table set SA" (
Since the table "table SA1") includes such a specific effect as a control target, the first half variation program "program MP2", "program M
P3". That is, the production control device 300, the first half variation program "
Since the control points that require attention are separated from the program MP2”, “program MP3” and the table set “table set MB”, the first half variation program “program MP2”,
While securing the degree of freedom for changing the "program MP3" and the table set "table set MB", the consistency as a whole is secured.

FIG. 74(2) shows the table set "table set SB" that the effect control device 300 refers to during execution of the sub effect program "program SP2". The table set 'table set SB' includes a table 'table SB1' and a 'table SB2'. The table "table SB1" includes effect patterns "pattern 71" and "pattern 72".
including. The table "table SB2" includes effect patterns "pattern 81" and "pattern 82".

The solid line connecting the tables in the drawing indicates the control sequence of the sub performance program "Program SP2". For example, the sub-effect program "program SP2" has a control sequence that first refers to the table "table SB1" and selects the effect pattern defined by the table "table SB1".

Then, when the sub effect program 'program SP2' selects the effect pattern 'pattern 71' in the table 'table SB1', it refers to the table 'table SB2' and selects the effect pattern defined by the table 'table SB2'. It has a control sequence. In addition, the sub effect program "program SP2" includes a table "table SB1
”, it has a control sequence for returning to the caller (executor) program (for example, the first half variation program “program MP2”).

Then, the sub effect program "program SP2" is a caller (executor) program (for example, a It has a control sequence to return to the first half variation program ("program MP2").

Note that the effect patterns "Pattern 71" and "Pattern 81" (indicated by cross-hatching) are specific effects that require attention to the consistency of the effects, and are, for example, hit-probability effects. Win probability effect can be selected only by variable display that derives winning, and should not be selected by variable display that does not derive winning.

Sub production program "Program SP2" and table set "Table set SB" (
Since the tables "Table SB1" and "Table SB2") include such specific effects in the controlled objects, the first half variation program "Program MP
2”, separated from “Program MP3”. That is, the production control device 300
Since the control points that require attention are separated from the first-half variable programs "Program MP2", "Program MP3" and the table set "Table set MB", the first-half variable program "
The consistency as a whole is ensured while securing the degree of freedom for changing the program MP2', 'program MP3' and the table set 'table set MB'.

Next, table data will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 75 is a diagram showing an example of table data according to the second embodiment.
FIG. 75(1) shows the table data of the table "table MB1". The table "table MB1" includes effect patterns that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and their selection probabilities (lottery probabilities). For example, the table "table MB1" includes production patterns "pattern 11", "pattern 12", and "pattern 13" as selectable production patterns.
, and “Pattern 14”. In the table "table MB1", when the command A is used as an input parameter, that is, when the variation start command is the command A, the selection probability of the effect pattern "pattern 11" is "A11%", and the effect pattern "pattern 12" is selected. The selection probability of is "A12%", and the selection probability of the effect pattern "pattern 13" is "A13%
, which indicates that the selection probability of the effect pattern “pattern 14” is “A14%”.
At this time, the sum of the selection probabilities of all effect patterns is "100%". Command B
, or when command D is an input parameter.

It should be noted that the table "table MB1" has effect patterns "pattern 11", "pattern 12", "pattern 13", and "pattern 1" when command C is used as an input parameter.
4” is not selected. In other words, the table "table MB1" indicates that command C is not an input parameter.

FIG. 75(2) shows the table data of the table "table SB1". The table "table SB1" includes effect patterns that can be selected for each input parameter (command) and their selection probabilities (lottery probabilities). For example, the table "table SB1" includes effect patterns "pattern 71" and "pattern 72" as selectable effect patterns. In the table "table SB1", when command A is used as an input parameter, that is, when command A is the variation start command, the selection probability of effect pattern "pattern 71" is "A7
1%” and the selection probability of the effect pattern “Pattern 72” is “A72%”. At this time, the sum of the selection probabilities of all effect patterns is "100%". The same is true when command B or command D is an input parameter.

The table "table SB1" indicates that neither of the effect patterns "pattern 71" and "pattern 72" is selected when the command C is used as an input parameter. In other words, the table "table SB1" indicates that command C is not an input parameter.

In addition, the table "table SB1" has the pattern "pattern 71" as a specific effect. The table "table SB1" includes the pattern "pattern 71". Therefore, even if there is a change in the pattern "pattern 71", the table "table SB1" can close the range requiring attention to the consistency of the effect to the range of the table "table SB1".

Although the tables "table MB1" and "table SB1" have been described as representatives, the same applies to other tables.
Next, the first half effect apportioning process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 76 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the first half effect apportionment processing of the second embodiment. The first half effect distribution process is a process of distributing the first half variation program to be executed for each input parameter (command). The first half production distribution process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311) of the production control device 300. FIG. The first half effect allocation process is a process executed by the control section in step D56 of the received command analysis process.

[Step D151] The control unit inputs a command (fluctuation start command) as an input parameter.
to get
[Step D152] The control section branches to the step corresponding to the acquired command (distribution of first half effect).

[Step D153] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first-half variation “shortening failure”, the control unit executes shortening failure processing. The shortened failing process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP1" while referring to the reference table group "table set MA". The control unit ends the first half effect allocation process after executing the shortened losing process.

[Step D154] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first-half variation “normal failure”, the control unit executes normal failure processing. The normal losing process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB". The control unit ends the first half effect allocation process after executing the normal losing process.

[Step D155] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half fluctuation "normal reach", the control unit executes the normal reach process. The normal reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP3" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB". The control unit ends the first half effect distribution processing after executing the normal ready-to-win processing.

[Step D156] When the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half variation "step-up failure", the control unit executes step-up failure processing. The step-up failure process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP4" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC". The control unit ends the first half effect allocation process after executing the step-up losing process.

[Step D157] If the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first half variation "step-up reach", the control unit executes the step-up reach process. The step-up reach process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP5" while referring to the reference table group "table set MC". The control unit ends the first half effect allocation process after executing the step-up reach process.

[Step D158] If the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first-half variation “pseudo-run loss”, the control unit executes the pseudo-run-loss process. The pseudo consecutive loss processing is performed by referring to the reference table group "table set MD" and executing the first half variation program "program MP6
” is the process of executing The control unit ends the first half effect distribution processing after executing the pseudo consecutive losing processing.

[Step D159] If the acquired command is a command corresponding to the first-half variation "pseudo continuous reach", the control unit executes the pseudo continuous reach process. The pseudo-continuous reach processing is performed by referring to the reference table group "table set MD" and performing the first half variation program "program MP7
” is the process of executing The control unit ends the first half effect distribution processing after executing the pseudo continuous reach processing.

Next, on behalf of shortened loss processing, normal loss processing, normal reach processing, step-up loss processing, step-up reach processing, pseudo-continuous loss processing, and pseudo-continuous reach processing,
The normal losing process will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 77 is a diagram showing a flowchart of the normal losing process of the second embodiment.

The normal losing process is a process of executing the first half variation program "program MP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set MB". The normal losing process is a process performed by the control unit (CPU 311 ) of the effect control device 300 . Normal loss processing is
This is a process executed by the control unit in step D154 of the first half effect apportionment process.

[Step D161] The control unit creates a table set (reference table group “table set M
B").
[Step D162] The control section sets the leading sequence.

[Step D163] The controller selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D164] The control unit refers to the selected table and selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery.

[Step D165] The controller determines whether the current sequence is the tail sequence. If the current sequence is not the tail sequence, the control unit proceeds to step D166, and if the current sequence is the tail sequence, the normal failure processing ends.

[Step D166] The controller updates the sequence.
[Step D167] If the updated sequence designates the selection of the next table, the control unit proceeds to step D163, and if the updated sequence designates execution of sub effects, the control unit proceeds to step D168.

[Step D168] The control section distributes the sub effects according to the updated sequence. If the sub effect according to the updated sequence is the PB notice, the control unit performs step D
Proceeding to 169, if it is a PB background change, proceed to step D170.

[Step D169] The control unit executes PB notice processing. The PB advance notice process is performed by referring to the reference table group "table set SA" and executing the sub effect program "program SP1".
is the process of executing After executing the PB advance notice process, the control unit proceeds to step D165.

[Step D170] The control unit executes PB background change processing. The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB". After executing the PB background change process, the control unit proceeds to step D165.

Next, the PB background change process will be described with reference to FIG. 78 as a representative of the PB notice process and the PB background change process. FIG. 78 is a diagram showing a flowchart of PB background change processing according to the second embodiment.

The PB background change process is a process of executing the sub effect program "program SP2" while referring to the reference table group "table set SB". The PB background change process is
It is a process performed by the control part (CPU311) of the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. The PB background change process is a process executed by the control unit during execution of the effect control program (for example, step D170 of normal losing process).

[Step D171] The control unit creates a table set (reference table group “table set S
A”).
[Step D172] The control unit sets the leading sequence.

[Step D173] The controller selects a table corresponding to the set sequence.
[Step D174] The control unit refers to the selected table and selects and sets an effect pattern by lottery.

[Step D175] The controller determines whether the current sequence is the tail sequence. If the current sequence is not the tail sequence, the control unit proceeds to step D176, and if it is the tail sequence, ends the PB background change processing.

[Step D176] The controller updates the sequence and proceeds to step D173.
The game machine 10 reduces the development load of the program of the production control device 300 by such a production control program.

For example, the first half variation ``normal loss'' and the first half variation ``normal reach'' perform the same effect control, while the first half variation ``normal loss'' is realized by executing the first half variation program ``program MP2'', and the first half variation "Normal reach" is the first half fluctuation program "program MP
3” is implemented. That is, the first half variation "normal loss" and the first half variation "normal reach" are implemented by different programs for the same effect control.

79 and 80, the case where the effect control content of the first half variation "normal reach" is changed in the development process will be described. FIG. 79 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the second embodiment. FIG. 80 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the control program and the table selection pattern in the first half variation modified in the development process of the second embodiment.

In the development process, the first half fluctuation "normal reach" refers to the reference table group "
table set MBa". As a result, the reference table group "table set M
B” is only the first half variation “normal loss”.

In addition, in the development process, the change from the first half fluctuation program "program MP3" to the first half fluctuation program "program MP3a" has no effect on the first half fluctuation "normal lose".

In the reference table group "table set MBa", table "table MB4" is replaced with table "table MB9". In addition, the first half variable program "Program M
P3a" has three locations before and after the table "Table MB9", and the table "Table MB9"
The branch is replaced at a total of 4 places, one at a position away from (after the table "Table MB3").

The change in the control contents of the first half fluctuation "normal reach" in the development process like this is the first half fluctuation "
If the program is shared between "Normal Loss" and the first half fluctuation "Normal Reach", the first half fluctuation "
It also extends to "normal loss". However, the game machine 10 is the first half fluctuation "normal loss"
Since the program is not shared by the first half fluctuation "normal reach", the influence range of the change of the control content can be separated.

Note that the game machine 10 changes both the first half variation program and the reference table group,
Either one may be changed.
In addition, the control range of the first half variation "normal reach" includes PB notice processing and PB background change processing. It is independent of the first half variation program. therefore,
PB advance notice processing and PB background change processing are not affected by changes in the first half variation program and its reference table group.

The gaming machine 10 of the second embodiment (including modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes a main control device (game control device 100) that performs game control, and a sub-control device (performance control device 300) that performs performance control based on commands from the main control device. The slave control device stores table data (reference table group "table set MB", reference table group "table set S
A”, the reference table group “table set SB”) is controlled by the execution of the first program (for example, the first half variation program “program MP2” of the first half variation “normal loss”). First control (normal loss processing), and a second program (for example, the first half fluctuation "normal reach") that is different from the first program (for example, the first half fluctuation "normal reach") and a control unit (CPU 311) capable of executing the second control (normal reach processing) controlled by executing the first half variation program “program MP3”).
(2) The table data of (1) consist of first table data (reference table group "table set MB") that does not include a specific effect, and second table data that includes a specific effect (reference table group "table set SA", reference table group "table set SB"), the control unit executes the first control that distributes the effects from the first table data based on the first command by executing the first program, and executes the first control of the second program. Based on the second command by execution, the first
A second control that distributes effects from the table data is executed, and a third program different from the first program and the second program (for example, a sub-effect program "program SP1" of a sub-variation "PB notice") is executed. A third control (PB advance notice process) is executed for allocating effects from the second table data based on the command or the second command.

[Third embodiment]
First, the configuration of the game board of the game machine 10 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82. FIG. FIG. 81 is a front view (No. 1) showing an example of the game board of the game machine of the third embodiment. FIG. 82 is a front view (No. 2) showing an example of the game board of the game machine of the third embodiment.

A game board 700 in FIG. 81 shows a state in which a movable accessory is stored, and a game board 700 in FIG. 82 shows a state in which the stored movable accessory appears to be visible.
As shown in FIGS. 81 and 82, the game board 700 is provided with a center case 40 substantially in the center. Inside the center case 40 are a display device 41, a second display device 701, lighting units 702a to 702c, a logo display unit 703, a first board effect device 704, and second board effect devices 705L and 705R. , a third board effect device 706 and a fourth board effect device 707 are provided.

The second display device 701 notifies the information about the game (for example, the performance of the game, etc.) by display. In the game board 700, the second display device 701 has a hexagonal shape, a display portion for displaying predetermined information such as characters is formed in the center portion, and a frame portion is formed so as to surround the display portion. . The frame portion is configured to be lit in a plurality of lighting colors (for example, configured with LEDs).

The lighting units 702a to 702c report information about the game (such as progress of the game) depending on the lighting state. On the game board 700, the lighting section 702a displays "1", and the lighting section 70
2b displays "2" and lighting section 702c displays "3". Gaming machine 10, for example,
By turning on the lighting portion 702a and turning off the lighting portions 702b and 702c, it is notified that the progress is in the first stage. By setting the lighting units 702a to 702c in the lighting state, the progress is in the third stage (for example,
immediately before the production starts).

The lighting units 702a to 702c may, for example, be configured to be movable (for example, rotatable and swingable). In this case, the gaming machine 10 moves the lighting units 702a to 702c when switching from off to on, thereby making it easier to grasp that the lighting state (on/off) has changed.

The logo display portion 703 is composed of a plurality of characters (a plurality of components) that display the product name (product name, brand, etc.) of the gaming machine 10 . Each component of the logo display unit 703 is configured to be lit up in a plurality of lighting colors (for example, configured with LEDs), and the logo display unit 703 displays information about the game (game progress, etc.) depending on the lighting state. inform.

In the game board 700, the logo display portion 703 includes "A", "B", "C", "D", "E", "F
'' and ``G'', and the lighting color of each component can be controlled.

For example, the logo display unit 703 puts all the constituent parts in the off state at the start of the production, increases the number of the constituent parts in the lighting state as the production progresses, and puts all the constituent parts in the lighting state at the end timing of the production. By doing so, the progress of the game (progress of the effect) is notified. note that,
The logo display part 703 puts all the component parts into a non-lit state at the start of the production, increases the number of the component parts that are in a lighting state as the production progresses, and turns all the component parts into a lighting state only in the case of a big hit. The game progress (progress progress) may be reported.

The first board effect device 704 performs a game effect by operating. game board 700
, the first panel rendering device 704 is shaped like a gourd. 1st panel production device 704
is provided on the left side of the display device 41, and is operable to a position where the upper portion is tilted toward the display device 41 as shown in FIG.

The second board effect devices 705L and 705R perform game effects by operating.
In the game board 700, the second board effect device 705L is arranged at a position not overlapping the display device 41 on the upper left side of the display device 41 (for example, stored so as not to be visually recognized) during normal operation (when not in operation). During operation, it appears at the upper left of the display device 41 as shown in FIG. In addition, the second board rendering device 705R is arranged at a position not overlapping the display device 41 on the upper right side of the display device 41 (for example, retracted so as not to be visually recognized) during normal operation (during non-operation). As shown in FIG. 2, the front side of the display device 41 appears on the upper right side of the display device 41, and the front side of the display device 41 extends toward the center of the display device 41 from the upper right side of the display device 41. As shown in FIG.

The third board effect device 706 performs game effects by operating. game board 700
, the third board effect device 706 is arranged (stored) on the back side of the second display device 701 during normal operation (during non-operation), and is displayed on the display device 41 during operation as shown in FIG. It is possible to move the front side of the display device 41 from above the display device 41 toward the center of the display device 41 .

In the game board 700, the second board effect devices 705L and 705R and the third board effect device 706 are connected to each other in a state of being operated in the central part, and the three board effect devices are integrated to form a predetermined shape. configured as possible.

The fourth board effect device 707 performs game effects by operating. The fourth board effect device 707 is a character shape related to the effect of the gaming machine 10 . In the game board 700, the fourth board effect device 707 is arranged (for example, stored so as not to be visually recognized) at a position not superimposed on the display device 41 on the lower left side of the display device 41 in a normal state (when it is not movable). During operation, as shown in FIG. 82, it appears on the front side of the lower portion of the display device 41, and the front side of the lower portion of the display device 41 can be moved left and right. It should be noted that the fourth panel effect device 707 may be capable of moving the weapon held by the character.
An action of tilting the character may be possible.

The above is an example of the game board 700 of the game machine 10 according to the third embodiment. Next, the configuration of the display screen in the display device 41 of the third embodiment will be explained using FIG. Figure 83
[Fig. 11] Fig. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to a third embodiment. [Fig.

The display screen 708 includes two sets of decorative symbols (large symbol group 709 and small symbol group 710), a special figure 1 reserved number display 711, a special figure 2 reserved number display 712, a reserved display 713, and a reserved digestion display 714.
, a pending digestion pedestal display 715, and an advance notice display 716 are included in the display contents.

The two sets of decorative patterns include a large pattern group 709 as a first decorative pattern and a small pattern group 710 as a second decorative pattern. The large symbol group 709 is in charge of game production for the purpose of improving interest. Therefore, the large pattern group 709 is displayed largely in the substantially central portion of the display device 41 . Large pattern group 709
includes a left symbol 709L, a middle symbol 709C and a right symbol 709R. The left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R all indicate that the corresponding special figure variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

Generally, the large symbol group 709 starts changing in the order of left symbol 709L, right symbol 709R, and medium symbol 709C, and stops (including temporary stop) in the order of left symbol 709L, right symbol 709R, and medium symbol 709C. Therefore, in many cases, the large symbol group 709 forms a reach mode with the left symbol 709L and the right symbol 709R, and waits for the stop of the middle symbol 709C to enable the formation of a hit mode.

The small symbol group 710 is in charge of notifying the variable display state for the purpose of improving the ease of grasping the game state of the player. Therefore, the small pattern group 710 is displayed in a small size on the periphery of the display device 41 so as to ensure visibility without interfering with the display performance by the large pattern group 709 . The small pattern group 710 is
It includes a left symbol, a middle symbol and a right symbol. The left symbols, medium symbols, and right symbols in the small symbol group 710 on the display screen 708 all indicate that the corresponding special symbol variation display game is in the symbol variation state.

The special figure 1 reservation number display 711 displays the number of reservation memories (the number of start memories) of the special figure 1 game. The special figure 2 reserved number display 712 displays the number of reserved memories of the special figure 2 game. The pending display 713 can clearly indicate the number of pending memories of the special figure fluctuation display game and inform the reliability (expectation) of the game result for each pending memory depending on the display mode. The reserved memory indicates the execution right of the special figure fluctuation display game. For example, pending display 713 may display a pending storage display (
The reliability of the game result is reported by changing the display mode (character) of the reserved memory display (for example, changing from a general-purpose character to a dedicated character when the reliability is high). It should be noted that the hold display 713 changes the display mode of the hold memory display, and instead of changing the display mode of the hold memory display, the action mode (for example, when the character is normally in the walking mode, and when the reliability is high, the character is in the running mode). The reliability of the results may be reported.

The pending digestion display 714 can indicate the variation state of the special figure variation display game and can inform the reliability of the game result by its display mode. In FIG. 83, pending digestion display 714
indicates that the special figure variation display game is in the process of symbol variation. For example, the pending digestion display 714 changes the display mode (character) of the pending memory display corresponding to the pending memory (for example, by changing from a general-purpose character to a dedicated character when the reliability is high) to increase confidence in the game result. report the degree. It should be noted that the pending digestion display 714 is replaced by a change in the display mode of the pending memory display, instead of an action mode (for example, normally, the character is in a walking mode,
The reliability of the game result may be reported by making the character run in a running mode when the reliability is high.

Pending digestion pedestal representation 715 defines the location where pending digestion representation 714 is displayed. The pending digestion pedestal display 715 includes a character display and a pedestal display. The character display displays a character that is the motif of the performance performed by the gaming machine 10 . In FIG. 83, the character display displays a tiger-like character. The pedestal display displays a foothold on which the reserved memory display (character) corresponding to the reserved memory being digested and the character displayed by the character display are located.

The advance notice display 716 gives advance notice of an effect (granted privilege) to be performed in the pending memory during standby or the pending memory during digestion. The advance notice display 716 displays a treasure chest and a gourd, and when the reserved memory during standby or the reserved memory being consumed is consumed, an effect corresponding to the item (symbol) to be displayed (in FIG. It informs that the production corresponding to the item and the production corresponding to the item in the form of a gourd) will be performed. The notice display 716 is in a non-display state when no items are stocked.

The items displayed in the advance notice display 716 are added when the baggage is opened at the start of digestion of the reserved memory displayed in the form of holding the baggage (holding memory display in the form of the character holding the baggage). In addition, the baggage appears at a predetermined timing. It should be noted that the luggage is displayed on hold display 713
It may be made to appear at the timing when the reserved memory display is started to be displayed (at the start of display), or may be made to appear in the middle.

Next, the relationship between the items appearing from the package and the effects (granted benefits) will be described with reference to FIG. 84 . FIG. 84 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between items appearing from luggage and their contents in the third embodiment.

There are patterns P1 to P5 for items appearing in the package. The item of pattern P1 is an item (symbol) shaped like a skull. The item of pattern P1 clearly indicates that it is a fake (failure to open the parcel (flashing effect)). When an item of pattern P1 appears from the luggage, the item is not stocked (added) to the notice display 716 .

The item of pattern P2 is an item shaped like a heart. pattern P2
items can be directed PT (
It is specified that the production PT acquisition production for acquiring points) is performed. For example, in the gaming machine 10, the right to execute the effect can be obtained by accumulating the effect PT up to a predetermined value. When an item with the pattern P2 appears from the package, an item shaped like a heart is stocked in the advance notice display 716 .

The item of pattern P3 is an item shaped like a gourd. The item of pattern P3 clearly indicates that the effect PT acquisition effect is performed in either the pending memory during digestion or the pending memory during standby. When an item of pattern P3 appears from luggage, an item shaped like a gourd is stocked in the advance notice display 716 .

The item of pattern P4 is an item having a form indicating a push button (PB) (an item in the form of a push button). The item of pattern P4 uses the push button (accompanied by the operation of the push button) in either the suspended memory during digestion or the suspended memory during standby. (e.g., an effect that evokes as if a variable display game is being played multiple times) will be performed. When an item of pattern P4 appears from the luggage, the advance notice display 716 is stocked with an item in the form of a push button. It should be noted that the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button that is executed based on the item that indicates the push button may be a dedicated effect that is different from the effect using the push button that is performed independently of the item.

The item of pattern P5 is an item that looks like a treasure chest. The item of pattern P5 clearly indicates that a treasure box opening effect (a treasure box is opened and an item appears from inside) is performed in either the pending memory during digestion or the pending memory during standby. When an item of pattern P5 appears from the luggage, the preview display 716 stocks items in the shape of a treasure box.

Next, items appearing from treasure boxes will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 85 is a diagram showing an example of the relationship between items appearing from treasure chests and their contents in the third embodiment.
There are patterns P10 to P14 for items appearing in the treasure box in the treasure box opening presentation. The item of pattern P10 is an item having a skull-like aspect. The item of pattern P10 clearly indicates that it is fake (does not develop from the treasure box opening presentation).
If an item with pattern P10 appears from a treasure chest while the reserved memory is consumed (while the special figure variation display game is running), the effect related to the appeared item will not be performed after the opening effect of the treasure box ends. .

The item of pattern P11 is an item shaped like a heart. Pattern P
11 items clearly indicate that it develops into a production PT acquisition production. If an item with pattern P11 appears from a treasure box while the reserved memory is consumed (while the special figure variation display game is running), after the opening effect of the treasure box is completed, the effect PT acquisition effect will be performed in the special figure variation display game. is performed.

The item of pattern P12 is an item shaped like a gourd. pattern P1
Item 2 clearly indicates that it develops into a production PT acquisition production. If an item with pattern P12 appears from a treasure box while the reserved memory is consumed (during the execution of the special figure variation display game), after the opening effect of the treasure box is finished, the effect PT acquisition effect will be performed in the special figure variation display game. is performed.

The item of pattern P13 is an item of a mode in which a continuation character is displayed. The item of pattern P13 clearly indicates that it develops into a pseudo-continuous effect. If an item with pattern P13 appears from a treasure box while the reserved memory is consumed (while the special figure variation display game is running), after the opening effect of the treasure box ends, a pseudo-continuous effect will be performed in the special figure variation display game. It is carried out.

The item of pattern P14 is an item in the form of displaying characters of intense heat. Items of pattern P14 demonstrate a high degree of confidence (eg, 60%). When an item with pattern P14 appears from a treasure chest while the reserved memory is consumed (during execution of the special figure variation display game), after the opening effect of the treasure chest is completed, the reliability is high in the special figure variation display game. A performance is held.

Next, an example of the effects of the variable display game executed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 to 88. FIG. 86 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 87 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment; FIG. 88 is a diagram (part 4) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to the third embodiment; FIG.

A display screen 717 shown in FIG. 86(1) is a display screen while the symbol variation is stopped (during the variation display game is stopped), and shows a state in which no items are stocked in the notice display 716 .
On the display screen 717, the notice display 716 is in a non-display state because there are no items stocked in the notice display 716. FIG. Further, on the display screen 717, since the pattern variation is stopped, the pending memory display is not displayed in the pending digestion display 714. FIG. Also, on the display screen 717, the holding memory display in the form of holding the baggage is positioned at the first (head) in the holding display 713, and when digestion of the next holding memory is started, an item will appear from the baggage. clearly stated.

A display screen 718 shown in FIG. 86(2) is a display screen after the display screen 717, and shows a state in which digestion of the reserved memory has started (a state in which symbol variation has started) displayed in the form of holding a package. show. On the display screen 718, the left pattern 709L, the middle pattern 709C, and the right pattern 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 718, each holding memory display slides by one from the state in the display screen 717, and the holding memory display of the state with the baggage that was positioned first in the holding display 713 is positioned in the holding digestion display 714, It shows that the special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the reserved memory displayed in the mode with the baggage has been started.

A display screen 719 shown in FIG. 86(3) is a display screen after the display screen 718, and shows a state in which an unsealing effect for unsealing the parcel is being executed. Display screen 719 shows pending digestion display 71
4, an item of pattern P4 (push-button form) appears from the load of the pending memory display displayed in 4, and the special figure fluctuation display game of either the pending memory being digested or the pending memory waiting. It is clearly stated that a pseudo-continuous effect using a push button is performed in . Also, on the display screen 719, by displaying a message "Thank you for the tribute!"

A display screen 720 shown in FIG. 87(1) is a display screen after the display screen 719, and is in a state in which items appearing from luggage are newly stocked in the notice display 716. FIG. Display screen 7
In 20, an advance notice display 716 is displayed because an item to be stocked has appeared, and the advance notice display 716 that has been put into the display state displays an item in the form of a push button that has emerged from the package. On the display screen 720, as the item appears from the baggage, the mode of the reserved memory display for displaying the reserved memory being digested is changed from the mode with the baggage to the mode without the baggage. Note that the gaming machine 10 disables input by pressing the push button (does not accept input) while in the advance notice display 716 .

The display screen 721 shown in FIG. 87 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 720, regardless of the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button announced by the announcement display 716 in the special figure fluctuation display game (independent ) indicates a state in which an effect using the push button performed is occurring.

The display screen 721 includes an effect display 722 in its display contents. The effect display 722 displays the effect executed in the special figure variation display game. On the display screen 721, the effect display 722 is
An image showing how to press the push button (an image that prompts the operation of the push button), a message "Push !!" It clearly indicates that an effect using the push button (an effect of pressing the push button) is being executed in the display game. On the display screen 721 , the stock state (stocked items) of the notice display 716 has not changed from the stock state (stocked items) of the notice display 716 on the display screen 720 . As a result, the display screen 721 shows that the effect display 722 is not the effect predicted by the advance notice display 716,
In other words, it indicates that the effect using the push button being executed is irrelevant to the item in the form of the push button stocked in the notice display 716 .

Then, the gaming machine 10 displays the display screen 721 (when an effect using the push button is executed in the effect display 722 while the item of the push button is displayed in the advance notice display 716), and the player presses the push button (operation). ), only the operation (input by pressing) on the effect display 722 is valid (the effect using the push button displayed by the effect display 722 is given priority). In other words, the gaming machine 10 invalidates the input by pressing the item in the form of the push button stocked in the notice display 716 .

As described above, the game machine 10 disables the input by pressing while the item is displayed in the notice display 716, so that the operation is not mixed up. There is no need to set restrictions such as prohibiting performances using push buttons that are performed irrelevantly. In other words, the gaming machine 10 can secure the degree of freedom of the performance (prevent the degree of freedom from being lowered) even during the execution of the notice, and can improve the interest.

In this case, the gaming machine 10 may change the display mode (for example, grayscale) of the item in the form of the push button displayed in the notice display 716 to indicate that the input by pressing is invalid. good.

A display screen 723 shown in FIG. 87(3) is a display screen after the display screen 721, and shows a state in which the special figure variation display game is finished and the symbol variation is stopped.
On the display screen 723, the effect that the item stocked in the notice display 716 is announced in the special figure variation display game being executed on the display screen 721 is not performed (the stocked item is not consumed) and the special figure is displayed. Since the variable display game has ended, the stock state of the advance notice display 716 is the same stock state as the display screen 721 .

A display screen 724 shown in FIG. 88(1) is a display screen after the display screen 723, and shows a state in which consumption of a new reserved memory has started (a state in which fluctuation has started). On the display screen 724, each reserved memory display slides by one from the state on the display screen 723, and the reserved memory display positioned first in the reserved display 713 on the display screen 723 is positioned in the reserved digestion display 714,
A special figure variation display game corresponding to the reserved memory display has been started.

A display screen 725 shown in FIG. 88(2) is a display screen after the display screen 724, and is a state in which an effect corresponding to the item (push-button type item) stocked in the notice display 716 has started. indicates

On the display screen 725, the items in the form of push buttons stocked in the notice display 716 are moving from the notice display 716 while expanding toward the center of the screen. As a result, the display screen 725 clearly indicates that the effect to be started from now on is the effect (pseudo-continuous effect using the push button) predicted by the item in the form of the push button.

A display screen 726 shown in FIG. 88(3) is a display screen after the display screen 725, and is in a state where an effect corresponding to the item (push-button type item) stocked in the advance notice display 716 is being executed. indicates

On the display screen 726, as the effect display 722, an image showing how the push button is pressed, a message "Press!!" It clearly indicates that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed. On the display screen 726, the effect announced by the items stocked in the notice display 716 is executed (the stocked items are consumed), and the notice display 716 is displayed.
Since there are no more items stocked in 16, the notice display 716 is in a non-display state.

Next, in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button executed based on the items in the form of the push button stocked in the notice display 716, there is an input by pressing the push button, and there is no input by pressing the button. An example of the content of the presentation performed at 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 89 . FIG. 89 is a diagram showing an example of the contents of effects performed when the push button is pressed and when the push button is not pressed in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button in the third embodiment.

For example, the gaming machine 10, as shown in FIG. 89(a), when the input by pressing the push button is not performed in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button (when it is not pressed), the pseudo-continuous effect of the normal mode is performed. (Normal quasi-continuation) is executed, and when an input is made by depressing the push button in the performance using the push button, a quasi-continuation (dedicated quasi-continuation) prepared exclusively for the pseudo-continuation performance using the push button is executed. That is, the gaming machine 10 uses the push button to select the type of pseudo-run in the pseudo-run effect using the push button.

Alternatively, the gaming machine 10, as shown in FIG. 89(b), in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button, when the input by pressing the push button is not performed (when it is not pressed), high-speed fluctuation (display screen 720) is continued, and when an input is made by pressing the push button in the performance using the push button, a pseudo-run is executed. That is, game machine 1
0 is used for selecting whether or not to execute the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button in the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button.

Next, referring to FIG. 90, a description will be given of the processing for setting packages to be displayed in the pending memory display. Figure 9
0 is a diagram showing a flowchart of package setting processing in the third embodiment.
The luggage setting process is a process performed when a new pending memory is generated by the control unit (CPU 311) of the effect control device 300, that is, when a winning command indicating that a new pending memory is generated is received. The parcel setting process is, for example, a process executed by the controller in step D23 of the main process.

[Step D300] The control unit generates an effect in which the effect to be executed in the reserved memory newly generated based on the winning command is the target of the notice (effect to execute the effect notified as the notice in the special figure fluctuation display game) It is determined whether or not. The control unit proceeds to step D301 when it determines to execute the performance targeted for the notice, and proceeds to step D307 when it determines not to execute the performance targeted for the notice.

[Step D301] The control unit determines whether or not there is a pending memory displayed in a state of holding a package in the pending memory. If the control unit determines that there is a pending memory displayed in the form of a character holding luggage, the process proceeds to step D302, and if it determines that there is no pending memory displayed in the form of a character holding luggage, step D304. proceed to

[Step D302] The control unit determines whether or not the contents of the parcel displayed with the parcel in the holding memory can be replaced. For example, the control unit determines that the replacement is possible when the pattern P1 is set as the content of the parcel, and determines that the replacement is impossible when the pattern other than P1 is set as the content. A priority is set for each pattern, and the priority of the pattern before replacement is compared with the priority of the pattern after replacement. If the priority of the pattern after replacement is higher, it is determined that replacement is possible. may

If the control unit determines that the contents of the package can be replaced, the process proceeds to step D303,
If it is determined that the contents of the package cannot be replaced, the process proceeds to step D304.
[Step D303] The control unit replaces the contents of the parcel from the pattern P1 with an item pattern corresponding to the performance to be announced by the newly generated pending memory.

[Step D304] The control unit sets the package as the display mode of the pending memory display corresponding to any of the pending memories (the newly generated pending memory or the pending memory on standby). set the character you have).

[Step D305] The control unit sets, as the contents of the parcel set in step D304, the pattern of the item corresponding to the performance to be announced by the newly generated pending memory.

[Step D306] The control section determines whether or not a package has already been set as the display mode of the pending memory display corresponding to the newly generated pending memory. If the control unit determines that the package has not been set as the display mode of the pending memory display corresponding to the newly generated pending memory, the process proceeds to step D307 to display the pending memory display corresponding to the newly generated pending memory. If it is determined that the package has already been set, the package setting process is terminated.

[Step D307] The control section determines whether or not it is time to generate a package with a skull. For example, the control unit generates a random number and determines that it is time to generate a package with a skull when the random number indicates a predetermined value.

When the control unit determines that it is time to generate a package with a skull, the control unit executes step D30.
8, and when it is determined that it is not the time to generate a package with a skull, the package setting process is terminated.

[Step D308] The control unit sets a package as the display mode of the pending memory display corresponding to the newly generated pending memory (sets a character holding a package as the display mode of the pending memory display).

[Step D309] The control unit sets pattern P1 or pattern P5 (a treasure chest containing a skull) as the contents of the package set in step D304, and ends the package setting process.

The above is the third embodiment. In this manner, the game machine 10 predicts the progress of the performance by giving advance notice in advance that the performance using the push button or the like will be performed in either the pending memory during digestion or the pending memory during standby. It is possible to maintain and improve the sense of expectation.

In the game machine 10, the reserved memory for making the item appear and the reserved memory for executing the performance predicted by the item are different from each other, so that the player cannot grasp the timing of the occurrence of the performance predicted by the item. According to this, the game machine 10 gives a sense of expectation that the foretold performance will be generated by the item even when the reserved memory that is consumed before the reserved memory for performing the foretold performance is consumed. can be done. That is, the gaming machine 10 can maintain and improve the sense of anticipation even for effects that are not subject to advance notice.

Furthermore, the game machine 10 can prevent oversight of the performance (forgetting to operate) and improve interest by giving advance notice of the start of the performance using the push button by the notice display 716.例文帳に追加

Note that the game machine 10 has been described as not accepting an input by pressing an item of the push button in the notice display 716, but the present invention is not limited to this. The game machine 10 may invalidate the input by pressing during the execution of the effect using the push button that is performed independently of the pseudo-continuous effect using the push button, and if the input by pressing is performed at other timings. As a reservation input, an input may be received before the start of the pseudo-continuous effect. As a result, the game machine 10 can prevent the user from missing the effect due to forgetting to press the button.

[Modification 1 of the third embodiment]
Next, the effects performed in Modification 1 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 and 92. FIG. 91 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to Modification 1 of Embodiment 3. FIG. 92 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by the display device according to Modification 1 of Embodiment 3. FIG.

A display screen 727 shown in FIG. 91(1) shows a display screen during symbol variation (during execution of the variation display game). On the display screen 727, the left pattern 709L, the middle pattern 709C, and the right pattern 709R fluctuate at high speed.

A display screen 728 shown in FIG. 91(2) is a display screen after the display screen 727, and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L temporarily stops. On the display screen 728, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L fluctuates at low speed. That is, the display screen 72
8 clearly indicates that the left symbol 709L is about to be temporarily stopped.

A display screen 729 shown in FIG. 91(3) is a display screen after the display screen 728, and shows a state in which the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 729, a middle pattern 709C and a right pattern 70
9R fluctuates at high speed, the left symbol 709L temporarily stops at "5", and the symbol swings.

A display screen 730 shown in FIG. 92(1) is a display screen after the display screen 729, and shows a state in which an effect is generated in the left symbol 709L.
On the display screen 730, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R are fluctuating at high speed. In addition, on the display screen 730, an image of a push button and an effect indicating the generation of the effect are displayed as the effect display 722 in a portion superimposed on the number (identifier) of the temporarily stopped left symbol 709L.

A display screen 731 shown in FIG. 92(2) is a display screen after the display screen 730, and shows a state in which an effect using the push buttons has started.
On the display screen 731, as the effect display 722, an image showing how the push button is pressed, a message "Press!!" It clearly indicates that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed.

The above is the effect performed in Modification 1 of the third embodiment. Generally, when symbols are temporarily stopped in a variable display game, the player sees (sees) the temporarily stopped drawing. Therefore, immediately after the game machine 10 is temporarily stopped, the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the numbers forming the temporarily stopped symbol, and the push button is used after an effect using the push button is performed. By starting the performance, the player can be made to more reliably recognize that the performance using the push button will start. As a result, the gaming machine 1
0 can prevent the player from overlooking the performance using the push buttons and improve the interest.

[Modification 2 of the third embodiment]
In the first modification of the third embodiment, after the temporary stop, the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the number of the temporarily stopped symbol (changed to the symbol that displays the push button), and the effect using the push button is performed. started. In Modification 2 of the third embodiment, the changing pattern is replaced with a pattern that displays a push button (for example, a pattern in which a push button is superimposed on the front side of the number), and the pattern that displays the push button is replaced. After the temporary stop, the performance using the push button is started.

Here, the effect performed in Modified Example 2 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 93 . FIG. 93 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to modification 2 of the third embodiment.

A display screen 732 shown in FIG. 93(1) is a display screen after the display screen 728 and shows a state immediately before the left symbol 709L temporarily stops. On the display screen 732, the middle symbol 709C and the right symbol 709R fluctuate at high speed, and the left symbol 709L fluctuates at low speed. In addition, on the display screen 732, the left symbol 709L (the left symbol 709L in which the push button image is replaced with the symbol representing the push button) is temporarily stopped (low speed display). fluctuating). That is, the display screen 732 clearly indicates that the left symbol 709L is about to be temporarily stopped while the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the numbers forming the symbol.

A display screen 733 shown in FIG. 93(2) is a display screen after the display screen 732, and shows a state in which the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped. On the display screen 733, the middle pattern 709C and the right pattern 70
9R fluctuates at high speed, and the left symbol 709L temporarily stops and swings in a state where the image of the push button is displayed on the front side of the numbers forming the symbol.

A display screen 734 shown in FIG. 93(3) is a display screen after the display screen 733, and shows a state in which an effect using the push buttons has started.
On the display screen 734, as the effect display 722, an image showing how the push button is pressed, a message "Press!!" It clearly indicates that (the effect of pressing the push button) is being executed.

The above is the effect performed in the modification 2 of the third embodiment. In general, in a variable display game, the player puts (visually sees) the drawing to be temporarily stopped. Therefore, the game machine 10 displays the image of the push button in front of the numbers forming the pattern to be temporarily stopped immediately before the temporary stop (low speed fluctuation state), and the image of the push button is displayed in front of the number forming the pattern. By temporarily stopping the game while the image is displayed, and starting the performance using the push button after notifying that the performance using the push button will be performed, the player can more reliably recognize that the performance using the push button will start. can be made As a result, the gaming machine 10 can prevent the player from overlooking the performance using the push buttons, thereby improving the interest.

[Modification 3 of the third embodiment]
94 to 97, the effect performed in the third modified example of the third embodiment will be described. FIG. 94 is a timing chart showing the flow of effects in modification 3 of the third embodiment. 95 is a diagram (part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to modification 3 of the third embodiment; FIG. 96 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to modification 3 of the third embodiment; FIG. 97 is a diagram (part 3) showing an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to modification 3 of the third embodiment; FIG.

First, the flow of presentation will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. The timing chart shown in FIG. 94 is an example of a pseudo-continuous effect executed by the gaming machine 10, and shows the flow of the effect when three pseudo-continuous effects are executed.

The gaming machine 10, as shown in FIG. 94, starts BGM (Background Music) at timing t10.
, the N-th variation display game is started using the music piece A. When the game machine 10 starts the N-th variable display game, the variable display effect (first pseudo-continuous game) is executed. An example of the display screen during the variable display effect (first pseudo-run) will be described with reference to the display screen 735 of FIG. 95(1) and the display screen 736 of FIG. 95(2).

A display screen 735 shown in FIG. 95(1) shows a display screen during a variable display effect (first pseudo-run). On the display screen 735, the left pattern 709L, the middle pattern 709C, and the right pattern 709R fluctuate at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 displays the B
GM is played at a predetermined volume.

A display screen 736 shown in FIG. 95(2) is a display screen after the display screen 735, and shows a display screen during the variable display effect (first pseudo run). On the display screen 736, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is about to be temporarily stopped at the symbol "7" (fluctuates at a low speed), and the middle symbol 709C fluctuates at a high speed. are doing. That is, the display screen 73
6 is trying to derive the reach state. Then, the game machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 736, and the second board effect device 705L,
By operating the 705R, the expectation of reach generation is increased and interest is improved.

When the gaming machine 10 enters a two-symbol temporary stop state in the variable display effect (first pseudo-run) at timing t11, the game machine 10 starts an effect (pseudo-continuation continuation effect) for informing the player whether or not to continue the pseudo-run. . At this time, the game machine 10 reduces the volume while reproducing the music A to mute (silent) the sound, and reproduces SE (Sound Effect) used for the pseudo-continuous effect.

In the pseudo-continuation performance, the gaming machine 10 notifies the player that the pseudo-continuation is to be continued when the pseudo-continuation is to be continued, and shifts to a state (fluctuation display state) in which the three symbols are changed at high speed. .
On the other hand, if the pseudo-run is not continued, the gaming machine 10 notifies that the pseudo-run will not be continued and transitions to a result derivation display or the like for deriving the result of the variable display game.

Display screen 73 of FIG. 95 (3) for screen display example during two-pattern temporary stop (pseudo-continuous effect)
7 will be used for explanation.
A display screen 737 shown in FIG. 95(3) is a display screen after the display screen 736, and shows a display screen during a two-symbol temporary stop (pseudo continuous effect). On the display screen 737, the left pattern 709L
is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol "6", and the middle symbol 709C is fluctuating at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 puts the BGM into a mute state in accordance with the pseudo continuous continuation effect being executed on the display screen 737, and plays SE instead of the BGM, thereby letting the player know that the effect is being generated and creating a sense of anticipation. We are trying to improve interest by giving

When the gaming machine 10 notifies the continuation of the pseudo-continuation at timing t12, the variable display effect (
2nd time). The game machine 10 stops the reproduction of the SE and turns off the music A (BGM).
start (return to) the volume at a predetermined volume. 96(1) display screen 739, FIG. 96(2), and FIG.
6(3) will be described using the display screen 740. FIG.

A display screen 738 shown in FIG. 96(1) is a display screen after the display screen 737, and shows a display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-run). On the display screen 738, a character like a tiger and a message "The game is about to begin!" clearly stated. In addition, the gaming machine 10, along with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 738, the second board effect device 70
By activating 5L and 705R and giving changes to the production, we are trying to improve the interest. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE being reproduced on the display screen 737 and turns off the sound of B
GM is played at a predetermined volume.

A display screen 739 shown in FIG. 96(2) is a display screen after the display screen 738, and shows a display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-run). On the display screen 739, the left pattern 709L,
The middle pattern 709C and the right pattern 709R are fluctuating at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 739 .

A display screen 740 shown in FIG. 96(3) is a display screen after the display screen 739, and shows a display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-run). On the display screen 740, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", the right symbol 709R is about to be temporarily stopped at the symbol "7" (fluctuates at a low speed), and the middle symbol 709C fluctuates at a high speed. are doing. That is, the display screen 74
0 is trying to derive the reach state. Then, the gaming machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in accordance with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 740, and the second board effect device 705L,
By operating the 705R, the expectation of reach generation is increased and interest is improved.

The gaming machine 10 starts the pseudo-continuous continuous effect when the two-symbol temporary stop state occurs in the variable display effect (second pseudo-continuous) at timing t13. At this time, the game machine 10 displays the music A (BGM)
, the sound volume is lowered to mute (silent), and the SE used for the pseudo continuous effect is reproduced. Display screen 74 of FIG. 97 (1) for screen display example during two-pattern temporary stop (pseudo-continuous effect)
1 will be used for explanation.

A display screen 741 shown in FIG. 97(1) is a display screen after the display screen 740, and shows a display screen during a two-symbol temporary stop (pseudo continuous effect).
On the display screen 741, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol "7", and the right symbol 709L is temporarily stopped.
The R is temporarily stopped at the "6" symbol, and the middle symbol 709C is fluctuating at high speed. Then, the gaming machine 10 turns off the BGM in accordance with the pseudo-continuous continuation effect being executed on the display screen 741, and turns off the BGM.
By playing SE instead of the GM, it is possible to let the viewer know that the production is in progress, to give them a sense of anticipation, and to improve their interest.

When the game machine 10 notifies the continuation of the pseudo-continuation at timing t14, the variable display effect (
3rd time). The game machine 10 stops the reproduction of the SE and turns off the music A (BGM).
start playing the volume at a predetermined volume (reset). An example of the display screen during the variable display effect (third pseudo-run) will be described with reference to the display screen 742 in FIG. 97(2) and the display screen 743 in FIG. 97(3).

A display screen 742 shown in FIG. 97(2) is a display screen after the display screen 741, and shows a display screen during the variable display effect (third pseudo-run). On the display screen 742, as the effect display 722, a tiger-like character and the message "I'll decide next time!" is specified. again,
The gaming machine 10 displays the second board effect device 705 along with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 742 .
By operating L, 705R and giving changes to the production, we are trying to improve the interest. Then, the gaming machine 10 stops the SE being reproduced on the display screen 741 and turns off the BG which has been muted.
M is played at a predetermined volume.

A display screen 743 shown in FIG. 97(3) is a display screen after the display screen 742, and shows a display screen during the variable display effect (second pseudo-run). On the display screen 743, the left pattern 709L,
The middle pattern 709C and the right pattern 709R are fluctuating at high speed. Then, the game machine 10 plays BGM at a predetermined volume in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed on the display screen 743 .

The gaming machine 10 executes the variable display effect (third time) until timing t15, derives the result of the variable display game (result derivation display), and executes the N-th special figure variable display game when the result is displayed for a predetermined time. finish.

The above is the flow of presentation in the third modification of the third embodiment. In this way, the gaming machine 10
In the case of preventing SE and BGM from being mixed when reproducing SE, BGM is not stopped but BGM is muted. As a result, the gaming machine 10
When the volume of the BGM is increased after the reproduction of E is finished, the BGM can be heard from the reproduction position after the reproduction time of SE has elapsed. By making it possible to listen to the BGM from the playback position where the playback time of the SE is desired to pass in this way, the game machine 10 prevents the BGM from sounding choppy, suppresses the sense of discomfort felt by the player, and improves interest. can.

[Modification 4 of Third Embodiment]
Next, Modification 4 of the third embodiment will be described. First, the decorative pattern used in Modification 4 of the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing an example of a decorative design in modification 4 of the third embodiment.

The gaming machine 10 uses a decorative pattern A and a decorative pattern B as decorative patterns used for each pattern of the large pattern group 709 . Decorative design A is a decorative design that is mainly used, and decorative design B is a decorative design that is used as a secondary (decorative design that is used only in a specific case). More specifically, in the gaming machine 10, the decorative pattern B is used only when a big hit is derived in a special figure variation display game (special figure 2 variation display game) generated by winning a special figure 2 start port. It is a design that can be used.

The decorative pattern A includes patterns 744,745,746,747,748,749,750. The patterns 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, and 750 can be distinguished from other patterns by different display modes.

The pattern 744 is a pattern that displays the number "1", which is composed of numeric elements (identifiers) that are identifiable as a pattern by the number "1". The pattern 745 is a pattern that displays the number "2", which is composed of numeral elements that are identifiable as a pattern by the number "2". The pattern 746 is a pattern that displays the number "3", which is composed of numerical elements that are identifiable as a pattern by the number "3". The pattern 747 is a pattern that displays the number "4", which is composed of numeral elements that are identifiable as a pattern by the number "4". The pattern 748 is a pattern that displays the number "5", which is composed of numeral elements that are identifiable as a pattern by the number "5". Design 74
9 is a pattern that displays the number "6", which is composed of numeral elements having identifiability as a pattern with the number "6". The pattern 750 is a pattern that displays the number "7", which is composed of numeral elements having identifiability as a pattern with the number "7".

Decorative design B is a design that has the same distinguishing power as the numerical elements in decorative design A. For example, the numerical elements in decorative design A have a character element (
value conversion identifier) (a form in which character elements are added to the pattern 750). That is, in the gaming machine 10, the jackpot derived from the decorative symbol B (symbol 751) is relatively more valuable than the jackpot derived from the decorative symbol A (symbol 750).

Decorative pattern B includes a pattern 751 . The symbol 751 is a numerical element (identifier) that is identifiable as a symbol by the number "7", and a character element that indicates that the value is higher than the symbol 750 consisting of only the numerical element of the number "7" by the character "pole". It is a pattern composed of

Next, it will be explained with reference to FIG. 99 how the decorative symbols A and B are used in the game. FIG. 99 is a diagram showing symbols used in the game state in Modification 4 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 99, in the gaming machine 10, the symbols used in the special figure variation display game (special figure 1 variation display game) generated by winning the special figure 1 starter and the special figure 2 variation display game are different. ing.

In the gaming machine 10, decorative symbols A are used as symbols used during variation and temporary stop of the special figure 1 variable display game. That is, the gaming machine 10, in the special figure 1 variable display game, the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the symbols 744, 745, 744, 745, 744, 745 in the middle symbol 709C
By displaying 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in order, high-speed fluctuation is performed,
Left design 709L, right design 709R, middle design 709C, design 744, 745, 746, 74
7, 748, 749, 750 is temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop state is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, decorative symbols A are used as symbols used while the special figure 1 variable display game is stopped. That is, the gaming machine 10 is the left symbol 7 in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game
09L, right design 709R, middle design 709C, design 744, 745, 746, 747, 74
Stop any of 8,749,750 and display the derivation result.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used during the variation and temporary stop of the special figure 2 variable display game are composed of decorative symbols A. That is, the gaming machine 10, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the left pattern 709L, the right pattern 709R, the middle pattern 709C, the patterns 744, 745, 746
, 747, 748, 749, 750 are displayed in order to perform high-speed fluctuation, and patterns 744, 745, 746, 747, 7 are displayed on the left pattern 709L, the right pattern 709R, and the middle pattern 709C.
48, 749, 750 is temporarily stopped, and the temporary stop state is displayed.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used while the special figure 2 variable display game is stopped are composed of decorative symbols A and B. That is, the gaming machine 10, in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the left pattern 709L, the right pattern 709R, the middle pattern 709C, the patterns 744, 745, 74
6, 747, 748, 749, 750, 751 is stopped and the derivation result is displayed.

More specifically, when the gaming machine 10 derives the jackpot consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variation display game, the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, the middle symbol 709C and the symbol 744,
By displaying 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 in order, high-speed fluctuation is performed, and patterns 744, 745, 74 are displayed on the left pattern 709L, the right pattern 709R, and the middle pattern 709C.
6, 747, 748, 749, and 750 are temporarily stopped, and then left symbol 709L, right symbol 709R and middle symbol 709C are stopped.

On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, in other cases (when not deriving the jackpot consisting of the pattern 751), patterns 744, 745, and 746 are provided in the left pattern 709L, the right pattern 709R, and the middle pattern 709C.
, 747, 748, 749, 750 are displayed in order to perform high-speed fluctuation, and patterns 744, 745, 746, 747, 7 are displayed on the left pattern 709L, the right pattern 709R, and the middle pattern 709C.
48, 749, 750 are temporarily stopped, left symbol 709L, right symbol 709R,
Any one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749 and 750 is stopped on the middle symbol 709C, and the derivation result is displayed.

In addition, hereinafter, in the gaming machine 10, in the special figure 2 variation display game, instead of the big win of the symbol 750, the big win of the symbol 751 is derived. That is, game machine 1
At 0, it is assumed that a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 does not occur in the special figure 2 variable display game.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative pattern A (symbols without character elements) during fluctuation and while stopped, and decorates only when the special figure 2 fluctuation display game uses the pattern 751 to derive a big hit. By using a pattern B (a pattern with a character element attached), it is possible to easily grasp that the jackpot consisting of the pattern 751 is a special jackpot (a jackpot with a high value), improve the degree of understanding of the game, and improve interest. can be done.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, since the decorative pattern A used during fluctuation and stop is used even in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the images used during fluctuation and stop are displayed in the special figure 1 fluctuation display game. It can be used in common with the video in the video, etc., and it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity and the time and effort involved in preparing the video.

Next, a case of deriving a jackpot consisting of symbols 750 in the special figure 1 variation display game and a case of deriving a jackpot consisting of symbols 751 in the special figure 2 variation display game will be described with reference to FIG. Figure 100 is a special figure 1 variation display game in the fourth modification of the third embodiment "
It is a diagram showing a comparison between the case of deriving "777" and the case of deriving "777" in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.

First, the case of deriving a big hit consisting of symbols 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game will be described. In the gaming machine 10, the batch display device is "●●●〇●〇〇●" in the special figure 1 variable display game.
is derived, a big hit consisting of the symbol 750 is derived. When the game machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbols 750, the game machine 10 gives "4R" as a privilege to the player. After temporarily stopping the symbols 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the gaming machine 10 stops the symbols 750 on the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C. Derive a jackpot.

Next, the case of deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game will be described. In the gaming machine 10, the batch display device is "●●●〇●〇〇●" in the special figure 2 variable display game.
is derived, a big hit consisting of the pattern 751 is derived. When the game machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbol 751, it provides the player with "16R" as a privilege (symbol 751).
a higher value than the jackpot of "777" consisting of 0). The game machine 10 has a left pattern 70
9L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, after temporarily stopping the symbol 750, the left symbol 7
09L, the right symbol 709R, and the symbol 750 temporarily stopped on the middle symbol 709C are symbol 751.
, a big hit consisting of the pattern 751 is derived.

In this way, in the gaming machine 10, when different values (rounds) are given with symbols displaying the same identifier, the symbols of the same mode are used in the temporary stop mode (result derivation process), and only when the result is derived. Designs of different modes displaying the same identifier (design 750, design 75
By using 1), it is possible to easily grasp that the value of the jackpot made up of the respective symbols is different, improve the degree of understanding of the game, and improve interest.

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, the value of the jackpot consisting of symbols with the number "7" is changed according to the type of the variable display game being executed (the special figure 1 variable display game or the special figure 2 variable display game). Therefore, it is possible to share the jackpot lighting pattern (“●●●〇●〇〇●”) consisting of symbols with the number “7” that gives different values in the collective display device.

Next, with reference to FIG. 101, a description will be given of the flow of effects when deriving a big hit consisting of symbols 750 in the special figure 1 variable display game. 101 is a diagram (Part 1) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to Modification 4 of Embodiment 3. FIG.

The display screen 752 shown in FIG. 101 (1) is a display screen during the stop of symbol variation (while the variation display game is stopped), and shows the state before the special figure 1 variation display game is started. Display screen 752
Then, the left symbol 709L stops at "7", the middle symbol 709C at "3", and the right symbol 709R at "7". On the display screen 752, the special figure 1 reserved number display 711 indicates "3", the special figure 2 reserved number display 712 indicates "0", and there is only a reserved memory that triggers the start of the special figure 1 variable display game. , clearly indicates that the special figure 1 variable display game will be performed at the time of digestion of the next reserved memory.

A display screen 753 shown in FIG. 101 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 752, and shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable display game has been started.
On the display screen 753, the left pattern 709L, the middle pattern 709C, and the right pattern 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 753, the special figure 1 pending number display 711 displaying "3" on the display screen 752 is displaying "2", and the variation display game being executed is the special figure 1 variation display game. It is shown that.

A display screen 754 shown in FIG. 101 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 753, and shows a state in which three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special figure 1 variable display game.
On the display screen 754, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at symbol 750 ("7"), the middle symbol 709C is symbol 750 ("7"), and the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at symbol 750 ("7"), leading to a big hit. It shows the situation just before

A display screen 755 shown in FIG. 101 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 754, and shows a state in which three symbols are stopped in the special figure 1 variable display game.
On the display screen 755, the left symbol 709L is stopped at the symbol 750 ("7"), the middle symbol 709C is stopped at the symbol 750 ("7"), and the right symbol 709R is stopped at the symbol 750 ("7").
A jackpot consisting of is derived.

Next, with reference to FIG. 102, a description will be given of the flow of effects when deriving a big hit consisting of the symbol 751 in the special figure 2 variable display game. 102 is a diagram (part 2) illustrating an example of a display screen displayed by a display device according to modification 4 of the third embodiment; FIG.

The display screen 756 shown in FIG. 102 (1) is a display screen while the symbol variation is stopped (during the variation display game is stopped), and shows the state before the special figure 2 variation display game is started. display screen 756
Then, the left symbol 709L stops at "7", the middle symbol 709C at "3", and the right symbol 709R at "7". On the display screen 756, the special figure 1 reserved number display 711 indicates "0", the special figure 2 reserved number display 712 indicates "3", and there is only a reserved memory that triggers the start of the special figure 2 variable display game. , clearly indicates that the special figure 2 variable display game will be performed at the time of digestion of the next reserved memory.

A display screen 757 shown in FIG. 102 (2) is a display screen after the display screen 756, and shows a state in which the special figure 2 fluctuation display game has been started.
On the display screen 757, the left pattern 709L, the middle pattern 709C, and the right pattern 709R fluctuate at high speed. On the display screen 757, the special figure 2 pending number display 712 displaying "3" on the display screen 756 is displaying "2", and the variation display game being executed is the special figure 2 variation display game. It is shown that.

A display screen 758 shown in FIG. 102 (3) is a display screen after the display screen 757, and shows a state in which three symbols are temporarily stopped in the special figure 2 fluctuation display game.
On the display screen 758, the left symbol 709L is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 ("7"), the middle symbol 709C is at the symbol 750 ("7"), and the right symbol 709R is temporarily stopped at the symbol 750 ("7"), leading to a big hit. It shows the situation just before In addition, while the display screen 758 is being displayed, the gaming machine 10 operates the second board effect devices 705L and 705R to change the effect, thereby arousing the expectation of further changes and increasing interest. there is

A display screen 759 shown in FIG. 102 (4) is a display screen after the display screen 758, and shows a state in which three symbols are stopped in the special figure 2 variable display game.
On the display screen 759, the left pattern 709L is replaced with the pattern 750 by the pattern 751, the middle pattern 709C is replaced by the pattern 750 by the pattern 751, and the right pattern 709R is replaced by the pattern 750 by the pattern 751. , and symbols 751 are derived.

The above is Modification 4 of the third embodiment. In addition, the decorative pattern B is a pattern that is used only when deriving a big hit in the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure 2 fluctuation display game) generated by winning the special figure 2 start port. do not have. For example, the gaming machine 10, the decorative symbol A (
The decorative pattern B (pattern 751) may be used instead of the pattern 750).

In addition, in the gaming machine 10, it has been described that the big hit consisting of the symbol 750 does not occur in the special figure 2 variation display game, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, the gaming machine 10 can be configured to be able to derive not only the jackpot consisting of the pattern 751 but also the jackpot consisting of the pattern 750 in the special figure 2 variable display game.

[Modification 5 of Third Embodiment]
Next, Modification 5 of the third embodiment will be described. In the modification 4 of the third embodiment, in the special figure 1 variable display game, a low-value jackpot consisting of symbols 750 can be generated, and the special figure 2
In the variable display game, an embodiment has been described in which a high-value jackpot consisting of symbols 751 can be generated. In modification 5 of the third embodiment, when it is possible to generate a jackpot consisting of low-value symbols 750 and a jackpot consisting of high-value symbols 751 in each of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. will be explained.

First, the symbols used in the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game will be described. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing symbols used in the game state in Modification 5 of the third embodiment.

As shown in FIG. 103, the gaming machine 10 uses the same symbols in the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game.
In the gaming machine 10, decorative symbols A are used as symbols used during variation and temporary stop of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game. In other words, the gaming machine 10 has patterns 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, and 74 in the left pattern 709L, the right pattern 709R, and the middle pattern 709C in the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game.
By displaying 9,750 in order, high-speed fluctuation is performed, left symbol 709L, right symbol 709
Any one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749 and 750 is temporarily stopped on the R and middle symbol 709C to display the temporary stop state.

In the gaming machine 10, the symbols used while the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game are stopped are composed of decorative symbols A and B. That is, the gaming machine 10
In the special figure 2 variable display game, the left pattern 709L, the right pattern 709R, and the middle pattern 709C
, one of the patterns 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750, 751 is stopped, and the derivation result is displayed.

More specifically, when the gaming machine 10 derives a jackpot consisting of the symbol 751, the left symbol 7
09L, right design 709R, middle design 709C, design 744, 745, 746, 747, 74
8, 749, and 750 are displayed in order to perform high-speed fluctuation, and patterns 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749 and
750 is temporarily stopped, left symbol 709L, right symbol 709R, middle symbol 709C.
to stop the pattern 751.
On the other hand, in the gaming machine 10, in other cases (when not deriving the jackpot consisting of the pattern 751), patterns 744, 745, 746, 744, 745, 746, 744, 745, 746, 744, 745, 746, 744, 746, 744, 746, 744, 746, 746, 744, 746, 744, 746, 744, 746, 746, 746, 746, 746, 746
By displaying 747, 748, 749, 750 in order, high-speed fluctuation is performed, and left symbol 7
09L, right design 709R, middle design 709C, design 744, 745, 746, 747, 74
8, 749, 750 are temporarily stopped, and then any one of the symbols 744, 745, 746, 747, 748, 749, 750 is stopped in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, and the derived result is obtained. display.

Next, a case of deriving a big win of symbols 750 and a case of deriving a big win of symbols 751 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing a comparison of two jackpots in modification 5 of the third embodiment.

First, the big hit consisting of the symbols 750 derived in the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game will be described. When the game machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbols 750, the game machine 10 gives "4R" as a privilege to the player. After temporarily stopping the symbols 750 in the left symbol 709L, the right symbol 709R, and the middle symbol 709C, the gaming machine 10 moves the left symbol 709L,
By stopping the symbols 750 on the right symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C, a big hit consisting of the symbols 750 is derived.

Next, the big hit consisting of the symbol 751 derived in the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game will be described. When the game machine 10 derives a big hit consisting of the symbols 751, the game machine 10 gives "16R" as a privilege to the player. The gaming machine 10 has a left symbol 709L,
After temporarily stopping the symbol 750 on the right symbol 709R and the middle symbol 709C, the left symbol 709L
, the right pattern 709R, and the middle pattern 709C are replaced with the patterns 751 to derive a big hit consisting of the patterns 751. - 特許庁

The above is modification 5 of the third embodiment. In this way, the gaming machine 10 is in a state where the symbol 750 is temporarily stopped in each of the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game ("
777" is suggested), a jackpot consisting of a low-value pattern 750 and a jackpot consisting of a high-value pattern 751 can be generated, thereby suppressing an increase in the capacity of a video image, etc. You can increase the variation of the jackpot. In addition, the gaming machine 10 can maintain the player's interest in the performance until the final stage of the performance (even after the temporary stop).

In addition, the game machine 10 uses the decorative pattern B (the pattern with the character element) only when it stops when deriving the big win, so that the big win consisting of the pattern 751 is a special big win (high-value big win). can be easily grasped, the degree of understanding of the game can be enhanced, and interest can be improved.

[Modification 6 of the third embodiment]
Next, Modification 6 of the third embodiment will be described. In modifications 4 and 5 of the third embodiment, an embodiment has been described in which decorative patterns composed only of numerical elements are used during fluctuation and temporary stop. Modification 6 of the third embodiment will explain a case where patterns including numeric elements, character elements and the like are used. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the transition of the pattern mode of decorative symbols in the variable display game of Modification 6 of the third embodiment. Here, description will be made using a symbol representing "7" as a representative.

As shown in FIG. 105, the gaming machine 10, when the symbols are stopped (before the fluctuation starts), the left symbol 7
Character pattern 760 (decorative pattern C) is used as 09L, middle pattern 709C, and right pattern 709R. The decorative pattern C consists of a character element that is identifiable as a design by a character (for example, a tiger-like character in a design that displays the number "7") and a number element that is identifiable as a design by a number. It is a pattern that includes.

When the game machine 10 starts to change the symbols, the left symbol 709L, the middle symbol 709C, and the right symbol 70 are displayed.
The pattern used as 9R is changed from the character pattern 760 (decorative pattern C) to the character pattern 761 (decorative pattern D). The decorative pattern D has a base (fan) that is identifiable as a pattern by a pattern (for example, a pattern of a tiger-like character in a pattern that displays the number "7"), and is identifiable as a pattern by a number. It is a pattern configured including numeric elements.

Then, the game machine 10 displays the temporary stop state using the character pattern 761 (decorative pattern D) as the left pattern 709L, the middle pattern 709C, and the right pattern 709R. Depending on the result, left design 709L, middle design 709C, right design 709R
The pattern used as is changed from the decorative pattern D to the decorative pattern C, the decorative pattern A or the decorative pattern B.

Specifically, the gaming machine 10, when deriving a loss,
, the pattern is changed from the decorative pattern D to the decorative pattern C as the right pattern 709R, and a big hit (for example, 4
R), the left pattern 709L, the middle pattern 709C, and the right pattern 709R are used to change the pattern from the decorative pattern D to the decorative pattern A; The pattern is changed from the decorative pattern D to the decorative pattern B as the middle pattern 709C and the right pattern 709R.

According to this, since the gaming machine 10 uses the decorative symbols A and the decorative symbols B only when the game machine 10 is stopped when deriving a big win, the derivation result can be grasped by the pattern mode of the stop symbols, and the degree of understanding of the game can be improved. You can raise it and improve your interest.

In addition, the game machine 10 starts from a state in which the character pattern 761 (decorative pattern D) is temporarily stopped in a jackpot mode (when confirmation of a jackpot is suggested), and from a jackpot consisting of a low-value pattern 750 and a high-value pattern 751. By making it possible to generate more jackpots, it is possible to increase the variation of jackpots while suppressing an increase in the capacity of video and the like. In addition, the gaming machine 10 continues until the final stage of the production (
It is possible to maintain the player's interest in the performance even after the temporary stop.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described third embodiment (including modified examples 1 to 6) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and operation means (push buttons 25).
and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variation display game). The operation means can receive a predetermined operation. The control means controls the second operation effect (display If an effect display 722) on the screen 721 is made executable and an operation of the operation means is accepted while the reservation effect and the second operation effect are being executed, the second operation effect is given priority among the first operation effect and the second operation effect. and run.

(2) When the control means of (1) accepts an operation of the operation means at a timing when the reserved effect is being executed and the second operation effect is not being executed, the received operation is the operation after the first operation effect is started. Accept as a reservation operation.

(3) The control means of (1) changes the mode of the reservation effect during execution of the reservation effect and the second operation effect.
(4) The display means of (1) displays a pending memory indicating the right to execute the game, and the control means
When there is a game in which the reserved first operation effect is performed in the reserved memory, the reservation effect is used to display on the display means that the first operation effect will be performed in one of the games in the reserved memory (display). screen 719).

(5) The control means of (4) performs the reserved effect using the reserved memory for executing the game prior to the reserved memory for executing the game in which the first operation effect is performed.
(6) The control means of (5) changes the display mode of the reserved memory that executes the game first in the reservation effect (display screen 719), so that the first operation effect can be performed in any of the games in the reserved memory. Cause the display means to display what is to be done.

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41) and operation means (push buttons 25).
and control means (game control device 100, effect control device 300). The display means displays a game (variation display game). The operation means can receive a predetermined operation. The control means controls identification information (left symbol 709L, middle symbol 709C, right symbol 709R) in the game.
is variably displayed, and after the identification information is variably displayed, an operation effect involving an operation by the operation means is displayed on the display means, after the display mode indicating the operation means is displayed at the position corresponding to the identification information, the operation effect control to start

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41), control means (game control device 100,
Production control device 300) and. The display means displays a game (variation display game).
When BGM is played in a game, the control means sets the volume of the BGM to a mute state during the output of the sound effect, and reduces the volume of the BGM after the output of the sound effect is finished. Perform control to return from the mute state.

(9) The gaming machine 10 includes display means (display device 41), control means (game control device 100,
Production control device 300) and. The display means displays a game (variation display game).
The control means variably displays the first identification information (decorative pattern A) corresponding to the first value (4R jackpot) in the process of deriving the game result (at the time of fluctuation/temporary stop), and at the time of deriving the game result ( A second value greater than the first value (16
A conversion identifier (character element) to be converted into R jackpot) is added, and the second identification information (decorative pattern B) corresponding to the second value is displayed on the display means.

[Fourth embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 106 and 107. FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of a display screen according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 107 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a display screen according to the fourth embodiment. Here, the display screen is a screen consisting of one or a plurality of images displayed in the display area of the display device 41, and in principle different reference numerals are assigned to different display contents.

A display screen 800 shown in FIG. 106(1) is a display screen during symbol stop, similarly to the display screen 500 shown in FIG. . The display screen 800 includes, as display elements, a large pattern group 801, a small pattern group 802,
Special figure 1 reservation number display 803, special figure 2 reservation number display 804, reservation display 805, and reservation digestion display 806 are displayed. Details of each of these display elements are the same as those of the display screen 500 shown in FIG. After the display screen 800 is displayed, the gaming machine 10 starts the next variable display.

A display screen 810 shown in FIG. 106(2) is a display screen after the start of the variable display. A display screen 810 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 800 (a screen displayed later in terms of time), and shows a screen during variable display (during three-symbol variation). Details of this display screen 810 are the same as those of the display screen 510 shown in FIG.

A display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3) is, like the display screen 511 shown in FIG. 63(3), a display screen when the ready-to-win effect is generated after the start of the variable display. A display screen 811 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 810, and shows a screen during reach variation displaying "3" on the right and left symbols. In this display screen 811, unlike the display screen 511 described above, due to the occurrence of the start winning of the new special figure 1 during the variable display, the special figure 1 pending number display 803 shows that the number of pending memories of the special figure 1 game is "4".
, and the pending display 805 indicates that the pending storage number is "4".

In addition, during the change from the display screen 810 to the display screen 811, for example, the aforementioned overflow switch signal is output. 807 is displayed. In addition, if an error including the opening of the glass frame (including abnormalities and fraud detected by the sensors and switches described above) occurs,
The game control device 100 uses the effect command setting process provided in various parts of the program of the game control device 100 described above to convert the error information as a command (specifically, a single-shot command) in the same way as other information and commands. It is transmitted to the production control device 300 as an error/illegal command). Then, the effect control device 300 receives and analyzes the command from the game control device 100 in the above-mentioned steps D22, 23, 27, etc., and operates according to the command (if it is error related, the corresponding error display and error notification including output of error notification sound). In addition, there may be an error in which the effect control device 300 independently determines the occurrence of an error and notifies the error. As one of the error notifications realized by the effect control device 300 in this manner, an error notification image 807 is also displayed.

The error notification image 807 is, for example, an image containing characters such as "please remove the ball". automatically (with high display priority). That is, the error notification image 8
07 is displayed on the front side of the large pattern group 801 so as to partially hide the large pattern group 801, and on this display screen 811, the entire error notification image 807 can be seen by an observer (a player, an amusement store clerk, etc.). ) is visible.

Concealing means to cover up, but is not limited to a mode in which an image on the far side (an image with a relatively low display priority) is completely invisible, and a mode in which an image on the far side is made difficult to see. may be included. For example, the error notification image 807 is displayed semi-transparently, and the error notification image 80
The image on the far side where the display position overlaps with 7 (in this case, part of the large pattern group 801) may also be faintly seen through. Also, the error notification image 807 may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with other images such as the large pattern group 801. In this case, the relationship (relationship of display priority) with other images that do not overlap is naturally limited. not. In any case, the error notification image 807 is basically displayed so that the visibility of the entire image is ensured, except when a specific effect, which will be described later, is performed.

Also, as an error notification for displaying an error notification image, the case of bottom tray overflow has been taken as an example, but various other errors (including abnormalities and illegalities) are also displayed in the same manner.
For example, in a state in which a game ball should be hit to the left side of the game area, and the opposite state (a kind of abnormality) is detected in which the game ball is hit to the left, the Display of the notification image to be performed is also included.

A display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106(4) is a display screen for a cut-in effect during a ready-to-win effect. A display screen 812 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 811, and shows a screen during reach variation displaying "3" on the right and left symbols. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with a cut-in display 813 (cut-in production) for the variable display during the ready-to-win production. This display screen 812
Then, the large pattern group 801 should not overlap the cut-in display 813 as much as possible.
01 is displayed relatively small at the upper left corner position.

The cut-in display 813 of this specific example is an image group composed of a rocket-like character 814, a character 815 riding a rocket (a tiger-like character), and a background, and produces a predetermined degree of expectation. The effect of displaying this cut-in display 813 is the effect of a strong notice (a notice with a relatively high expectation of a big hit) that is given priority over an error display (at least an error display that notifies a weak error with a low degree of importance). It is an example of specific production). In the case of this specific example of the cut-in display 813, a large rocket-like character 814 appears in a dark background image displayed so as to cover a wide range of the screen (the display area of the display device 41). The display of a character 815 (a tiger-like character) on a rocket suggests to the player that the expectation of a big win is particularly high. In this case, the appearance of a large rocket-like character 814 alone raises expectations, and if the character 815 (a tiger-like character) rides on the rocket, the expectation can be further increased. good.

In the present embodiment, the image displayed in the above-described strong notice effect (specific effect) is prioritized (display priority is set to high). That is, a cut-in display 813 (character 81
4, characters 815, and their background images) are displayed in front of the error notification image 807 so as to hide part or all of the error notification image 807, and this display screen 8
In example 12, the entire cut-in display 813 can be visually recognized by an observer (a player, an amusement store clerk, etc.).

Concealing means to hide, but as described above, the image on the far side (image with relatively low display priority) is not limited to being completely invisible, and the image on the far side is hidden. A mode that makes it difficult to see may be included. For example, the cut-in display 813 is displayed semi-transparently (preferably with low transparency), and an image on the far side where the display position overlaps with the cut-in display 813 (in this case, part of the error notification image 807, etc.). It may also be in a state where it can be seen thinly and transparently.

Then, the gaming machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 on the display screens 811 and 812, and outputs a corresponding error notification sound (display screen 812 in FIG. 107 described later).
a, 812b, 812c). For example, a voice (error notification sound) saying "please remove the ball" is output from the speakers 19a and 19b (sound output means). This error notification sound is
This is performed with priority over sound output for effects such as BGM output in conjunction with the variable display effect being executed (including the advance notice effect such as the cut-in display 813). Specifically, the volume of the error notification sound (or, for example, a parameter that affects the audibility of the sound, such as the directivity of the sound) is made larger than the output of the sound for production, or the sound for production is increased while the error notification sound is being output. Stop output.

Here, the effect by the cut-in display 813 corresponds to a first effect that takes precedence over error notification (display for error notification (that is, error display), sound output for error notification, etc.).
On the other hand, the effect by sound output for effect such as BGM corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

As in the present embodiment, if the image displayed in the strong notice effect (specific effect) (the image forming the first effect) is displayed preferentially over the error display, even if an error occurs To amuse a player and realize high amusement of the game. In other words, by giving priority to the display on the near side rather than the error display, it is possible to give a strong impression to the player and improve the interest in the occurrence of the error.
As in the past, in the case of a configuration in which error display always takes precedence over strong notice, the error display makes it impossible for the player to visually recognize at least a part of the display even if the effect is strong notice. However, this embodiment solves this problem. In particular, an image (the image that the player pays the most attention to, the main display of the strong notice) such as the character 814 and the character 815 described above, which greatly changes the degree of expectation depending on whether or not they appear, becomes invisible due to the error display (especially the weak error). If this happens, the interest in the game will be greatly reduced, but this embodiment avoids such a problem.

Also, in this embodiment, even if the error display is hidden by the strong notice, the error notification sound has priority over the sound output for production (sound output for the second production). A player or the like can easily notice that an error has occurred, can appropriately perform an operation to correct the error state, and can ensure the reliability of the error notification.

It should be noted that the display priority order of the images (when the display positions overlap, the order of whether they are displayed so as to be on the front side or to be displayed so as to be on the back side) can be determined, for example, by the effect display editing described above. It can be set by the order of the editing process in the process (step D23). As one aspect, the image data that is edited earlier and pasted (written) to the virtual drawing space (frame buffer) earlier in the effect display editing process (step D23) has a lower display priority and is displayed further back. In this case, the editing process may be performed in order from the image data with the lowest display priority.

Next, display screens 812a, 812b, shown in FIGS. 107(1), (2), and (3) respectively.
812c is another specific example of a screen displayed after the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3) is displayed instead of the display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106(4).

In the display screen 812a shown in FIG. 107(1), among the images forming the cut-in display 813, the background image is displayed as an auxiliary display behind the error display image (that is, the error notification image 807). In this example, only the images of characters 814 and 815 are given priority over the error notification image 807 and displayed on the front side. In this way, the image that conceals the error notification image is a part of the image displayed in the specific effect (for example, the effect of strong notice) main display) only. In addition, on the display screen 812a, for example, the character 814 may also be displayed on the back side of the error notification image 807 as an auxiliary display, and only the character 815 may be displayed on the front side of the error notification image 807 as a main display. As a result, while ensuring the visibility of the error display to some extent, it is possible to realize a high interest by the specific effect (for example, the effect of strong notice).

Here, in the cut-in display 813, the character 815 or the like displayed in front of the error notification image 807 corresponds to the first effect that gives priority to the error notification. On the other hand, the background image displayed behind the error notification image 807 in the cut-in display 813 corresponds to a second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

On the display screen 812b shown in FIG. 107(2), instead of the cut-in display 813, a plurality of small rocket-like characters 814a are displayed as a production of a weak notice (a notice with a lower expectation of a big hit than a strong notice). there is This small rocket-like character 814 a is displayed behind the error notification image 807 and does not hide the error notification image 807 . In this way, regarding the effect of the weak notice, it may be possible to give priority to the error display. As a result, the visibility of the error display can always be maintained at a good level even if the advance notice is generated for the effect of the weak notice. Here, the effect of weak notice by the character 814a displayed on the far side of the error notification image 807 corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

When the display effect is inferior to the error notification (when the error display is prioritized over the display effect) like the effect of the weak notice shown in FIG. may be prioritized over the sound output for (particularly weak error notification sound). For example, FIG. 107(2) shows a mode of outputting an error notification sound "Please remove the ball". Please pull out the ball." is temporarily lowered or set to zero, and the sound output (BGM, BGM,
A sound effect (for example, a sound such as "Rocket swarm launch!") may be performed preferentially (for example, at a louder volume than the error notification sound).

As a result, even if part of the presentation presentation of the announcement is hidden by the error display, the sound output for presentation of the announcement is preferentially performed, thereby maintaining the effect and interest of the presentation. In this case, the effect by sound output for effect corresponds to the first effect that takes precedence over the error notification. On the other hand, the display effect by the character 814a corresponds to the second effect that is inferior to the error notification.

A display screen 812c shown in FIG. 107(3) is displayed when the error notification image 807 whose display is started on the display screen 811 shown in FIG. , a specific example of a display screen after the display screen 811. FIG. A strong error is, for example, an illegal error detected by the board radio wave sensor 62 or the magnetic sensor 61 described above.
On the display screen 812c, the error notification image 807, which is the error display of the strong error, is prioritized over the cut-in display 813, which is the effect display of the strong notice, and the error notification image 807 is positioned closer to the viewer than the cut-in display 813. it's shown. In this way, the error notification image to be hidden by the specific effect may be limited to weak errors only. As a result, the visibility of the error display of an important strong error can be ensured and the reliability of the error notification can be ensured.

When an error notification (such as an error display or an error notification sound output) continues for a predetermined execution time, the execution time of an effect that hides the error display such as the cut-in display 813 described above and the error notification It is preferable that the execution time of the effect sound output, which takes precedence over the sound output in (1), is less than the shortest execution time of the error notification. As a result, even if the effect of concealing the error display or the sound output for the effect having priority over the error notification is performed, the error notification is not hindered by these effects in at least a part of the period during which the error notification is performed. done reliably without

In addition, when the error display is performed by blinking display (periodically turning on and off, or displaying and not displaying repeatedly), the execution time of the effect that hides the error display such as the cut-in display 813 described above is As shown in FIG. 113(2), which will be described later, it is preferable that the time is less than the lighting display time of the error display. As a result, even if the effect of concealing the error display is performed, the error display is reliably performed without being hindered by the effect in at least a part of the period during which the error display is performed.

In addition, when the error display is performed by blinking, the above cut-in display 813
In order to prevent the execution timing of the effect that conceals the error display from synchronizing with the lighting timing of the error display, for example, as shown in FIG. By inserting it, it is also possible to adjust the execution timing of the error display or the execution timing of the effect.

The gaming machine 10 of the above-described fourth embodiment (including modifications) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 includes main control means (game control means; game control device 100) for performing game control such as controlling the progress of the game, and identification information for production (decorative special figure, for example, the above-mentioned large symbol display means (display device 41) for performing a variable display game that variably displays the group 801), and production means (display device 41,
A slave control means (effect control means; effect control device 300) that performs effect control for controlling speakers 19a, 19b, etc.). The slave control means can execute an error display to notify an error occurring in the game machine 10 based on the command or based on the error determination by the slave control means, and the effect of the effect means is the error display. A control unit (CPU 311) capable of executing a specific effect of hiding at least a part (for example, an effect of displaying a cut-in display 813) is provided. As the error display, the control unit displays an error notification image (for example, error notification image 807), which is an image that notifies an error, for example, on the display means, and the specific effect conceals at least part of the error notification image. It should be noted that the error display and specific effect may be performed by display means different from the display means for performing the variable display game.

(2) further comprising sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b), the control unit of (1) can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the game machine by the sound output means; When sound output for performance is included in the specific performance, the error notification sound is output preferentially over the sound output for the performance.

(3) The control unit of (1) selects the first image (for example, the character 814 and the character 815 in the cut-in display 813) and the second image (for example, the background in the cut-in display 813) as the production images in the specific production. The display priority of the first image is set higher than that of the error notification image, and the display priority of the second image is set lower than that of the error notification image. That is, the first image conceals the error notification image in the portion overlapping the error notification image, and the second image does not conceal the error notification image even in the portion overlapping the error notification image (the error notification image is displayed in front). ).

(4) The control unit of (1) selects a first effect (
For example, a strong notice effect) and a second effect that does not correspond to a specific effect (for example, a weak notice effect) can be executed, and an effect image displayed in the first effect (for example, cut-in display 813,
Alternatively, the character 814 in the cut-in display 813, etc.) is set higher in display priority than the error notification image, and the display priority is set higher than the error notification image for the effect image displayed in the second effect (for example, the character 814a). set lower. That is, the rendering image displayed in the first rendering hides the error notification image in the portion overlapping the error notification image, and the rendering image displayed in the second rendering hides the error notification image even in the portion overlapping the error notification image. Set to not (display so that the error notification image is in front).

(5) The control unit in (1) can report a first error (for example, a strong error) and a second error (for example, a weak error) as errors. is set higher than the display priority of the image displayed as the specific effect, and the display priority of the image informing the second error is set lower than the display priority of the image displayed as the specific effect. That is, the image notifying the first error is not hidden by the image for effect in the portion overlapping the image for effect displayed in the specific effect, and the image notifying the second error is the image for effect displayed in the specific effect. Set so that the part overlapping with is hidden by the image for effect.

(6) The control unit in (1) can notify a first error (for example, a strong error) and a second error (for example, a weak error) as errors, and output sound and second error for notifying the first error. The sound output for notifying the error of is given priority over the sound output performed as the performance including the specific performance.

(7) The control unit of (1) provides an effect image for displaying the display priority of an error notification image related to a predetermined error notification (for example, strong error notification) as a specific effect (for example, strong notice or weak notice effect). , and when at least a part of the effect image is concealed by the error notification image, the effect sound output as the specific effect related to the concealed effect image is changed to the error notification as the predetermined error notification. Prioritize over sound output. The feature described in (7) is, for example, in the specific examples (examples in which priority is given to error display) shown in FIGS. Corresponds to the features of the example.

(8) The directing means of (1) further includes sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b)
and a movable effect means (for example, a board effect device 44), the control unit can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the game machine by the sound output means, and can be used for effect in a specific effect When the sound output is included, the error notification sound is output with priority over the sound output for the effect, and the effect related to the movable motion regardless of whether the movable effect means performs a normal movable motion The display (effect display) is displayed on the display means.

In addition, if the movable effect means cannot perform normal movable motion, that is, the malfunction of the movable effect means may include malfunction of the actuator (motor or solenoid) of the movable effect means, disconnection or connection failure of the required connector, wiring failure, etc. Disconnection, failure of mechanical mechanism, etc.

[Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment will be explained using FIG. Figure 108 shows
FIG. 14 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen and a movable accessory according to the fifth embodiment;

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 108(1) corresponds to the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3).
is the same as , so the description is omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) that the movable accessory will operate.

A display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108(2) is a screen after the display screen 811, and is a display screen that displays effect images 816 and 817 as a background of strong notice that the movable accessory will move. . As the movable accessory, for example, the movable portion of the third board effect device 706 (described in the third embodiment with reference to FIG. 82) moves to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the display device 41, and the display area is expanded. It is positioned at a predetermined position covering from the central portion to the vicinity of the upper side portion. The effect image 816 is a background image that extends from the back side (back side) of the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 to the surroundings, and is viewed from the front (that is, viewed from the player) third board effect device 706. It is an image that decorates the periphery of the circular movable part of , and produces an effect integrally with the movable part.

The effect image 817 is a pair of left and right images representing a predetermined facial expression of human eyes, and is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 816 . In this example, the circular movable portion of the third panel effect device 706 is provided with two openings 706a on the left and right, which look like the eyes of a person's face. Each of them can be seen from the front, and the circular movable part of the third panel effect device 706 and the effect image 817 realize a display like a human face with a predetermined expression.

Note that the effect images 816 and 817 are set to have a lower display priority than the error notification image 807 and are displayed behind the error notification image 807 . Also, effect images 816, 8
17 may be displayed as an integral image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 108(2), the circular movable portion of the third board rendering device 706 that has moved to the predetermined position hides almost the entire error notification image 807 in this case, and the error is displayed. To realize highly interesting presentation by entertaining players. Note that the effect image 81
The display of 6,817 may start in the state shown in FIG. Alternatively, the display of only the lower end of the effect image 816 may be started in response to the appearance of the movable portion of the third board effect device 706, and the third board effect device 706 can be moved. It may be displayed so as to move integrally with the movable part of the third panel effect device 706 so as to follow the movement of the part.

A display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108(3) is the same as the display screen 821 shown in FIG. 108(2) as an image displayed in the display area of the display device 41. FIG. FIG. 108(3) shows a state in which the strong notice accompanied by the operation of the third board effect device 706 is started, but the movable part of the third board effect device 706 does not move from the retracted position due to a failure of the third board effect device 706, for example. indicates Thus, in a state where the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 817 are displayed as the effect of the strong notice, and the effect images 816 and 817 are preferentially displayed on the front side. The entire notification image 807 becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible for the player or the like to recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory in which the movable accessory does not move despite the strong notice that the movable accessory should move. Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (when no error has occurred), the effect images 816 and 817 are displayed in this way to make the player or the like aware of the abnormal state of the movable role. is preferred.

In the case of the present embodiment, the game machine 10 also has the above-described FIG. 106 (fourth embodiment).
Similarly to , the error notification image 807 is displayed, and the corresponding sound output for error notification is preferentially output over the sound output for presentation. Note that in FIG. 108, in addition to the sound output for presentation, the sound output for error notification is also omitted.

Here, the effect by the third board effect device 706 (movable accessory) is the first effect that takes precedence over the error notification.
equivalent to the production of On the other hand, the effect images 816 and 817 and the sound output for effect such as BGM correspond to the second effect, which is inferior to the error notification.

In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the error notification image is hidden by the effect of the movable accessory has been described. In addition, when an error notification (including display of an error notification image) is being performed, for example, the configuration may be changed so that the action of hiding the error notification image 807 is not performed by the movable accessory.

[Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in Modification 1 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen and a movable accessory in modification 1 of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 109(1) corresponds to the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3).
is the same as , so the description is omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) that the movable accessory will operate. Note that FIG. 109(1) shows a state in which the lower ends of the movable parts of the above-mentioned second panel effect devices 705L and 705R, which are movable accessories, are positioned in front of the upper left and upper right of the display area of the display device 41. It is illustrated as an example. However, at this point, the lower ends of the second panel effect devices 705L and 705R may not be positioned in front of the display area of the display device 41, but may be set back above the display area.

A display screen 823 shown in FIG. 109(2) is a screen after the display screen 811, and is a display screen that displays an effect image 816 as a background of strong notice that the movable accessory will move. As movable accessories, for example, the above-mentioned second board effect devices 705L, 705R (third
82) moves toward the center of the display area of the display device 41, and the lower end of the movable part displays an error notification image 807 displayed in the center of the display area. It is partially hidden.

A display screen 824 shown in FIG. 109(3) is the same as the display screen 823 shown in FIG. 109(2) as an image displayed in the display area of the display device 41 . However, the effect image 81
The size and display position of 6 may be different between the display screen 824 and the display screen 823 .
Also, FIG. 109(3) shows a state in which the movement of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R, which are movable accessories, has reached a predetermined position. That is, the lower ends of the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R reach positions slightly below the center of the display area of the display device 41, and the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R are adjacent to each other on the left and right. Positioned in a mating joint. In this state, a wide area including substantially the upper half of the display area of the display device 41 is hidden by the movable parts of the joined second board effect devices 705L and 705R, and most of the error notification image 807 is the second board effect device 705L. , 705R.

In this modification, the effect image 816 is a background image that spreads from the back side (back side) of the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R to the surroundings, and is the second image when viewed from the front (that is, when viewed from the player). It is an image that decorates the surroundings of the movable parts of the two-board production devices 705L and 705R and performs production as one with the movable parts. 108 and the effect image 816 shown in FIG. 109 have different colors, patterns, and brightness. The aspect of the image may be different. Note that the effect image 816 is set to have a lower display priority than the error notification image 807 and is displayed behind the error notification image 807 .

Then, as shown in FIG. 109(3), the second panel effect device 705L, which has moved to a predetermined position,
In this case, the movable part of 705R hides almost the entire error notification image 807, and even if the error display is performed, the player is entertained and a highly interesting presentation is realized. Note that the display of the effect image 816 may start in the state shown in FIG. 705L,
705R may be started in the same way when 705R moves to a predetermined position, or the second board effect device 705
In response to the appearance of the movable parts L and 705R, the display of only the lower end of the effect image 816 is started, and the second board effect devices 705L and 705R are displayed so as to follow the movement of the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R. It may be displayed to move integrally with the movable part of 705R.

106 (fourth embodiment), the game machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and outputs the corresponding sound output for error notification. Prioritize over sound output. Note that in FIG. 109, in addition to the sound output for presentation, the sound output for error notification is also omitted.

Here, the effect by the second board effect devices 705L and 705R (movable accessory) corresponds to the first effect that takes precedence over the error notification. On the other hand, the effect image 816 and the sound output for effect such as BGM correspond to the second effect, which is inferior to the error notification.

[Modification 2 of the fifth embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in Modified Example 2 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen of modification 2 of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 110(1) is the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3) described above.
is the same as , so the description is omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) that the movable accessory will operate.

A display screen 823a shown in FIG. 110(2) is a screen after the display screen 811, and is a display of an effect image 816 as a background of the strong notice in which the movable accessory moves, and an auxiliary display of the strong notice (failure recognition). This is a display screen displaying auxiliary images 826L and 826R that are possible display). Here, the effect image 816 is the same image as the effect image 816 of Modification 1 shown in FIG. 109(2). Auxiliary images 826L and 826R are the second panel effect device 705
When L and 705R operate normally, the positions are positioned behind the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R and are always invisible due to the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R. and the size of the image. In the illustrated example, auxiliary images 826L and 826
R is an image having an outer shape substantially similar to that of the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R and having a size smaller than that of the movable parts.

A display screen 824a shown in FIG. 110(3) is a screen subsequent to the display screen 823a, and is a display of an effect image 816 and an auxiliary image 8 which is an auxiliary display of strong notice (failure recognition possible display).
27 is a display screen displaying No. 27. FIG. Here, the effect image 816 is shown in FIG.
This is the same image as the effect image 816 of Modification 1 shown in (3). Auxiliary image 827 is
When the second board effect devices 705L and 705R operate normally, the second board effect device 705L
, 705R, and is hidden by the movable parts of the second board effect devices 705L, 705R. In the case of the illustrated example, the auxiliary image 827 includes the characters "out of character", and the second board effect devices 705L and 70
The image is smaller in size than the moving part of 5R.

In FIGS. 110(2) and 110(3), the strong notice accompanying the operation of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R is started, but for example, the second board effect is caused by the failure of the second board effect devices 705L and 705R. The movable parts of the devices 705L and 705R are shown not moving from the retracted position. That is, FIG. 110(2) is the timing of the announcement effect when the second board effect devices 705L and 705R should be operating as shown in FIG. This shows a state in which the rendering devices 705L and 705R are not operating. Also, FIG. 110(3) shows the timing of the announcement effect when the second board effect devices 705L and 705R should be operating as shown in FIG. Devices 705L and 705R are shown to be inactive.

In this way, when the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect image 816 is displayed as a strong notice effect, and the error notification image 807 displayed on the front side is given priority over the effect image 816. The whole becomes visible, and the auxiliary images 826L and 826
R and the auxiliary image 827 become visible. Therefore, it is possible for the player or the like to surely recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory in which the movable accessory does not move despite the strong notice that the movable accessory should move.
Even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (when no error occurs), the effect image 816 is displayed in this way, or the auxiliary images 826L, 826R and auxiliary images 827 are displayed, and the movable accessory is displayed. It is preferable to adopt a configuration in which a player or the like recognizes an abnormal state.

106 (fourth embodiment), the game machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and outputs the corresponding sound output for error notification. Prioritize over sound output. Note that in FIG. 110, in addition to the effect sound output, error notification sound output is also omitted.

[Modification 3 of the fifth embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in Modified Example 3 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 111. FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram showing an example of a display screen and a movable accessory according to modification 3 of the fifth embodiment.

The display screen 811 shown in FIG. 111(1) corresponds to the display screen 811 shown in FIG. 106(3).
is the same as , so the description is omitted. After this display screen 811, the gaming machine 10 starts a strong notice (specific effect) that the movable accessory will operate.

A display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111(2) is a screen after the display screen 811, and is a display screen that displays effect images 816 and 828 as a background of strong notice that the movable accessory will move. . As the movable accessory, for example, the movable portion of the third board effect device 706 (described in the third embodiment with reference to FIG. 82) moves to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the display device 41, and the display area is expanded. It is positioned at a predetermined position covering from the central portion to the vicinity of the upper side portion. The effect image 816 is the same as the example in FIG. 108(2) described above.
It is a background image that spreads from the back side (back side) of the circular movable part of 6 to the periphery, and is an image that decorates the periphery of the movable part when viewed from the front and produces an effect integrally with the movable part.

The effect image 828 is a pair of left and right images representing a predetermined facial expression of human eyes, and is superimposed and displayed on the front side of the effect image 816 . In this example as well, FIG. 108 (
As in the example of 2), the circular movable part of the third board production device 706 has two openings 706a on the left and right that look like the eyes of a human face. image 82
8 can be seen from the front, and the circular movable part of the third panel rendering device 706 and the effect image 828 realize a display like a human face with a predetermined expression.

Note that the effect images 816 and 828 are set to have a lower display priority than the error notification image 807 and are displayed behind the error notification image 807 . Also, effect images 816, 8
28 may be displayed as an integral image.

Then, as shown in FIG. 111 (2), the circular movable portion of the third board effect device 706 moved to the predetermined position hides almost the entire error notification image 807, and even if the error display is performed, the game is played. To entertain people and realize highly interesting performances. Note that the effect images 816 and 82
The display of 8 is shown in FIG.
1 (2), or when the third board effect device 706 moves to a predetermined position, or when the movable part of the third board effect device 706 appears. Correspondingly, starting from the display of only the lower end of the effect image 816, it is displayed so as to move integrally with the movable part of the third board effect device 706 so as to follow the movement of the movable part of the third board effect device 706. may

The display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111(3) is a screen after the display screen 811, and the image displayed in the display area of the display device 41 is the display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111(2).
is the same as FIG. 111(3) shows a state in which the strong notice accompanied by the operation of the third board effect device 706 is started, but the movable part of the third board effect device 706 does not move from the retracted position due to a failure of the third board effect device 706, for example. indicates Thus, in a state where the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 828 are displayed as the effect of the strong notice, and the effect images 816 and 828 are preferentially displayed on the front side. The entire notification image 807 becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible for the player or the like to recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory in which the movable accessory does not move despite the strong notice that the movable accessory should move. Note that the error notification image 807
is not displayed (when no error has occurred), the effect image 81
It is preferable to display 6,828 to make the player or the like aware of the abnormal state of the movable accessory.

A display screen 821b shown in FIG. 111(4) is a screen after the display screen 811, like the display screen 821a shown in FIG. 111(3). Characteristically, in the display screen 821b shown in FIG. 111(4), in addition to the display of the effect images 816 and 828, an auxiliary image 829, which is an auxiliary display of strong advance notice (failure recognition possible display), is displayed. Auxiliary image 829 is the third
When the board effect device 706 operates normally, the position is located on the far side of the movable part of the third board effect device 706 and is always hidden by the movable part of the third board effect device 706 and becomes invisible. and the size of the image. In the illustrated example, the auxiliary image 829 is an image that includes the characters “accessory failure” and is smaller than the movable portion of the third board effect device 706 .

In FIG. 111(4), similarly to FIG. 111(3), the strong notice accompanied by the operation of the third board effect device 706 is started, but the third board effect device 706 is out of order. 7
06 does not move from the retracted position. That is, FIG. 111(4) is the
11(2) shows a state in which the third board effect device 706 is not operating even though it is the timing of the advance notice effect that the third board effect device 706 should be operating.

In the case of the example shown in FIG. 111(4), when the movable accessory does not move to the front of the screen, only the effect images 816 and 828 are displayed as the strong notice effect, and the effect image 816 is displayed.
, 828, the entire error notification image 807 displayed on the front side becomes visible, and furthermore, the auxiliary image 829 becomes visible. Therefore, it is possible for the player or the like to surely recognize the abnormal state of the movable accessory in which the movable accessory does not move despite the strong notice that the movable accessory should move. Note that even when the error notification image 807 is not displayed (when no error has occurred), the effect image 816 is displayed in this way, or the auxiliary image 829 is further displayed,
It is preferable to make the player or the like aware of the abnormal state of the movable accessory.

106 (fourth embodiment), the game machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and outputs the corresponding sound output for error notification. Prioritize over sound output. Note that in FIG. 111, in addition to sound output for presentation, sound output for error notification is also omitted.

Here, the effect by the third board effect device 706 (movable accessory) is the first effect that takes precedence over the error notification.
equivalent to the production of On the other hand, the effect images 816 and 828 and the sound output for effect such as BGM correspond to the second effect, which is inferior to the error notification.

[Modification 4 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in Modification 4 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 112 . FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating an example of a display screen and a light guide plate of modification 4 of the fifth embodiment. In FIG. 112, a perspective view showing the arrangement and state of the light guide plate is shown on the left side, and the display device 4 is shown on the right side.
1 shows an example of a display screen displayed in one display area. The perspective view on the left side of FIG. 112 shows only the arrangement and state of the light guide plate, and the image content of the display screen of the display device 41 is omitted in this perspective view.

A light guide plate has a plate-like body made of acrylic or the like as a main element. By leading it to the side (front side), it is possible to make the front side emit light almost uniformly, or to display specific characters and figures according to the unevenness on the front side. When the light-emitting element is not emitting light, the light guide plate has high transparency so that the entire back side can be seen through from the front surface. There are things that are displayed so as to make them stand out.

In this modified example, light guide plates 831 and 832, which are such light guide plates, are arranged to overlap on the front side of the display area of the display device 41 as shown on the left side of FIG. 112(1). In this modification, for example, two sets of light guide plates 831 and 832 having a display portion (portion that becomes a transparent window in the OFF state) larger than the size of the display area of the display device 41 are used to display the display device 41. It is arranged in a fixed state overlaid on the front of the area. The illustration of the light emitting elements attached to the light guide plates 831 and 832 is omitted. Further, the light guide plates 831 and 832 are provided movably from a standby position (storage position) away from the front surface of the display area of the display device 41 to a position overlapping the front surface of the display area of the display device 41, for example. A mode in which the light guide plates 831 and 832 are moved from the standby position and used as a movable accessory may be used when the performance is performed by the light guide plates 831 and 832 .

The display screen 833 shown in FIG. 112(1) is, as shown on the right side of FIG. 112(1), similar to the display screen 811 shown in FIG. display screen. The display screen 833 is, for example, the display screen 810 shown in FIG.
It is a screen after , and shows a screen during reach fluctuation in which left and right symbols display "3". In addition, during the change to the display screen 833, for example, the above-mentioned overflow switch signal is output,
In response to this, on the display screen 833, the aforementioned error notification image 807 is displayed.

In the state of FIG. 112(1), each light guide plate 8 is shown on the left side of FIG.
31 and 832 are both in an off state, and the entire display screen 833 on the back side of these light guide plates 831 and 832 is clearly visible from the front side. Note that in FIG.
The small pattern group 802, the special figure 1 reservation number display 803, the special figure 2 reservation number display 804, the reservation display 805, and the reservation digestion display 806 described in FIG. are also omitted.

A display screen 834 shown in FIG. 112(2) is, as shown on the right side of FIG. 112(2), a display screen for a cut-in effect during the ready-to-win effect, similarly to the display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106(4). is. A display screen 834 is a screen subsequent to the display screen 833, and shows a screen during reach fluctuation in which left and right patterns display "3". The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with cut-in display 813a (cut-in production) for the variable display during the ready-to-win production.

However, unlike the cut-in display 813 of the display screen 812 described above, the cut-in display 813a of this modification consists only of an image such as a background of a rocket (for example, dark space), and does not include a character 814 such as a rocket. Does not include images.

Then, in the state of FIG. 112(2), as shown on the left side of FIG.
31 and 832, only the light guide plate 832 is in the ON state, and when the light guide plate 832 is in the ON state, a character 832a, which is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832, becomes visible from the front side, and each guide plate 832 is turned on. A display screen 834 on the back side of the light plates 831 and 832 is clearly visible from the front side except for the display range of the character 832a. In other words, the character 83 which is the image displayed on the light guide plate 832 as shown on the right side of FIG.
2a partially hides the display area of the display device 41, and in this case, the error notification image 8
07 is hidden by the character 832a. Therefore, even if the error display is performed, the player is entertained and a highly interesting presentation is realized.

Here, a character 832a, which is an image displayed on the light guide plate 832, is an image like a rocket similar to the character 814 shown in FIG. In display 813a (display of display area of display device 41)
It overlaps with and realizes an integrated display effect.

Note that this example is merely an example, and the image displayed on the light guide plate 832 may include other images such as a character riding a rocket. Also, a portion of the rocket-like image, for example, the portion of the flames emitted from the rocket engine emitted from the bottom end of the rocket, is displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41 (that is, part of the display screen 834). may be In the portion displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41, it is possible to easily change the aspect of the image (for example, the display color) according to the degree of expectation.

A display screen 834a shown in FIG. 112(3) is, as shown on the right side of FIG. 112(3), a display screen for a cut-in effect during a ready-to-win effect, similar to the display screen 812 shown in FIG. 106(4). is. The display screen 834a is the same as the display screen 834 shown in FIG. 112(2).
12(1), which is a screen subsequent to the display screen 833 shown in FIG. The gaming machine 10 produces a predetermined degree of expectation with cut-in display 813a (cut-in production) for the variable display during the ready-to-win production. The case of FIG. 112(3) is an effect suggesting that, for example, the degree of expectation for a big hit is even higher than the case of FIG. 112(2) described above.

The display screen 834a of this modified example includes a cut-in display 813a, which is an image like a background of a rocket (for example, an image like a dark universe) as an image for cut-in effects, and a position where it looks like you are on a rocket. This is a screen that displays a tiger-like character 835 displayed in .

Then, in the state of FIG. 112(3), as shown on the left side of FIG.
31 and 832 are both in the ON state, and thereby the character 832a which is the image displayed on the light guide plate 832 and the character 8 which is the image displayed on the light guide plate 831 are displayed.
31a and 831b are visible from the front side, and a display screen 834a on the back side of each of the light guide plates 831 and 832 is clearly visible from the front side except for the display range of the characters 831a, 831b and 832a. In other words, as shown on the right side of FIG. 112(3), characters 831a, 831b, and 832a, which are images displayed on the respective light guide plates, partially hide the display area of the display device 41. In this case, an error notification is given. Many areas of the image 807 are hidden by the characters 831a, 831b, and 832a. Therefore, even if the error display is performed, the player is entertained and a highly interesting presentation is realized.

Here, characters 831a and 831 which are images displayed on the light guide plates 831 and 832
b, 832a is an image like a rocket similar to the character 814 shown in FIG. display) to realize an integrated display effect. Particularly in this example, when viewed from the front (that is, viewed by the player), a tiger-like character 835 is replaced by a rocket-like character 831a, as shown on the right side of FIG.
It is configured to look like you are on board.

Note that this example is merely an example, and the images displayed on the light guide plates 831 and 832 may include other images such as a character riding a rocket. Also, a portion of the rocket-like image, for example, a portion of flames emitted from the bottom end of the rocket, may be displayed as an image on the display area of display device 41 (ie, part of display screen 834a). . Also, an image like a rocket may be displayed as part of the cut-in display 813a of the display screen 834a, for example, so that when viewed from the front, the state in which more rockets are flying may be visually recognized. In the portion displayed as an image on the display area of the display device 41, it is possible to easily change the aspect of the image (for example, the display color) according to the degree of expectation. For example, different expectations can be suggested by changing the presence or absence, form (for example, display color), and type of a character 835 riding on a rocket-like character 831a.

Also, the number of light guide plates is not limited to two sets, and one set may be used, or three or more sets may be used. Moreover, in an extreme example, the entire display area of the display device 41 may be covered by the light guide plate in the ON state. In addition, due to the action of the light guide plate, part or all of the display screen is whited out (or blacked out), or the brightness or illuminance of part or all of the display screen is reduced, thereby hiding the error notification image. There is also a mode to do. The light guide plate may move from the front surface of the display device 41 and stand by at a position that does not overlap the display area of the display device 41 when the effect is not performed. (less translucent) can be used.

106 (fourth embodiment), the game machine 10 displays the error notification image 807 and outputs the corresponding sound output for error notification. Prioritize over sound output. Note that in FIG. 112, in addition to the effect sound output, the error notification sound output is also omitted.

Here, the effect by the light guide plates 831 and 832 (display means, movable accessory) corresponds to the first effect that gives priority to the error notification. On the other hand, the effect image 813a and the sound output for effect such as BGM correspond to the second effect, which is inferior to the error notification.

Note that the production means for effecting (including error notification) includes display means for effecting by display, sound output means for effecting by voice, and movable accessories for effecting by the movement of the movable parts, but this embodiment. Specific examples of the order of priority between error notification and advance notice effects, including those described in the fifth embodiment and the above-described fourth embodiment, are summarized below and differ depending on the effect means.

First, the order of priority on the display means is as follows: strong error notification>strong notice effect>weak error notice>weak notice effect, in descending order of priority. Next, the priority in the sound output means is
Similarly, strong error notification>weak error notification>strong notice effect, weak notice effect. The order of priority in the sound output means may be strong error notification>weak error notification>strong notice effect>weak notice effect. Next, the priority order for movable accessories is similarly strong notice effect > strong error notification > weak error notification >
It will be a weak notice production. Here, a strong error means an error with a relatively high importance, and a weak error means an error with a lower importance than a strong error. Further, the strong notice means a notice with a relatively high degree of reliability (expectation of a big hit or the like), and the weak notice means a notice with a lower reliability than the strong notice.

[Modification 5 of Fifth Embodiment]
Next, the effect performed in Modified Example 5 of the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 113 . This modification includes the error display described in the present embodiment (fifth embodiment) and the above-described fourth embodiment, and effects to hide the error display (display effects of strong advance notice such as cut-in effects, movable accessories, etc.). It is characterized by the execution time and execution timing of the production by the movement of the movable part, the production by the display and movement of the light guide plate). FIG. 113 is an example of a timing chart showing the temporal relationship between an error display (flashing display) and an effect that hides the error display.

First, although not shown, when an error notification (such as error display or sound output for error notification) is continuously performed for a predetermined execution time (not blinking display), the above-described third board effect device 706 or It is preferable that the execution time of the effect of concealing the error display by the second board effect devices 705L, 705R and the light guide plates 831, 832 is less than the shortest execution time of the error notification. As a result, even if the effect of concealing the error display is performed, the error notification is reliably performed without being hindered by the effect in at least a part of the period during which the error notification is performed.

Next, when the error display is performed by blinking display (periodic lighting and extinguishing, or display and non-display are repeated) as shown in FIG. In display 813, third board effect device 706, second board effect device 705L,
705R and the effect by the light guide plates 831 and 832) is preferably shorter than the lighting display time of the error display (execution time Ton, which will be described later), as shown in FIG. 113(2).

Here, FIG. 113(1) shows an effect of concealing an error display when the error display is a blinking display that repeats the operation of being executed for the execution time Ton and stopped (not displayed) for the non-execution time Toff. is longer than the error display execution time Ton. In this case, as shown in FIG. 113 (1), if the execution timing of the error display and the execution timing of the effect that hides the error display are synchronized, the entire error display for one execution time Ton will be The error display is hidden, and the longest continuous time during which an observer (player or the like) cannot visually recognize the error display becomes a considerably long time T0 (T0=Ton+2×Toff).

However, as shown in FIG. 113(2), if the execution time of the rendering to hide the error display is less than the lighting display time of the error display (TP<Ton), as shown in FIG. 113(2), once The error display of Ton is not entirely hidden temporally, and the longest continuous time during which the error display cannot be visually recognized by the observer is time T1 (T1<Ton+T
off). In other words, even if the effect to hide the error display is performed, at least part of the period during which the error display is performed, the error display is reliably performed without being hindered by this effect, and the longest continuous time during which the error display is not visible. decrease significantly.

In addition, when the error display is performed by blinking display, as shown in FIG. By inserting an offset ΔT (shift time),
The configuration may be such that the execution timing of the error display is adjusted.

The operation shown in FIG. 113(3) is, for example, in the control processing in the effect control device 300 that performs the error display (blinking display) shown in FIG. It can be realized by determining whether or not the periods overlap (at the same time) every cycle in advance, and if it is determined that they overlap, the timing to start executing the error display is delayed by the offset ΔT for the overlapping cycle. .

Note that, unlike the mode shown in FIG. 113(3), by inserting a temporal offset ΔT into the effect of concealing the error display, the execution timing of the effect may be adjusted. In addition, in the control processing for inserting the offset ΔT in this way, the performance execution time TP is the same as the error display execution time Ton, or the performance execution time TP is equal to the error display execution time as shown in FIG. The configuration may be such that it is performed only when it is longer than Ton (that is, when TP≧Ton).

In any case, by inserting the offset ΔT as described above, for example FIG.
As shown in 13(3), the entire error display for one execution time Ton is not temporally concealed, and the longest continuous time during which the error display cannot be visually recognized by the observer is much shorter than T0. Become T2. In other words, even if the effect to hide the error display is performed, at least part of the period during which the error display is performed, the error display is reliably performed without being hindered by this effect, and the longest continuous time during which the error display is not visible. decrease significantly.

The gaming machine 10 of the fifth embodiment described above (including modified examples 1 to 5) has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 includes main control means (game control means; game control device 100) for performing game control such as controlling the progress of the game, and identification information for production (decorative special figure, for example, the above-mentioned large symbol display means (display device 41) for performing a variable display game that variably displays the group 801), and production means (display device 41,
Speakers 19a, 19b, 2nd board effect devices 705L, 705R, 3rd board effect device 706, etc.) are provided. The slave control means can execute an error display to notify an error occurring in the game machine 10 based on the command or based on the error determination by the slave control means, and the effect of the effect means is the error display. A specific effect that conceals at least a part (for example, a strong notice effect that hides the error display by operating the movable accessory 706, or a strong notice effect that hides the error display with the light guide plates 831 and 832) can be executed. Control unit (CPU
311). As the error display, the control unit displays an error notification image (for example, error notification image 807), which is an image that notifies an error, for example, on the display means, and the specific effect conceals at least part of the error notification image. It should be noted that the error display and specific effect may be performed by display means different from the display means for performing the variable display game.

(2) further comprising sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b), the control unit of (1) can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the game machine by the sound output means; When sound output for performance is included in the specific performance, the error notification sound is output preferentially over the sound output for the performance.

(3) The control unit in (1) uses the movable accessories (second board effect devices 705L, 705
By operating the R or third board effect device 706, or the light guide plates 831 and 832 in the case of a movable type, at least part of the display area of the display means (at least part of the error notification image) is displayed by the movable accessory. Background images (for example, effect images 816 and 817) corresponding to movable accessories can be displayed as images for effects in a specific effect, and background images are set to have a lower display priority than error notification images. That is, the activated movable accessory conceals the error notification image in the portion overlapping the error notification image, and the background image does not conceal the error notification image even in the portion overlapping the error notification image (the error notification image is displayed on the front side). set as

(4) The control unit of (1) selects a first effect (
For example, a strong notice effect) and a second effect that does not correspond to a specific effect (for example, a weak notice effect) can be executed, and the second effect does not hide the error notification image (for example, an error notification is performed. If there is, even if the notice effect of activating the movable accessory is generated, the effect is changed so that the movable accessory is not moved to the predetermined position). Also, an error notification sound for notifying an error (weak error and strong error) is outputted with priority over sound output for effects as the first effect and the second effect.

(5) The control unit in (1), when performing an effect in which a movable accessory is activated as a specific effect, is an auxiliary image that is hidden by the activated movable accessory and is visually recognized when the movable accessory is not activated. Possible auxiliary images (eg, auxiliary images 826L, 826R, auxiliary image 827, auxiliary image 829, or a portion of effect image 816, etc.) are displayed on the display means.

(6) The auxiliary image in (5) visually recognizes that the movable accessory does not perform a predetermined action (the movable accessory is broken or the effect has been changed so that the movable accessory does not move to a predetermined position). contains information (such as text or graphics) that

(7) The directing means of (1) further includes sound output means (for example, speakers 19a and 19b)
and a movable effect means (for example, a board effect device 44), the control unit can output an error notification sound for notifying an error occurring in the game machine by the sound output means, and can be used for effect in a specific effect When the sound output is included, the error notification sound is output with priority over the sound output for the effect, and the effect related to the movable motion regardless of whether the movable effect means performs a normal movable motion The display (effect display) is displayed on the display means.

In addition, if the movable effect means cannot perform normal movable motion, that is, the malfunction of the movable effect means may include malfunction of the actuator (motor or solenoid) of the movable effect means, disconnection or connection failure of the required connector, wiring failure, etc. Disconnection, failure of mechanical mechanism, etc.

(8) The gaming machine 10 includes effect means including display means (display device 41) and movable effect means (for example, board effect device 44), and control means (effect control means; effect control device 300) for controlling the effect means. ). The control means causes the display means to display an effect display (effect display) related to the movable motion regardless of whether or not the movable effect means performs a normal movable motion.

[Base calculation and display]
Here, the calculation and display of the base as the gaming performance performed by the gaming machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG.
4, which will be explained with reference to FIG. Here, the base is the payout rate in the normal game state. Here, the normal gaming state is a state that is neither a time saving state nor a jackpot gaming state (jackpot state), and more generally, the probability of a winning result in a special figure fluctuation display game is a normal probability state (
low-probability state). The ball payout rate is the number of balls paid out per 100 out balls. Therefore, when the number of out balls in the normal game state is Nout and the number of payout balls in the normal game state is Nsafe, the base B is calculated by the formula B=(Nsafe÷Nout)×100. Note that the number of out balls is the number of balls that have been shot into the game area and entered the out hole or the winning hole (for example, the number of balls counted based on the above-described out ball detection switch signal), and the number of out balls, or simply Also called out. The number of payout balls is the number of prize balls paid out for winning a prize, and may also be referred to as the number of payouts, the number of safe balls, or simply safe.

As already described in the description of FIG.
5 is provided. 114A and 114B are diagrams showing the state display device 135 which is the display means of the base and the storage area for the base. FIG. 114(1) shows the display section of the state display device 135, and FIG. indicates the storage area of FIG. 115 shows an example of display by the status display device 135. FIG.

As shown in FIG. 114(1), the status display device 135 consists of 4 digits of 7-segment LEDs arranged side by side, and dot points (small circular light emitting part) is provided. 4-digit 7-segment LE for base display
Of D, the left two digits are an identification segment that displays the base measurement time (whether or not it is being measured and the order in which it was measured), and the right two digits are a ratio segment that displays the base value. It's becoming
As shown in FIG. 115, the 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 actually displays "B" in the form of a small letter "b".

The game control device 100 (more specifically, the CPU 111A, which is a control unit) has a RAM 111C
114(2) is set in the RWM such as the base, and is used for calculating the base and displaying the base. That is, the game control device 100 stores the cumulative value of the number of out-balls and the cumulative value of the number of pay-out balls as storage areas for base calculation.
Set the number of balls to be paid out. Also, as a storage area for the base to store the calculated value of the base, "
"Base (BL)", "Base (B1)", "Base (B2)", and "Base (B3)" are set.

Here, "base (BL)" is an area for storing the base being measured, and "base (B1
)” is an area for storing the base measured once before, “Base (B2)” is an area for storing the base measured twice before, and “Base (B3)” is an area for storing the base measured three times before. This is an area for storing the base that has been created. That is, it is an area for storing the oldest measured value (calculated value) of the base among the storage areas in which "base (B3)" is set.

The values stored in the base calculation storage area and the base storage area are backed up and stored when the power is turned off. It is desirable to have a configuration in which the memory is retained without being cleared to zero even when the data is stored.

The game control device 100 displays the setting contents of the probability setting (one of the five stages) in the setting change mode or the setting confirmation mode described above, except when the state display device 135 displays Display the base. In the above-described first embodiment, the setting content of the probability setting is displayed by the probability setting value display device 136 . However, the probability setting value display device 136 may be deleted and the state display device 135 may function as a probability setting value display device.
5, the setting contents are displayed in each of the above modes, and the status display device 135 displays the base in other modes.

The game control device 100 performs calculation and display of the base as follows, for example. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control device 100 confirms all segments (including dot points) of the 4-digit 7-segment LED of the status display device 135 for a predetermined time (for example, 5
seconds).

After that, the game control device 100 is in a BL display state as shown in FIG. 115(1),
B1 display state as shown in (2), B2 display state as shown in FIG. 115(3), FIG.
The operation of maintaining the B3 display state shown in (4) for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds) is repeatedly executed. That is, in a steady state after power-on, the BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, the B1 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, the B2 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, the B3 display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and then the B3 display state is maintained for a predetermined time. The BL display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and then B1
The display state is maintained for a predetermined time, and the four states are switched in order and repeated.

Here, in the BL display state, the game control device 100 displays "bL" (BL) indicating that the measurement timing of the base is being measured (current time) in the identification segment, and the storage area for base "base" in the ratio segment. (BL)” value (or “--”). In addition, in the B1 display state, the game control device 100 displays "b1" (B1) indicating that the measurement time of the base is one time before in the identification segment, and the storage area for base "base (B1)" in the ratio segment. " value (or " - - "). In addition, in the B2 display state, the game control device 100 determines that the identification segment has two base measurement timings.
"b2" (B2) indicating the previous time is displayed, and the value (or "--") of the base storage area "base (B2)" is displayed in the ratio segment. In addition, the game control device 1 in the B3 display state
00 displays "b3" (B3) indicating that the base measurement time is three times before in the identification segment, and the value of the base storage area "base (B3)" (or "--" in the ratio segment). ).

On the other hand, in order to calculate the base, the game control device 100 stores " The stored value of "the number of out balls" is increased by a value corresponding to the number of out balls detected, and each time a game ball wins a prize in a prize winning opening in a normal game state (or payout of prize balls based on the win occurs). corresponding to the number of balls put out (or the number of prize balls actually put out detected based on the signal from the payout control device 200) that generated the stored value of the "number of balls put out" in the storage area for base calculation. increase by the amount In addition, the game control device 100 calculates the base B by the above-described formula every time the stored value of the "number of out balls" or the "number of payout balls" in the storage area for base calculation changes, for example. Overwrite "base (BL)" in the base storage area as the latest value.

Note that the game control device 100 assumes that one measurement is completed when the stored value of the "number of out balls" in the storage area for base calculation reaches a specified number of measurements (eg, 60,000), and the following measurements are performed. It is configured to perform processing at the time of termination. In this process at the end of measurement, the value of the base storage area "base (B2)" at that time is stored in the base storage area "base (B3)".
, and the value of the base storage area "base (B1)" at that time is changed to the base storage area "
base (B2)”, overwrites the value of the base storage area “base (BL)” at that point in the base storage area “base (B1)”, further overwrites the base calculation storage area “out ball Clears the stored values of "number" and "number of balls paid out" and resets them to zero. As a result, the base values up to three times before and the base value currently being measured are always stored.

When the power is turned on for the first time, the game control device 100 (base calculation storage area “number of out balls”
is zero) to the storage value of the base calculation storage area "number of out balls" is less than a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300), in each display state, in the identification segment Blinking characters such as "bL", "b1", etc. indicating the measurement time of the base are displayed, and in the ratio segment, as shown in FIG. display to notify that it is in a non-measurement state.

Next, when the stored value of the base calculation storage area "number of out balls" reaches a predetermined calculation start number (for example, a predetermined number less than 300), the game control device 100 stores the base calculation storage area and the base storage area. Initialize (clear to zero) and start the first measurement.

And the game control device 100, in the period B from the start of the first measurement until the storage value of the storage area for base calculation "out ball number" reaches the number of measurements (for example, 60000 pieces), in the BL display state, the identification segment 'bL' is displayed blinking or illuminated, and the value of the base storage area 'base (BL)' is displayed in the ratio segment. In period B, other display states (
In the B1 to B3 display state), characters such as "b1" .

In addition, the display of "bL" in the identification segment in the BL display state is the storage area for base calculation "
If the stored value of the "number of out balls" is less than the counted number, it is displayed blinking, and if the stored value of the base calculation storage area "number of out balls" reaches the counted number, it is lit up. Further, the blinking period of the blinking display in the identification seg and the ratio seg is, for example, 0.6 seconds, of which the lighting is 0.3 seconds and the lighting is 0.3 seconds. Also, when the stored value of "number of out balls" reaches the measured number (for example, 60,000) and the period B ends, the above-described processing at the end of measurement is performed, and the next second measurement is started.

After that, the game control device 100 performs a period C for performing the second measurement, a period D for performing the third measurement, a period E for performing the fourth measurement, and so on in the same manner as the period B for performing the first measurement. Measurements are made continuously as follows. After the completion of the third measurement, the base calculation values of the past three times are stored. Therefore, in all of the B1 to B3 display states, the identification segment indicates the base measurement time such as "b1". , and the ratio segment displays the value of the corresponding base storage area (one of "base (B1)", "base (B2)", and "base (B3)").

Note that FIGS. 115(1) to 115(4) show specific display examples in each display state during the period D after the second measurement is completed. In this case, there is no measurement result three times before, so in FIG. 115(4), which is a specific example of the B3 display state, the display of the ratio segment is "--" (display indicating unmeasured state).

In addition, in FIG. 115(1), which is a specific example of the BL display state, the display of the ratio segment is "5 8
, indicating that the real-time base value currently being measured is 58. In addition, in FIG. 115(2), which is a specific example of the B1 display state, the display of the ratio segment is " 6 7
”, which indicates that the base value for the prescribed number of counts measured one time before is 67. In addition, in FIG. 115 (3), which is a specific example of the B2 display state, the display of the ratio segment is "4 9", and the base value for the specified number of counts measured two times before is 49. It is shown that. In addition, when the base value is 100 or more, the display of the ratio segment is set to "9 9." to notify that

The normal range of the base value is, for example, about 25 to 35. If the base value is less than or greater than this range, it is abnormal, and this abnormality is called base abnormality. The display example of FIG. 115 described above shows, as an example, a state in which the measurement results of the base abnormality exceeding the normal range are continuous. is displayed.

The game control device 100, for example, the past three base measurement values (above B
1 to B3 display values of the ratio segments) are all out of the normal range and abnormal,
Assuming that a base abnormality has occurred, a signal indicating that the base abnormality has occurred is sent to an external device such as a game hall internal management device (hall computer).

A signal (information) indicating this base abnormality is transmitted to the production control device 300 as a command, for example, and the base abnormality is notified to the display area of the display device 41 by the control of the production control device 300 that receives this signal. An image (for example, an image corresponding to the error notification image 807) may be displayed. Also, since there is a possibility that this base anomaly occurs when fraud is being carried out, it is desirable to set the above-mentioned strong error.

In the example shown in FIGS. 114 and 115, the base measurement values are stored and displayed up to three times before the past. It may be configured to Also, the storage area for base calculation is set only for the one being measured,
A storage area may be provided for storing the number of out balls and the number of paid balls, which are the basis for calculating the past measured values.

[Sixth embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment (including modifications) will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 122. FIG. The effect control device 300 in the game machine 10 of the sixth embodiment determines a detailed effect mode within the range of the variation pattern specified by the game control device 100 (for example, within the variation time specified by the game control device 100). there is At this time, the production control device 300 receives a variation pattern command from the game control device 100 and determines a detailed production mode by lottery. Therefore, even if the game control device 100 transmits the same variation pattern command, the effect control device 300 does not necessarily execute the same effect mode.

Lottery-based determination of such detailed presentation modes makes it difficult to perform desired presentation actions from the outside, and requires a large number of man-hours in the development process. for that reason,
The performance control device 300 enables reception of the detailed variation pattern command in addition to the variation pattern command, so that the determination of the detailed performance mode can be determined by the detailed variation pattern command without depending on the lottery. . In addition, since the transmission of the detailed variation pattern command becomes the processing burden of the game control device 100, the performance control device 300 can determine the detailed performance mode by lottery when the detailed variation pattern command is not received.

First, the command system of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 and 117. FIG. First, the command system between the game control device 100 and the effect control device 300 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 116 is a diagram (Part 1) showing an example of a command system according to the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 can determine a variation pattern indicating the outline of the performance by random number lottery, and can notify the variation pattern number to the performance control device 300 by a variation pattern command (command).

The performance control device 300 acquires a detailed variation pattern number based on a random number lottery within the outline of the performance instructed from the game control device 100.例文帳に追加At this time, the effect control device 300 determines the detailed variation pattern command from the result of the random number lottery, detailed variation pattern command (
Acquire the detailed variation pattern number corresponding to the command).

The effect control device 300 determines a detailed effect corresponding to the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and controls the effect device 850 with the determined effect contents. It should be noted that the production device 850 is a general term for convenience of various devices related to game production. Specifically, the effect device 850 is the display device 41
, board decoration device 46, frame decoration device 18, board effect device 44, speakers 19a and 19b, and the like.

Thereby, the production control device 300 can control the production device 850 in the production mode within the range indicated by the game control device 100 . In addition, the gaming machine 10 can reduce the processing load of the game control device 100 while making it possible to control the effect device 850 in various effect modes.

Next, the command system between the game control device 100 and the test device 851 will be explained using FIG. FIG. 117 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of the command system according to the sixth embodiment.
The test device 851 can transmit an arbitrary variation pattern command and an arbitrary detailed variation pattern command and notify the effect control device 300.

In addition, the test device 851 can test the operation of the production control device 300, and is, for example, a computer or the like having a debugger function, an ICE (In-Circuit Emulator) function, or the like. The test device 851 can be connected to the production control device 300 instead of the game control device 100 in the development environment, or in addition to the game control device 100 . In addition, the test device 851
It is not limited to the development environment, and may be used in the installation environment of the game machine 10 in the game arcade. Moreover, the test device 851 is not limited to being used for testing purposes, and may be used for development purposes, verification purposes, and other purposes.

Production control device 300 acquires the detailed variation pattern number corresponding to the detailed variation pattern command based on the variation pattern number (variation pattern command) and the detailed variation pattern command obtained from test device 851 .

The effect control device 300 determines a detailed effect corresponding to the acquired detailed variation pattern number, and controls the effect device 850 with the determined effect contents.
Thereby, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 can control the production|presentation apparatus 850 in the production|presentation aspect as the test apparatus 851 instruct|indicated. Therefore, the gaming machine 10 can cause the effect device 850 to perform desired effect actions from the outside.

In this way, the production control device 300, by receiving the detailed fluctuation pattern command, externally (
An instruction from the testing device 851) can be followed. Further, the performance control device 300 can determine even the details of performance contents that cannot be clarified only by the variation pattern command by itself (random number lottery) without receiving the detailed variation pattern command.

In addition, the effect control device 300 can regard the variation pattern command that can be acquired only from the outside as an external command in one aspect, and the detailed variation pattern command that can be generated internally as an internal command in one aspect. In addition, the performance control device 300 can regard the variation pattern command that defines the outline of the performance as a general command in one aspect, and the detailed variation pattern command that defines the details of the performance as a detailed command in one aspect. . In addition, the effect control device 300 can regard the variation pattern command used in the operating environment of the game hall as a command for actual operation in one aspect, and can be used in the non-operating environment of the game hall (for example, under the test environment). In one aspect, the detailed variation pattern command can be viewed as a non-production command (test command).

Next, the game control device 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 118 about the fluctuation command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. FIG. FIG. 118 is a diagram showing an example of a change command according to the sixth embodiment. The game control device 100 transmits to the effect control device 300 a command at the time of variation consisting of a group of commands at the start of variation of the special figure game. For example, if the special figure game is a special figure 1 game, the game control device 100 sets a change command in the special figure 1 game process (see FIG. 22) and transmits it to the effect control device 300 . Also, if the special figure game is a special figure 2 game, the game control device 100 sets a change command in the special figure 2 game process (see FIG. 23) and transmits it to the effect control device 300 .

Command at the time of fluctuation (variation system command) indicates a command that the game control device 100 transmits when the special figure game starts to fluctuate. First, the game control device 100 transmits a command with a transmission order of “1” (command name “decorative design designation”). The command name "decorative pattern designation" is MODE "8
5H” and ACTION “11H” to ACTION “7FH” depending on the decoration pattern.

Next, the game control device 100 transmits a command with a transmission order of “2” (command name “specify variation pattern”). The command name "variation pattern specification" is changed from MODE "C0H" to MOD
Either of E "D2H" and ACTION "01H" corresponding to each fluctuation pattern to AC
Contains either TION "7FH". Furthermore, the command name "variation pattern specification" is A
Following any of CTION '01H' to ACTION '7FH', any of OPTION 'FFF000H' to OPTION 'FFF7FFH' that can designate detailed effects can be included.

From the viewpoint of reducing the processing load, the game control device 100 transmits only MODE and ACTION in the command name "specify variation pattern", and does not transmit OPTION. The OPTION in the command name "variation pattern specification" is, for example, the test equipment 85
1 is to be transmitted.

MODE is a 1-byte command with the most significant bit set to "1".
ON is a 1-byte command with the most significant bit set to "0". Thereby, the effect control device 300 can determine whether the received command is MODE or ACTION by the most significant bit. OPTION is a 3-byte command, and the most significant bit of the first byte and the most significant bit of the second byte are "1". This will
The effect control device 300 negates the combination of MODE and ACTION from the most significant bit "1" of the first byte of the received command and the most significant bit of the second byte "1", and the received command is OPTION. can determine that there is

Next, the game control device 100 sends a command of transmission order "3" (command name "special figure 1 pending number"
). The command name "special figure 1 pending number" includes MODE "A1H" and any of ACTION "01H" to ACTION "05H" corresponding to the pending number 4 from no pending.

Next, the game control device 100 sends a command of transmission order "4" (command name "number of special figures 2 pending"
). The command name "special figure 2 reservation number" includes either MODE "A2H" and ACTION "01H" to ACTION "05H" corresponding to the number of reservations 4 from no reservation.

Here, the distribution table referred to when the effect control device 300 receives the command of transmission order "2" (command name "variation pattern specification") will be described with reference to FIGS. 119 and 120. FIG. FIG. 119 is a diagram showing an example of a distribution table according to the sixth embodiment (No. 1). FIG. 120 is a diagram illustrating an example of a distribution table according to the sixth embodiment (No. 2).

The effect control device 300 changes the received command from MODE “C0H” to MODE “D2H”.
, it can be determined that the command corresponds to the command name "specify variation pattern". For example, the effect control device 300 can determine that the distribution table 852 is a reference candidate when MODE "C0H" is received. The distribution table 852 is a general term for a group of distribution tables 852a, 852b, 852c, .

The effect control device 300 receives commands from ACTION "01H" to ACTION
If it is one of "7FH", a specific distribution table to be referred to can be uniquely identified from among the distribution tables 852 . For example, the production control device 300, the received command AC
When TION is "01H", distribution table (fluctuation pattern command: 01H) 852
A is specified as a specific sorting table to be referred to.

The distribution table 852a defines the correspondence relationship between the lottery random numbers and detailed variation pattern commands. The distribution table 852a indicates that the possible range of lottery random numbers is from "0" to "999". The lottery random number may be a pseudo-random number extracted from a high-speed counter or the like as long as it has a certain degree of randomness. Also, the distribution table 852a includes ACTION
It indicates that there are six selectable detailed variation pattern commands from "FFFA01H" to "FFFA06H" when "01H" (variation pattern command: 01H) is received.

For example, the detailed fluctuation pattern command "FFFA01H" is a command selected with a probability of 800/1000, and the detailed fluctuation pattern command "FFFA02H" is 50/1000.
This command is selected with a probability of 1000, and the detailed variation pattern command "FFFA03
H" is a command that is selected with a probability of 50/1000, the detailed variation pattern command "FFFA04H" is a command that is selected with a probability of 50/1000, and the detailed variation pattern command "FFFA05H" is a command that is selected with a probability of 25/1000. It is a command selected with a probability of 1000, and the detailed variation pattern command "FFFA06H" is a command selected with a probability of 25/1000.

The effect control device 300 acquires a detailed variation pattern number by referring to the relation table using the detailed variation pattern command as a key. Here, the relationship table will be explained using FIG. 121 . FIG. 121 is a diagram showing an example of a relationship table according to the sixth embodiment.

The relationship table 853 is a table that defines the correspondence between detailed variation pattern commands and detailed variation pattern numbers. A detailed variation pattern command corresponds to a detailed variation mode (rendering mode). For example, the detailed variation pattern command "FFFA01H" corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number "001001", the effect control device 300, the detailed variation pattern number "
001001", the production device 850 is controlled by normal fluctuation as a detailed fluctuation mode.
The detailed fluctuation pattern command "FFFA02H" is the detailed fluctuation pattern number "001002
, the production control device 300 controls the production device 850 by left sliding fluctuation as a detailed fluctuation mode according to the detailed fluctuation pattern number "001002". The detailed fluctuation pattern command "FFFA03H" corresponds to the detailed fluctuation pattern number "001003", and the production control device 300 controls the production device 850 with right sliding fluctuation as a detailed fluctuation mode according to the detailed fluctuation pattern number "001003". . The detailed variation pattern command "FFFA04H" corresponds to the detailed variation pattern number "001004".
control 0. Detailed variation pattern command "FFFA05H" corresponds to detailed variation pattern number "001005", effect control device 300, detailed variation pattern number "00100
5”, the effect device 850 is controlled by special variation as a detailed variation mode. The detailed fluctuation pattern command "FFFA06H" corresponds to the detailed fluctuation pattern number "001006", and the production control device 300 controls the production device 850 with shortened reach fluctuation as a detailed fluctuation mode according to the detailed fluctuation pattern number "001006". .

Note that the relationship table 853 is not limited to the distribution table 852a, but the distribution table 852b.
, 852c, etc., may define the correspondence relationship between detailed variation pattern commands defined in other distribution tables and all detailed variation pattern numbers set in the effect device 850.

It should be noted that the distribution table 852 and the relationship table 853 are the PROM of the effect control device 300
321.
Next, the production control device 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 122 about the production distribution processing executed when receiving the command (command name "variation pattern designation") of the transmission order "2" among the commands (variation system commands) at the time of fluctuation. do. FIG. 122 is a diagram showing a flow chart of effect apportionment processing of the sixth embodiment. Effect distribution processing is step D of received command analysis processing (see FIG. 51).
56 is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300). The control unit executes the effect distribution process when the received MODE is within the range from "C0H" to "D2H".

[Step D311] The control unit acquires the command MODE and the command ACTION.
[Step D312] The controller determines whether or not the command OPTION has been received. Normally, the effect control device 300 does not include the command OPTION in the received command when the command is received from the game control device 100, but when the command is received from the test device 851, the received command It may contain the command OPTION. If the control unit does not receive the command OPTION, it proceeds to step D313 and receives the command OPTI.
When ON is received, the process proceeds to step D315.

[Step D313] The controller selects the distribution table 852 based on the command MODE and command ACTION.
[Step D314] The control section uses the selected distribution table 852 to determine and obtain a detailed variation pattern command through a random number lottery. Thereby, the production control device 300 randomly acquires a detailed variation pattern command when there is no reception of the command OPTION from the game control device 100 .

[Step D315] The control unit acquires the command OPTION. Thereby, the production control device 300 acquires the detailed variation pattern command specified by the test device 851 when there is a reception of the command OPTION from the test device 851 .

[Step D316] The control unit refers to the relationship table 853 and acquires a detailed variation pattern number using the detailed variation pattern command as a key. Thereby, production control device 300 can acquire a detailed variation pattern number regardless of the presence or absence of reception of command OPTION.

[Step D317] The control section executes an effect pattern setting process for setting a specific effect pattern based on the obtained detailed variation pattern number, and ends the effect distribution process.
Such a game machine 10 can reduce the development load of the program of the production control device 300 by making it possible to specify the details of the production control performed by the production control device 300 from the outside. Also, game machine 1
0 does not increase the control load of the game control device 100 even if the details of the performance control performed by the performance control device 300 can be specified from the outside.

For example, when you want to make the production control device 300 execute the production control corresponding to the detailed variation pattern number "001006", the game control device 100, the command MODE and the command ACT
ION can be designated and one can be made to select at random from among the detailed fluctuation modes prescribed|regulated to the distribution table 852a to the production|presentation control apparatus 300. FIG. However, the production control device 300 is not guaranteed how many times the detailed variation pattern number "001006" can be selected. As the content of the presentation becomes more complicated and the number of choices defined in the distribution table 852a increases, the number of trials increases. On the other hand, the production control device 300 is a test device 851
command MODE, command ACTION and command OP
One can be specified and selected from among the detailed variation modes specified in the desired allocation table 852a by specifying TION. Such production control device 300 improves workability in program development and debugging work for production control.

[Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 123 and 124. FIG. Production control device 300 of the sixth embodiment was able to identify a detailed variation mode from the variation pattern specification command including one 3-byte OPTION, production control of modification 1 of the sixth embodiment The device 300 is different in that it can specify a detailed variation mode from a variation pattern specifying command including two or more 3-byte OPTIONS. First, the process of determining the detailed variation mode will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 123 shows Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment.
It is a figure which shows an example of production distribution of.

The effect control device 300 is not limited to the case where the variation pattern command is received once and the distribution by the distribution table 852 is performed only once. I have more to do. For example, the production control device 300, 2
Prepare a sorting table set when sorting more than once. The distribution table set is
Includes a distribution table for each distribution point for distribution. Effect control device 300, MOD
E When a variation pattern command including "C1H" and ACTION "01H" is received, five distribution tables from distribution tables FT1 to FT5 (one form of distribution table 852)
The detailed production of the first half variation is determined by referring to the distribution table set including.

The effect control device 300 receives a variation pattern command including an OPTION corresponding to the number of distribution points. For example, the effect control device 300, OPTION "FFFA11H"
, and when a variation pattern command including OPTION "FFFA22H" and OPTION "FFFA41H" is received, the distribution table FT1 is referred to at the first distribution point, and detailed variation pattern 11 (detailed variation abbreviated pattern number). Next, the effect control device 300 refers to the distribution table FT2 at the distribution point corresponding to the detailed variation pattern 11, and selects the detailed variation pattern 22 (simplified notation of the detailed variation pattern number) according to the OPTION "FFFA22H". . moreover,
Effect control device 300, the distribution table F at the distribution point corresponding to the detailed variation pattern 22
Referring to T4, according to the OPTION "FFFA41H", select the detailed variation pattern 41 (detailed variation pattern number is abbreviated). Then, the effect control device 300 proceeds to select the latter half effect (second half A) corresponding to the detailed variation pattern 41 . In addition, the production control device 300
In the same way as the first half variation, the detailed effect selection for the second half variation (second half A) can be performed.
Even in this case, the effect control device 300 can receive a variation pattern command including an OPTION corresponding to the number of distribution points in the second half variation.

In this way, even if the production control device 300 performs a more complicated production,
By receiving a variation pattern command including an OPTION corresponding to the number of distribution points, it is possible to specify detailed effects corresponding to complicated effects.

If the variation pattern command can include two or more OPTIONS, an end command that can specify the last OPTION may be set. For example, OPT
ION "FFFFFFH" as a dummy command, the effect control device 300, OPTIO
By receiving N "FFFFFFH", it may be determined that no more OPTIONS are received.

Also, if the variation pattern command can include two or more OPTIONS, OPT
ION may be connected by a predetermined command. For example, with "3AH" as a special command, the effect control device 300, after receiving OPTION, performs a special command "3
AH" may be used to determine that an additional OPTION should be received, and the special command "3AH" may not be received to determine that an additional OPTION is not to be received. The special command "3AH" is the character ";" in ASCII code.
, so the testing device 851 can match two or more OPTIO
A variation pattern command can be easily generated from a string containing N.

Also, if the variation pattern command can include two or more OPTIONS, OPT
Although the IONs are connected by a predetermined command, it is also possible to determine the connection and termination of the OPTIONS by an arbitrary data pattern such as a predetermined bit string or a predetermined bit length.

Next, the effect apportioning process of Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 124 is a diagram showing a flow chart of effect distribution processing of Modification 1 of the sixth embodiment. The effect distribution process is a process executed by the control section (for example, CPU 311 of effect control device 300) in step D56 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the effect distribution process when the received MODE is within the range from "C0H" to "D2H".

[Step D321] The control unit acquires the command MODE and the command ACTION.
[Step D322] The controller determines whether or not the command OPTION has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D323 if no command OPTION has been received, and proceeds to step D326 if command OPTION has been received.

[Step D323] The controller selects a distribution table set based on the command MODE and command ACTION.
[Step D324] The control unit determines and acquires a detailed variation pattern command by random number lottery using the first sorting table from the selected sorting table set.

[Step D325] The control section determines whether or not there is a distribution point corresponding to the selected detailed variation pattern command, and whether or not distribution is completed. The control unit proceeds to step D323 if the distribution has not ended (there are distribution points), and to step D328 if the distribution has ended (there are no distribution points).

[Step D326] The controller acquires one command OPTION.
[Step D327] The control unit determines whether or not all command OPTION have been acquired. The control unit proceeds to step D326 if all commands OPTION have not been acquired, and proceeds to step D328 if all command OPTIONs have been acquired.

[Step D328] The control unit refers to the relation table 853 and acquires a detailed variation pattern number using the detailed variation pattern command as a key. Thereby, the production control device 300 can acquire the detailed variation pattern number regardless of whether or not the command OPTION is received, and regardless of the number of distribution points.

[Step D329] The control section executes an effect pattern setting process for setting a specific effect pattern based on the obtained detailed variation pattern number, and ends the effect distribution process.
Such a game machine 10 can reduce the development load of the program of the production control device 300 by making it possible to specify the details of the production control performed by the production control device 300 from the outside. Also, game machine 1
0 does not increase the control load of the game control device 100 even if the details of the performance control performed by the performance control device 300 can be specified from the outside.

It should be noted that, among the OPTIONS, there may be one that designates selection of the detailed variation pattern command by random number lottery without corresponding to the detailed variation pattern command. In this case, the effect control device 300 may determine acquisition of detailed variation pattern commands by command OPTION or acquisition of detailed variation pattern commands by random number lottery for each distribution point. Thereby, the effect control device 300 selects the detailed variation pattern command specified by OPTION for the distribution tables FT1 to FT4 among the distribution tables FT1 to FT5, and the detailed variation pattern determined by random number lottery for the distribution table FT5. command can be selected. Such a gaming machine 10 contributes to improvement in development efficiency of the effect control device 300 .

The gaming machine 10 of the sixth embodiment (including modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The gaming machine 10 includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effect control based on an external command. The production control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321),
and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit stores first table data (for example, a distribution table) that defines the distribution of internal commands (detailed variation pattern commands (OPTION)) and second table data that defines the correspondence between the internal commands and production patterns. store table data (eg, relational tables); When the external command (fluctuation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit uses the first table data to perform a distribution lottery for the internal command, and uses the distributed internal command and the second table data. to determine the performance pattern, and when the external command includes the internal command, the performance pattern (detailed variation pattern number) is determined using the internal command included in the external command and the second table data.

(2) The game machine 10 includes main control means (game control device 100) that performs game control, and subordinate control means (production control device 300) capable of executing production control based on an external command of the main control means.
and The subordinate control means includes a storage section (for example, PROM 321) and a control section (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit stores an internal command (detailed variation pattern command (OPT
Stores first table data (for example, a distribution table) that defines the distribution of ION)) and second table data (for example, a relation table) that defines the correspondence between internal commands and production patterns. . When the external command (fluctuation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit uses the first table data to perform a distribution lottery for the internal command, and uses the distributed internal command and the second table data. to determine the performance pattern, and when the external command includes the internal command, the performance pattern (detailed variation pattern number) is determined using the internal command included in the external command and the second table data.

(3) The game machine 10 includes main control means (game control device 100) for performing game control, and subordinate control means (production control device 300) capable of executing production control based on an external command of the main control means.
and The subordinate control means includes a storage section (for example, PROM 321) and a control section (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit stores an internal command (detailed variation pattern command (OPT
Stores first table data (for example, a distribution table) that defines the distribution of ION)) and second table data (for example, a relation table) that defines the correspondence between internal commands and production patterns. . When the external command (fluctuation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit uses the first table data to perform a distribution lottery for the internal command, and uses the distributed internal command and the second table data. to determine the production pattern (detailed variation pattern number), and the external command includes the first internal command and the connection command (for example, special command "3AH")
is not included, the first internal command and the second table data included in the external command are used to determine the effect pattern, and the first internal command when the external command includes the first internal command and the connection command A performance pattern is determined using a second internal command following the command and the connection command and second table data.

(4) The gaming machine 10 includes an effect control means (effect control device 300) capable of executing effect control based on an external command. The production control means includes a storage unit (for example, PROM 321),
and a control unit (for example, CPU 311). The storage unit stores first table data (for example, a distribution table) that defines the distribution of internal commands (detailed variation pattern commands (OPTION)) and second table data that defines the correspondence between the internal commands and production patterns. store table data (eg, relational tables); When the external command (fluctuation pattern command) does not include the internal command, the control unit uses the first table data to perform a distribution lottery for the internal command, and divides the distributed internal command and the second table data. to determine the production pattern (detailed variation pattern number), and when the external command contains the first internal command and does not contain the connection command (for example, the special command "3AH"), the first internal A production pattern is determined using the command and the second table data, and when the external command includes the first internal command and the connection command, the second internal command following the first internal command and the connection command and the second A performance pattern is determined using the table data of No. 2.

(5) The control unit of (4) determines whether there is a connection command after receiving (obtaining) the first internal command, and receives (obtains) the second internal command when it is determined that there is a connection command. Assume that the second internal command is not received (obtained) when it is determined that there is no connection command.

(6) The control unit of (4) receives (acquires) the connection command as an independent command different from the internal command.
(7) The connection command in (4) is a data pattern corresponding to a predetermined character string of one or more characters.

(8) The connection command of (4) is a predetermined data pattern included in the first internal command.
[Seventh Embodiment]
Next, the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be explained. The game machine 10 of the seventh embodiment enables a required operation by a game hall attendant when the front frame 12 is opened with respect to the outer frame 11 in the installation environment of the game hall. First, a required operating environment for the gaming machine 10 by a game hall attendant will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 125 is a perspective view (No. 1) showing an example of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment. Note that the gaming machines 10 of the first to sixth embodiments also have the same configuration.

125 shows how the game machine 10 opens the front frame 12 with respect to the outer frame 11. FIG. The game machine 10 has an outer frame 11 fixed to a game hall facility generally called an island, and a front frame 12 is opened so that maintenance work can be performed by a staff member. Therefore, gaming machine 1
0 is excellent in workability in the installation environment on the open side rather than on the pivotal support side of the front frame 12 on the outer frame 11 . In particular, in recent game machines, the amount of protrusion of the front-side constituent members of the front frame 12 (for example, the frame decoration device 18 and the upper tray 21) is large, so the front frame 12 is installed in the game hall equipment (for example,
(call lamp, card unit, etc.), and the opening amount of the front frame 12 may be limited.

The required operations by the game hall staff include, for example, setting value confirmation operation, setting value change operation, operation operation including RAM clear operation, maintenance operation including wiring connection confirmation, and the like.

The front frame 12 includes a game control device 100, a performance control device 300, a payout control device 200, and a power supply device 400 on the back side of the front frame 12.例文帳に追加Also, the game control device 100 and the performance control device 300 are provided on the back side of the game board 30 .

The game control device 100 includes a state display device 135, a probability setting value display device 136, a setting value change switch 126, a setting key switch 127, and a RAM initialization switch 112 on the front frame 12.
Prepare to face the back side of the.

The game machine 10 opens the front frame 12 in the installation environment of the game hall, thereby facilitating operation by a game hall attendant. In other words, the game machine 10 makes operation difficult in a state where the front frame 12 is not opened in the installation environment of the game arcade, for example, when a player is playing a game.

The gaming machine 10 enables confirmation of the setting value by the probability setting value display device 136 by accepting the operation of the setting key switch 127 . In addition, the game machine 10 has a state display device 135
makes it possible to check the state of the gaming machine 10 by. In addition, the game machine 10 has a set value change switch 1
26 and the setting key switch 127, the probability setting value display device 1
While displaying the setting value in 36, the setting value can be changed. In addition, the game machine 10 can clear the RAM 111C by accepting the operation of the RAM initialization switch 112 .

Operation of the game machine 10 by such a game hall attendant is performed with the front frame 12 opened in the installation environment of the game hall. Therefore, the game hall attendant performs operation operation by looking into the back side of the front frame 12 in the open state of the front frame 12 . Therefore, the game hall attendant mainly grasps the operation state from the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 provided on the back side of the front frame 12 .

Therefore, the game machine 10 supports the grasp of the operation state of the game hall attendant by means of a performance device provided on the front side of the front frame 12 . Next, the rendering device provided on the front side of the front frame 12 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 126 is a perspective view (Part 2) showing an example of the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

The game machine 10 includes speakers 19a(L), 19a(R), and 19b on the front side of the front frame 12. As shown in FIG. The speakers 19a(L) and 19a(R) are provided on the upper part of the front frame 12 (see FIG. 1). R). Also, the speaker 19b is provided in the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and above the operating portion 24 (see FIG. 1). The speakers 19a(L), 19a(R), and 19b are capable of independently outputting sound. Note that the speaker 19a (L) is mounted on the front frame 1
Although it cannot be observed directly from the back side of the front frame 12, it is located in the upper right part when viewed from the back side of the front frame 12.例文帳に追加Also, the speaker 19a(R) cannot be directly observed from the back side of the front frame 12, but the front frame 12
It is located in the upper left part when viewed from the back side of the . Also, the speaker 19b cannot be directly observed from the back side of the front frame 12, but is located in the lower left part when viewed from the back side of the front frame 12. - 特許庁

The speakers 19a(L), 19a(R), and 19b are provided on the front side of the front frame 12 and play a role in game production, but during operation, support the game parlor attendant's grasp of the operation state by sound output.

The gaming machine 10 also has a display device 41 at the center of the front side of the front frame 12 and at the center of the game board 30 . Although the display device 41 cannot be directly observed from the back side of the front frame 12, it is also positioned at the center when viewed from the back side of the front frame 12. - 特許庁The display device 41 is provided on the front side of the front frame 12 and plays a role in the game performance, but during operational operation, it can guide the operation state of the game parlor attendant to a third party by video output.

Note that these production devices (speakers 19a (L), 19a (R), 19b, display device 41
) is not necessarily provided by the state display device 135 or the probability setting value display device 1
It does not have to have the same amount of information as .36.

Next, the control state after power-on in the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 127 is a diagram showing an example of a control state after power-on in the gaming machine of the seventh embodiment.

The game machine 10 (game control device 100) shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S3 according to the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127 when the power is turned on. The game control device 100 shifts to the control state S0 (setting change state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON when the power is turned on. Also, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S1 (setting confirmation state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON when the power is turned on. Also, the game control device 100, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON, the setting key switch 127
is OFF, the control state is shifted to S2 (RAM clear). In addition, the game control device 100
, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF.
At the time of F, it shifts to the control state S3 (recovery from power failure).

In addition, the game control device 100 turns off the setting key switch 127 in the control state S0.
When it becomes, it shifts to the control state S5 (game state). Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S3 when the setting key switch 127 is turned off in the control state S1. Also, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S5 after clearing the RAM in the control state S2. In addition, when the game control device 100 detects a data abnormality (data abnormality in the power failure inspection area or checksum abnormality in the data backup area) in the control state S3, the control state S4 (
Abnormal), and if no data abnormality is detected in the control state S3 (that is, the data is normal), the control state shifts to S5.

In the control state S0 (setting change state), the game control device 100 clears the RAM and accepts a setting value change operation. The game control device 100 transmits a RAM initialization (RAM clear) command and a probability setting changing command to the effect control device 300 in the control state S0. Thereby, the effect control device 300 is the game control device 100
is in the control state S0, and the RAM clear and setting change state are reported using the effect device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the set value being changed on the probability set value display device 136 . As a result, the game hall attendant can confirm the setting value being changed on the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is being changed by the effect device.

Also, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S0 to the control state S5. Thereby, the production control device 3
00 detects confirmation of the changed setting value, and notifies the confirmation of the setting value using the production device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the determined set value on the probability set value display device 136 . As a result, the game hall attendant can confirm the determined set value on the probability set value display device 136, and can also confirm that the set value has been determined by the effect device.

The game control device 100 is the effect control device 300 in the control state S1 (setting confirmation state).
Send a probability setting confirming command to Thereby, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S1, and notifies the setting confirmation state using the effect device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the setting values set in the probability setting value display device 136 . As a result, the game hall attendant can confirm the setting value set in the probability setting value display device 136 and can confirm the setting confirmation state by the effect device.

Also, the game control device 100 transmits a probability confirmation end command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S1 to the control state S3 (recovery from power failure). Thereby, the effect control device 300 detects the end of the setting confirmation state, and notifies the end of the setting confirmation state using the effect device. Also, the game control device 100 terminates the display of the set values on the probability set value display device 136 . As a result, the game hall attendant can confirm the end of the setting confirmation state on the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting confirmation state has ended by the effect device. In addition, the game control device 100 may not transmit the probability confirmation end command, and the effect control device 300 receives the command ( The end of the setting confirmation state may be detected by receiving a power failure recovery command).

The game control device 100, in the control state S2 (RAM clear), effect control device 300
Send a RAM initialization command to As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S2, and uses the effect device to notify that the RAM has been cleared. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the setting values set in the probability setting value display device 136 . As a result, the game hall attendant can use the probability setting value display device 136
It is possible to confirm the setting value set in , and it is possible to confirm that it is in the setting confirmation state by the effect device.

The game control device 100 transmits a setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 when detecting data abnormality in the control state S3 (recovery from power failure), and ends abnormally. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 has ended abnormally, and guides a setting change instruction using the effect device since the normal setting value is lost. In addition, the game control device 100 puts the probability setting value display device 136 into a non-display state.

The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300 when normal data is detected in the control state S3. Thereby, the production control device 300
It detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S5, and waits for reception of a command for effect control. Also, the game control device 100 hides the probability set value display device 136 and displays the state on the state display device 135 . As a result, the game hall attendant can confirm the transition to the game state, and can confirm the transition to the game state by restarting the game effect in the effect device.

Incidentally, the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 may be a common display device. It may function as

It should be noted that the game machine 10, instead of notifying the effect control device 300 that there was RAM initialization by transmission of the RAM initialization command from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300, during the probability setting changing command You may make it notify the production|presentation control apparatus 300 that there existed RAM initialization with transmission of a probability setting decision command. In this case, the gaming machine 10
Even if transmission of the RAM initialization command to the production|presentation control apparatus 300 from the game control apparatus 100 is abbreviate|omitted, the information regarding RAM clear can be performed.

Next, guidance or notification of the control state in the effect device will be described. First, FIG. 12 shows the transition timing from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state).
8 will be used for explanation. FIG. 128 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when transitioning from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) according to the seventh embodiment.

When the game machine 10 is powered on, the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on, and the setting key switch 1 is turned on.
27 is ON, the control state is shifted to S0, and the RAM is cleared at timing t0.
The gaming machine 10 enters the control state S0 as long as the setting key switch 127 is ON even if the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned OFF at timing t1.

In the gaming machine 10, the setting value is initialized to "0" after the RAM is cleared in the control state S0,
The value is incremented by "1" each time the pressing operation of the set value change switch 126 is detected, and returns to "0" when the maximum set value is exceeded. For example, the game machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 at timing t2 and updates the setting value to "1", and detects the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 at timing t3 and changes the setting value. Update to "2".

The gaming machine 10 detects that the setting key switch 127 is turned OFF at timing t4, confirms the update of the setting value, and shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S5. At this time, the gaming machine 10 uses the effect device to perform notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clearing.

Next, a description will be given of the notification modes of the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the RAM clear. First, the notification mode of the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding RAM clearing in the display device 41, which is one of the rendering devices, will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 129 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of notification regarding setting change and notification regarding RAM clearing in the display device according to the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command that the game control device 100 transmits in the control state S0, and displays the display screen 860 on the display device 41 (
FIG. 129 (1)) is displayed to notify the setting change and the RAM clear. At this time, since the production control device 300 has not yet received a command related to game control, the display of the initial setting (for example, a single front color) is used as a background, and the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 are displayed. indicate. For example, RAM initialization notification display 86
1 includes the display code "01" and the message "RAM has been initialized" in the display contents. In addition, the probability setting changing display 862 includes the display code "02" and the message "Setting value changing operation in progress" in its display contents. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can guide the contents of the notification by the message, and can grasp the detailed control state corresponding to the display code by referring to the instruction manual or the like. Although the game machine 10 includes the display code and the message in the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862, either one of them may be included. Effect control device 300, between the control state S0, RAM
By displaying the initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 , the control state of the game machine 10 can be easily grasped by the display device 41 . Note that the effect control device 300 may display the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting changing display 862 using effects such as blinking display and scroll display.

Effect control device 300, the game control device 100 from the control state S0 to the control state S5 at the timing of the transition (may be the timing immediately before the transition, may be the timing immediately after the transition) probability setting confirmation to be transmitted When the command is received, the display screen 86 on the display device 41
3 ((2) in FIG. 129) is displayed to notify about the setting change. At this time, the effect control device 300 displays the probability setting confirmation display 864 against the background of the display of the initial setting, when the command related to the game control is not yet received. For example, probability setting confirmation display 864
contains the display code "03" and the message "Change of set value accepted" in the display contents. In addition, the effect control device 300 further displays a RAM initialization notification display 861 in order to ensure notification regarding RAM clearing. The effect control device 300 displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 until receiving a command related to game control, so that the control state of the game machine 10 can be easily grasped by the display device 41. enable.
In addition, the production control device 300 uses effects such as blinking display and scroll display to
An initialization notification display 861 and a probability setting confirmation display 864 may be displayed.

The effect control device 300 receives a command related to game control (for example, a customer waiting command) transmitted by the game control device 100 in the control state S5, and displays the display screen 8 on the display device 41.
65 (FIG. 129(3)) is displayed. The effect control device 300 performs notification regarding the setting change until a predetermined notification end trigger is established even after shifting to the control state S5.
At this time, the effect control device 300 displays the probability setting confirmation display 864 against the background of the corresponding in-game display (for example, the customer waiting screen 866) after receiving the command related to the game control. In addition, the effect control device 300 further displays a RAM initialization notification display 861 in order to ensure notification regarding RAM clearing. The effect control device 300 displays the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 until the notification end trigger is established, so that the display device 41 can display the game machine 10 even after the game control is started. To easily grasp a control state. Note that the effect control device 300 may display the RAM initialization notification display 861 and the probability setting confirmation display 864 using effects such as blinking display and scroll display. Note that the notification end trigger can be set for a predetermined period of time (for example, 1 minute) or when a predetermined condition is satisfied (front frame 1
2 blocking detection, game start detection by winning prize detection, etc., execution of a predetermined number of variable display games (for example, execution of variable display of a special game once), push button 25 depression operation detection, etc.).

In addition, in order to ensure that the display device 41 notifies the game hall attendants of the game machine 10, the display of the content of the notification started while the front frame 12 is open is stopped after the end of the predetermined notification after the opening of the front frame 12 is completed. Trigger establishment (for example, detection of elapse of a predetermined period of time, pressing of push button 25, etc.)
You may make it continue until.

Next, a description will be given of the notification mode of the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding RAM clearing in the speakers 19a and 19b (sound output devices), which are one of the production devices. First, FIG. 130 will be described for a notification mode by sound output control for each of a plurality of channels prepared for sound output. FIG. 130 shows a notification and an R
FIG. 11 is a diagram (part 1) showing an example of an informing mode of informing about AM clear;

The production control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting change command from the game control device 100, and notifies from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels prepared for sound output from timing t0. Sound A and notification sound B are output. for example,
The effect control device 300 synchronizes with the channel 1 and the channel 2, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound B (FIG. 130 (1)). Then, the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100, and uses a plurality of channels prepared for sound output from the timing t4 from the speakers 19a and 19b to the notification sound A and the notification sound. C and sound output. For example, the effect control device 300 repeatedly outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C in synchronization with the channel 1 and the channel 2 . Then, the effect control device 300, the notification sound A
, and the notification sound C are repeatedly output, and the sound output from the channel is switched to the game control sound D at timing t6 after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t4.

Note that the notification sound A includes an alarm sound announcing RAM clearing (for example, an electronic sound “Beep, Beep”) and a message notifying RAM clearing (for example, “RAM is initialized”). Note that the notification sound A may include either one of an alarm sound and a message.

Informative sound B includes a warning sound 1 (for example, electronic sound "beep, beep") that informs that the probability setting is being changed, and a message that informs that the probability setting is being changed (for example, "probability setting is being changed"). including. Note that the notification sound B may include either one of the alert sound 1 and a message.

In addition, the notification sound C is a warning sound 2 (for example, an electronic sound "pylori, pylori") that informs that the probability setting has been confirmed, and a message that informs that the probability setting has been confirmed (for example, "probability setting has been changed"). including. Note that the notification sound C may include either one of the alert sound 2 and a message. Also, the game control sound D includes BGM and sound effects corresponding to the game control state.

As a result, the game machine 10 can prevent the notification sound A and the notification sound B from being output simultaneously. In addition, the game machine 10 can suppress the simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound C. Therefore, the game machine 10 can suitably guide the worker who is in the process of changing the probability setting that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting is being changed. In addition, during the probability setting change operation, the gaming machine 10
Since the notification sound for RAM clearing does not interfere with the notification sound during the probability setting change, it is possible to suitably inform the operator that the probability setting is being changed. In addition, the game machine 10 can suitably guide the worker who has changed the probability setting that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting has been confirmed (completed). In addition, when the probability setting is confirmed, the game machine 10 does not interfere with the notification sound for RAM clearing when the probability setting is confirmed, so that the operator can be informed that the probability setting is confirmed. can. Such gaming machine 10
can provide a good working environment for the operator who performs the setting operation.

In addition, the effect control device 300, when outputting the notification sound A and the notification sound B from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels, may make the notification sound different for each channel. For example, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs the sound from the timing t0, the notification sound A is assigned to the channel 1, and the notification sound is assigned to the channel 2. Allocate B (Fig. 130 (2)
). At this time, the effect control device 300 alternately outputs so as not to output the sound at the timing when the notification sound A and the notification sound B overlap. Moreover, the production control device 300 allocates the notification sound A to the channel 1 and the notification sound C to the channel 2 when receiving the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputting the sound from the timing t4. At this time, the production control device 3
00 is set to alternate output so as not to output the sound at the timing when the notification sound A and the notification sound C overlap. And the production control device 300 is the timing t after a predetermined time has elapsed from the timing t4
6, the channels 1 and 2 are switched to the game control sound D.

In addition, the effect control device 300, when outputting the notification sound A and the notification sound B from the speakers 19a and 19b using a plurality of channels, makes the notification sound different for each channel and outputs the different notification sound. An interval period Δt may be provided in between (Fig. 1
30(3)). For example, when the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs the sound from the timing t0, the notification sound A is assigned to the channel 1, and the notification sound is assigned to the channel 2. Allocate B. After outputting the notification sound A from the channel 1, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound B from the channel 2 after waiting for the interval period Δt. Similarly, the production control device 300
After the notification sound B is output from the channel 2, the notification sound A is output from the channel 1 after waiting for the interval period Δt. Henceforth, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 repeats the same cycle. Note that the effect control device 300 may set the interval period Δt as a silent period, or set it as an output period of a predetermined sound (for example, the interval sound “picone”). In addition, the production control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and the timing t4
When more sounds are output, the notification sound A is assigned to channel 1, the notification sound C is assigned to channel 2, and the interval period Δt is set when the notification sounds A and C are alternately output. And the production|presentation control apparatus 300 switches the channels 1 and 2 to the game control sound D from the timing t6 which passed predetermined time from the timing t4.

In addition, the effect control device 300 sets the interval period Δt when switching the notification sound even when repeatedly outputting the notification sound in synchronization with the channel 1 and the channel 2 as shown in FIG. 130 (1) You may make it

Note that the gaming machine 10 may assign a specific channel to a specific speaker. For example, of the speakers 19a(L) and 19a(R), the speaker 19a(L) outputs the notification sound set to channel 1 and does not output the notification sound set to channel 2. FIG. Also, the speaker 19a(R) outputs the notification sound set to channel 2 and does not output the notification sound set to channel 1. FIG.

Next, FIG. 131 will be described for a notification mode by sound output control for each of a plurality of speakers prepared for sound output. FIG. 131 is a diagram (part 2) showing an example of a notification mode of notification regarding a setting change and notification regarding RAM clearing in the sound output device according to the seventh embodiment.

The production control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100, and a plurality of speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R) prepared for sound output from timing t0. , 19b using at least two of the information sound A and the information sound B
and output sound. For example, the effect control device 300 is the speaker L (speaker 19a (L)
) and the speaker R (speaker 19a(R)) synchronously output the notification sound A and the notification sound B repeatedly (FIG. 131 (1)). Then, the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100, and outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C from the speaker L and the speaker R from the timing t4. For example, the effect control device 300 synchronizes with the speaker L and the speaker R, and outputs the notification sound A and the notification sound C repeatedly. Then, the effect control device 300 changes the sound output from the speaker L and the speaker R, which repeatedly output the notification sound A and the notification sound C, to the game control sound D from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has passed from the timing t4.
switch to

As a result, the game machine 10 can prevent the notification sound A and the notification sound B from being output simultaneously. In addition, the game machine 10 can suppress the simultaneous output of the notification sound A and the notification sound C. Therefore, the game machine 10 can suitably guide the worker who is in the process of changing the probability setting that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting is being changed. In addition, during the probability setting change operation, the gaming machine 10
Since the notification sound for RAM clearing does not interfere with the notification sound during the probability setting change, it is possible to suitably inform the operator that the probability setting is being changed. In addition, the game machine 10 can suitably guide the worker who has changed the probability setting that the RAM has been cleared and that the probability setting has been confirmed (completed). In addition, when the probability setting is confirmed, the game machine 10 does not interfere with the notification sound for RAM clearing when the probability setting is confirmed, so that the operator can be informed that the probability setting is confirmed. can. Such gaming machine 10
can provide a good working environment for the operator who performs the setting operation.

In addition, when outputting the notification sound A and the notification sound B from the speaker L and the speaker R, the effect control device 300 may make the notification sound different for each speaker. For example, the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs the sound from the timing t0, assigning the notification sound A to the speaker L, and the notification sound to the speaker R B is allocated (FIG. 131 (2)). At this time, the production control device 3
00 is set to alternate output so that the notification sound A and the notification sound B are not output at the timing when they overlap each other. In addition, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs sound from timing t4, the notification sound A is assigned to the speaker L, and the speaker R
to assign the notification sound C. At this time, the effect control device 300 alternately outputs so as not to output the sound at the timing when the notification sound A and the notification sound C overlap. Then, the effect control device 300 switches the speakers L and R to the game control sound D from timing t6 after a predetermined time has elapsed from timing t4.

In addition, when outputting the notification sound A and the notification sound B from the speaker L and the speaker R, the effect control device 300 makes the notification sound different for each speaker, and the interval period between outputting the different notification sounds. Δt may be provided (FIG. 131(3)). for example,
When the performance control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100 and outputs the sound from the timing t0, the notification sound A is assigned to the speaker L, and the notification sound B is assigned to the speaker R. assign. And the production control device 300, the speaker L
After outputting the notification sound A from the speaker R, the notification sound B is output from the speaker R after waiting for the interval period Δt. Similarly, after outputting the notification sound B from the speaker R, the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L after waiting for the interval period Δt. Henceforth, the production|presentation control apparatus 300 repeats the same cycle. Note that the effect control device 300 may set the interval period Δt as a silent period, or set it as an output period of a predetermined sound (for example, the interval sound “picone”). In addition, when the production control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100 and outputs sound from the timing t4, the notification sound A is assigned to the speaker L, the notification sound C is assigned to the speaker R, and the notification sound A and the notification sound C are alternately output, an interval period Δt is set. Then, the production control device 300, the timing t
4, the speakers L and R are switched to the game control sound D at timing t6 after a predetermined time has elapsed.

In addition, the effect control device 300, as shown in FIG. 131 (1), the speaker L and the speaker R
Interval period Δt may be set when switching the notification sound when repeatedly outputting the notification sound in synchronization with .

In the game machine 10, the speakers for outputting different notification sounds are set according to the left and right arrangement of the game machine 10, but they may be set according to the vertical arrangement or speaker characteristics such as high-pitched and low-pitched sounds.

Next, FIG. 132 will be described for a notification mode when different notification sounds are simultaneously controlled to be output from a plurality of speakers prepared for sound output. FIG. 132 is a diagram showing an example of a notification mode of a setting change notification and a RAM clearing notification in the sound output device of the seventh embodiment (
3).

The production control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command from the game control device 100, and a plurality of speakers 19a (L) and 19a (R) prepared for sound output from timing t0. , 19b using at least two of the information sound A and the information sound B
and to control the sound output. For example, the effect control device 300 starts sound output control from timing t0, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L (speaker 19a (L)). In addition, the effect control device 300 starts sound output control from timing t0, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound B from the speaker R (speaker 19a (R)). Then, the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting confirmation command from the game control device 100, switches the notification sound from timing t4, starts sound output control, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound A with the speaker L. In addition, the effect control device 300 switches the notification sound from timing t4, starts sound output control, and repeatedly outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R. Then, the effect control device 300 outputs sound from the speaker L that repeatedly outputs the information sound A and the speaker R that repeatedly outputs the information sound C from the timing t6 when a predetermined time has passed from the timing t4. It switches to the game control sound D and starts sound output control.

As a result, the gaming machine 10 controls the output of the notification sound A and the notification sound B at the same time. In this way, the effect control device 300 simultaneously performs sound output control of different notification sounds, thereby eliminating the need for control with different timings, thereby reducing the control load.

The output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output-controlled will be described with reference to FIGS. 133 and 134. FIG. FIG. 133 is a diagram showing an example (Part 1) of the output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output-controlled according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 134 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of an output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output-controlled according to the seventh embodiment.

The effect control device 300 starts sound output control from timing t4, outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L (speaker 19a (L)), and outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R (speaker 19a (R)). (Fig. 133 (1)).

At this time, the speaker L is on the pivot side of the front frame 12 and the speaker R is on the open end side of the front frame 12 . Therefore, when an operator (for example, a game hall attendant) opens the front frame 12 and performs setting change work or setting confirmation work, the sound output from the speaker R is higher than the sound output from the speaker L.
The sound output from is easier to hear.

Therefore, even when the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output at the same time (FIG. 133 (2)), the effect control device 300 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the support side, By outputting the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, the notification effect of the notification sound related to the work of the worker is ensured.

As a result, the game machine 10 can maintain a required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300 . In addition, the effect control device 300 outputs a notification sound with a small degree of relation to the work of the worker from the speaker L on the shaft support side, and outputs a notification sound with a high degree of relation to the work of the worker from the speaker on the open end side. Although the sound is output from R, a speaker for outputting the notification sound may be set according to the degree of relevance to the work of the worker, the work procedure, and the like.

In addition, the effect control device 300 may be configured to output sounds exclusively so that the notification sound A and the notification sound C are not simultaneously output ((3) in FIG. 133). For example, production control device 300
When the sound output control is started from the timing t4, the notification sound A is immediately output from the speaker L on the support side, and the sound is silenced at the timing t4a. On the other hand, when starting sound output control from timing t4, the effect control device 300 outputs sound in a mute state, waits for timing t4a, and outputs notification sound C from speaker R on the open end side.

According to this, the game machine 10 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the shaft support side, outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, and outputs the notification sound related to the worker's work. The notification effect of is more suitably secured. Note that the production control device 300 first outputs sound from the speaker L on the support side and then outputs sound from the speaker R on the open end side later, but first outputs sound from the speaker R on the open end side. Therefore, the sound may be output from the speaker L on the support side after a delay. In addition, the production control device 300 first outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L,
Although the notification sound C is output from the speaker R with a delay, the notification sound C, which has a high degree of relevance to the work of the worker, is output from the speaker L first, and the degree of relevance to the work of the worker is small. The notification sound A may be output from the speaker R later.

In addition, if the sound output at the maximum volume of the informative sound A and the sound output at the maximum volume of the informative sound C are exclusive, the effect control device 300 allows the sound output to overlap at some timings. You may For example, when production control device 300 starts sound output control from timing t4,
The notification sound A is immediately output from the speaker L on the support side, and is silenced at timing t4b ((4) in FIG. 133). On the other hand, when starting sound output control from timing t4, the effect control device 300 increases the volume while fading in from the mute state at timing t4 to the maximum volume state at timing t4b, and makes the notification sound C on the open end side. Sound is output from the speaker R.

In addition, when the effect control device 300 starts sound output control from timing t4, the notification sound C is immediately output from the speaker L on the support side, and the sound is silenced while fading out from timing t4c (Fig. 134 (1)). . On the other hand, when starting the sound output control from timing t4, the effect control device 300 outputs sound in a mute state, waits for timing t4c, and outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the pivot side.

According to this, the gaming machine 10 outputs the notification sound A from the speaker L on the shaft support side, and outputs the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side, while the maximum volume of the two notification sounds overlaps. I have nothing to do. Therefore, the game machine 10 ensures both the notification effect of the two notification sounds and the notification effect of the notification sound related to the work of the worker.

In addition, the effect control device 300 fades in one notification sound (Fig. 133 (4))
Alternatively, the fade-out (FIG. 134(1)) has been described, but the two notification sounds may be faded-in or faded-out. For example, production control device 3
00 may output the informational sound A and the informational sound C by fading in, may output the informational sound A and the informational sound C by fading out, and may output the informational sound A by fading in. The information sound C may be output by fading out, or the information sound C may be output by fading in and the information sound A may be output by fading out.

In addition, the effect control device 300 fades in one notification sound (Fig. 133 (4))
Alternatively, fade-out (FIG. 134(1)) is assumed, but one of the notification sounds may be faded in and faded out, or both (all) notification sounds may be faded in and faded out.

In addition, when starting sound output control from timing t4, the effect control device 300 outputs the information sound A at a suppressed volume from the speaker L on the support side, and outputs the information sound C in a mute state. Waiting for timing t4d, a sound is output from the speaker R on the open end side at a louder volume (for example, maximum volume) than the notification sound A (FIG. 134 (2)).

As a result, the game machine 10 can maintain a required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300 . Although the effect control device 300 waits for the timing t4d to output the notification sound C, the sound may be output immediately from the timing t4.

In addition, in FIG. 133 (3), the effect control device 300 exclusively outputs the information sound A and the information sound C so that the sound is not output at the same time, but instead of muting one of the sounds You may make it produce the sound output suppressed by pressing. For example, when the effect control device 300 starts sound output control from timing t4, when sound output control of notification sound A at timing t4 from speaker L on the support side, unsuppressed sound (for example, maximum volume) is output. Then, after waiting for timing t4a, the suppression sound is output. On the other hand, when performing sound output control of the notification sound C from the speaker R on the open end side at the timing t4, the production control device 300 outputs the suppressed sound, waits for the timing t4a, and outputs the non-suppressed sound. Note that the suppression sound may be one that suppresses the volume, or one that suppresses the notification mode (replacement or deletion of a notification message or warning sound, alert sound, insertion of an interval period, etc.). .

In addition, when the effect control device 300 starts the sound output control from the timing t4, the volume of the notification sound A becomes maximum at the timing t4e, and the volume of the notification sound A becomes minimum at the timing t4f. You can let it run. At this time, the effect control device 300 periodically changes the volume of the notification sound C so that the volume of the notification sound C becomes minimum at the timing t4e and the volume of the notification sound C becomes maximum at the timing t4f (FIG. 134 (3) ).

As a result, the game machine 10 can maintain a required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300 . In addition, the effect control device 300 set a half-cycle time lag to the timing at which the notification sound A and the notification sound C reach the maximum volume, but the timing at which the notification sound A and the notification sound C reach the maximum volume does not overlap. If so, it is not limited to a half cycle.

In addition, the effect control device 300, when outputting the sound exclusively so as not to output the notification sound A and the notification sound C at the same time, in the notification example shown in FIG. ,
A difference may be provided in the number of notifications ((4) in FIG. 134). For example, production control device 3
00 outputs notification sound A three times from speaker L on the support side, and outputs notification sound C from speaker R on the open end side by timing t4g from timing t4 to timing t4g.
Outputs a loop sound.

As a result, the game machine 10 can maintain a required notification effect while suppressing the control load of the effect control device 300 . Also, the gaming machine 10 can provide a difference between the notification effects of the notification sound A and the notification sound C. FIG. It should be noted that the effect control device 300, the notification sound A and the notification sound C by different the number of times of notification
However, it is also possible to provide a difference between the notification effects of the notification sound A and the notification sound C by changing the notification time.

Although the case of outputting the notification sound A and the notification sound C has been described, a combination of other notification sounds such as the notification sound A and the notification sound B can also be applied. Also, the case where the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output by the speaker L and the speaker R has been described, but the speaker 19a (L
), 19a(R) and the speaker 19b, other combinations of speakers are also applicable. Also, the case where the notification sound A and the notification sound C are output from the speaker L and the speaker R has been described, but a combination of two or more channels such as channel 1 and channel 2 is also applicable.

Next, power-on notification setting processing according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG.
FIG. 135 is a diagram showing a flowchart of power-on notification setting processing according to the seventh embodiment. The power-on notification setting process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D62 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). The control unit executes the power-on notification setting process when the received command is a RAM initialization command, a probability setting changing command, a probability setting confirming command, or a probability setting change instruction command.

[Step D331] The control unit determines whether or not a probability setting changing command has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D332 if the probability setting changing command is received, and proceeds to step D334 if not received.

[Step D332] The controller sets the RAM clear notification and the setting changing (probability setting changing) notification. Thereby, the production control device 300 performs the RAM clear notification and the probability setting change notification by the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.). Note that the control unit simultaneously performs the RAM clear notification and the probability setting changing notification to reduce the control load.

[Step D333] The control unit sets a termination trigger for the RAM clearing notification and setting changing (probability setting changing) notification. For example, the termination trigger of the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification is transition from the control state S0 to the control state S5. After setting the termination triggers of the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification, the control unit ends the power-on notification setting process.

[Step D334] The control unit determines whether or not a probability setting confirming command has been received. The control unit proceeds to step D335 if the probability setting confirming command is received, and proceeds to step D337 if not received.

[Step D335] The control unit sets the setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) notification. As a result, the effect control device 300 uses a notification device (for example, the display device 41 or the speaker 19a
, 19b, etc.) to notify during confirmation of probability setting.

[Step D336] The control unit sets a trigger for ending the setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) notification. For example, the end trigger of the notification during probability setting confirmation is from the control state S1 to the control state S
3. The control unit ends the power-on notification setting process after setting the termination trigger of the notification during probability setting confirmation.

[Step D337] The controller determines whether or not a RAM initialization command has been received.
The control unit proceeds to step D338 when the RAM initialization command is received, and proceeds to step D340 when not received.

[Step D338] The controller sets RAM clear (RAM initialization) notification. As a result, the effect control device 300 uses a notification device (for example, the display device 41 or the speaker 19a
, 19b, etc.) to perform RAM clear notification.

[Step D339] The control section sets a RAM clear notification end trigger. For example, the end trigger of the RAM clearing notification is the elapse of a predetermined period of time (e.g., elapse of 30 seconds) after the transition from the control state S2 to the control state S5. After setting the end trigger of the RAM clearing notification, the control unit ends the power-on notification setting process.

[Step D340] The control unit sets the probability setting change instruction notification because the received command is neither a RAM initialization command, a probability setting change command, nor a probability setting confirmation command, that is, a probability setting change instruction command. do. Thereby, the production control device 300 performs the probability setting change instruction notification by the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a, 19b, etc.). After setting the probability setting change instruction notification, the control unit ends the power-on notification setting process. In addition, since the control unit of the game control device 100 waits for the restart by prohibiting RAM access after transmitting the probability setting change instruction command, the control unit of the effect control device 300 is the end trigger of the probability setting change instruction notification. does not require a set of

As a result, the game machine 10 can make a notification according to the control state when the power is turned on.
Next, power-on notification termination setting processing according to the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 136 . FIG. 136 is a diagram showing a flowchart of power-on notification end setting processing according to the seventh embodiment. The power-on notification end setting process is a process executed by the control unit (for example, the CPU 311 of the effect control device 300) in step D62 of the received command analysis process (see FIG. 51). When the notification set in the power-on notification setting process is being executed, the control unit
Alternatively, when the notification set in the power-on notification end setting process is being executed, the power-on notification end setting process is executed.

[Step D341] The control unit determines whether or not the end trigger of the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification has been established. The control unit proceeds to step D342 when the end triggers of the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification are established, and proceeds to step D344 when they are not established.

[Step D342] The controller terminates the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification, and
Set clear notification and setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) notification. Thereby, the production control device 3
00 is a notification device (for example, display device 41, speakers 19a, 19b, etc.)
Clear notification and probability setting determination notification are performed.

[Step D343] The control unit sets a trigger for ending RAM clear notification and probability setting (probability setting confirmation) notification. For example, the trigger for ending the RAM clearing notification and the probability setting confirmation notification is a predetermined period of time (for example, 30 seconds) from the start of the RAM clearing notification and the probability setting confirmation notification. After setting the end triggers of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting confirmation notification, the control unit ends the power-on notification end setting process.

[Step D344] The control unit determines whether or not the termination trigger of the RAM clear notification and the setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) notification has been established. The control unit proceeds to step D345 when the end triggers of the RAM clear notification and the probability setting determination notification are established, and proceeds to step D346 when they are not established.

[Step D345] The controller terminates (clears) the RAM clear notification and the probability setting determination notification, and terminates the power-on notification termination setting process.
[Step D346] The control unit determines whether or not a trigger for ending the notification of setting confirmation (probability setting confirmation) has been established. The control unit proceeds to step D347 when the trigger for ending the notification during probability setting confirmation is established, and proceeds to step D348 when not established.

[Step D347] The control unit terminates (clears) the setting checking (probability setting checking) notification.
Then, the power-on notification termination setting process is terminated.
[Step D348] The control unit determines whether or not a RAM clear notification end trigger has been established. The control unit advances to step D349 when the RAM clear notification end trigger is established, and terminates the power-on notification end setting process when the trigger is not established.

[Step D349] The controller terminates (clears) the RAM clear notification, and terminates the power-on notification termination setting process.
As a result, the game machine 10 can make a notification according to the control state when the power is turned on.

In the power-on notification setting process, the control unit assumed that the RAM was initialized by receiving the probability setting changing command because the probability setting change involved clearing the RAM. In addition to the reception of the RAM initialization command, reception of the RAM initialization command may be added to the determination requirements. That is, the control unit determines whether or not it has received the RAM initialization command and the probability setting changing command. If the change command and the probability setting changing command are not received, the process may proceed to step D334.

In this case, when the control unit receives the RAM initialization command, the other command (for example,
Depending on whether or not the probability setting changing command) has been received, the RAM clear notification mode and notification timing can be changed. For example, the effect control device 300, when not receiving the command during probability setting change at the time of receiving the RAM initialization command, the notification device (for example, the display device 41 and speakers 19a, 19b, etc.) performs the RAM clear notification, RAM When the probability setting changing command is received at the time of receiving the initialization command, the notification device (for example, the display device 41, the speakers 19a and 19b, etc.) performs the RAM clearing notification and the setting changing notification.

In addition, the control unit determines whether or not to change the notification mode of RAM clearing and the timing of notification,
When the RAM initialization command was received, it was determined whether or not other commands were received.
It may be determined whether or not another command (for example, probability setting changing command) has been received within a predetermined time from the reception of the M initialization command.

A change in the notification mode of the RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of such a RAM initialization command will be described with reference to FIGS. 137 to 140. FIG. FIG. 137 shows the RA of the seventh embodiment.
FIG. 10 is a diagram showing an example (part 1) of a notification mode of RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the M initialization command; FIG. 138 shows the R data corresponding to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command of the seventh embodiment.
It is a figure which shows an example (part 2) of the alerting|reporting aspect of AM clear alerting|reporting. FIG. 139 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of notification mode of RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command according to the seventh embodiment. FIG. 140 is a diagram showing an example (part 4) of a notification mode of RAM clear notification according to the reception condition of the RAM initialization command according to the seventh embodiment.

When the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 137
In (1)), a RAM clearing notification is given by a notification device (for example, display device 41, speakers 19a and 19b, etc.) until timing t10.

In addition, when the effect control device 300 receives the probability setting changing command and the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (Fig. 137 (2)), the notification device informs the RAM clearing and setting change (probability setting change medium notification). Effect control device 300, timing t after performing notification during setting change until timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received
11 to timing t12. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification from timing t12 to timing t13 delayed by a period T2.

In this way, if the effect control device 300 has not received the probability setting changing command (
In FIG. 137 (1)) and when the probability setting changing command is received (FIG. 137 (2)), R
A different notification period is set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the AM initialization command. Such a gaming machine 10 can reliably perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence or absence of the setting change notification.

In addition, the effect control device 300, when receiving the probability setting changing command and the RAM initialization command after power-on (FIG. 137 (3)), the RAM clear is non-notified by the notification device and the setting change is notified. Do. The effect control device 300 performs setting confirmation notification only for a period T1 from timing t11 to timing t12 after performing notification during setting change until timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received. The effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification from timing t12 to timing t13 delayed by a period T2.

In this way, if the effect control device 300 has not received the probability setting changing command (
In FIG. 137 (1)) and when the probability setting changing command is received (FIG. 137 (3)), R
A different notification start time is set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the AM initialization command. Such a gaming machine 10 can reliably perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence or absence of the setting change notification.

Note that the game machine 10 changes the notification period and the notification start time of the RAM clear notification depending on whether or not the probability setting changing command (or other command such as the probability setting confirmation command) is received. The notification end time, notification sound volume, notification content, notification frequency, and other notification modes of the clear notification may be changed.

It should be noted that the effect control device 300, when receiving the RAM initialization command after power-on,
A predetermined delay period .DELTA.t may be provided, and RAM clear notification may be performed by the notification device until timing t10 (FIG. 138(1)).

Moreover, the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on, and when the probability setting changing command is received during the predetermined delay period Δt set, the delay period Δt has elapsed since the reception of the RAM initialization command. Afterwards, the RAM clear notification and the setting change notification may be performed by the notification device ((2) in FIG. 138). The effect control device 300 performs setting confirmation notification only for a period T1 from timing t11 to timing t12 after performing notification during setting change until timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received. On the other hand, the effect control device 300 performs RAM clear notification from timing t12 to timing t13 delayed by a period T2.

Even in such a case, the effect control device 300 does not receive the probability setting changing command (FIG. 138 (1)) and when the probability setting changing command is received (FIG. 138 (
In 2)), different notification periods are set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the RAM initialization command. Such a gaming machine 10 can reliably perform the RAM clear notification regardless of the presence or absence of the setting change notification.

In addition, the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on and receives the command during the probability setting change during the predetermined delay period Δt (Fig. 139 (1)), by the notification device RAM clearing is set to non-notification, and notification during setting change is performed. The effect control device 300 performs setting confirmation notification only for a period T1 from timing t11 to timing t12 after performing notification during setting change until timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received. The effect control device 300 is the timing t delayed by the period T2 from the timing t12
RAM clear notification is performed until 13.

In this way, if the effect control device 300 has not received the probability setting changing command (
In FIG. 138 (1)) and when the probability setting changing command is received (FIG. 139 (1)), R
A different notification start time is set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the AM initialization command. Such a gaming machine 10 can reliably perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence or absence of the setting change notification.

Note that the game machine 10 changes the notification period and the notification start timing of the RAM clear notification depending on whether or not the probability setting changing command (other command) is received, but the notification end time, the notification volume, and the notification The content, notification frequency, and other notification modes may be changed.

Moreover, the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on, and when the probability setting changing command is received during the predetermined delay period Δt set, the delay period Δt has elapsed since the reception of the RAM initialization command. Afterwards, the RAM clearing may be set to non-notification by the notification device, and the notification during setting change may be performed (Fig. 139 (2)). The effect control device 300 performs setting confirmation notification only for a period T1 from timing t11 to timing t12 after performing notification during setting change until timing t11 when the probability setting confirmation command is received. Since the effect control device 300 executes the probability setting change and the RAM clear as a pair, the RAM clear which is naturally performed may be omitted by the notification during the setting change. That is, even if the effect control device 300 receives the RAM initialization command after power-on, depending on whether or not the probability setting changing command (may be another command such as a probability setting confirmation command) is received Determines whether or not to notify RAM clear. As a result, the gaming machine 10 can omit the RAM clearing notification that is understood as a matter of course by the setting changing notification. Such a gaming machine 10 can simplify the content of notification, making it easier for the operator to grasp the situation.

In addition, when the production control device 300 receives a RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 140 (1)), the speakers L, R, B (for example, the speaker 19a (L), the speaker 1
9a (R), speaker 19b (B)), the RAM clear notification is performed at the maximum volume until timing t20.

In addition, when the production control device 300 receives the probability setting changing command and the RAM initialization command after the power is turned on (FIG. 140 (2)), the speaker L (for example, the speaker 19a
(L)), the volume (
For example, RAM clear notification is performed at half the maximum volume), and a predetermined silence period (for example, 10 seconds) is provided until timing t22, and then at maximum volume for a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds)
RAM clear notification is performed. In addition, the effect control device 300 is a speaker R (for example,
The setting changing notice (probability setting changing notice) is performed at the maximum volume until the timing t21 when the probability setting confirmation command is received by the speaker 19a (R)). In addition, production control device 300
is set confirmation notification (probability setting confirmation notification) at maximum volume from timing t21 to timing t22 when the probability setting confirmation command is received by speaker B (for example, speaker 19b)
do

In this way, if the effect control device 300 has not received the probability setting changing command (
In FIG. 140 (1)) and when the probability setting changing command is received (FIG. 140 (2)), R
A different notification period, different notification device, and different notification strength (for example, volume) are set for the RAM clear notification based on the reception of the AM initialization command. Such a gaming machine 10 can reliably perform the RAM clear notification according to the presence or absence of the setting change notification.

Next, a modification of the control state after power-on in the gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment explained with reference to FIG. 127 will be explained with reference to FIG. 141. FIG. FIG. 141 is a diagram showing an example of a control state after power-on in the gaming machine of Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment.

The game machine 10 (game control device 100) shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S3 according to the input states of the RAM initialization switch 112 and the setting key switch 127 when the power is turned on. The game control device 100 shifts to the control state S0 (setting change state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON and the setting key switch 127 is ON when the power is turned on. Also, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S1 (setting confirmation state) when the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is ON when the power is turned on. Also, the game control device 100, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 is ON, the setting key switch 127
is OFF, the control state is shifted to S2 (RAM clear). In addition, the game control device 100
, when the power is turned on, the RAM initialization switch 112 is OFF and the setting key switch 127 is OFF.
At the time of F, it shifts to the control state S3 (recovery from power failure).

In addition, the game control device 100 turns off the setting key switch 127 in the control state S0.
When it becomes, it shifts to the control state S2 (RAM clear). Further, the game control device 100 shifts to the control state S3 when the setting key switch 127 is turned off in the control state S1. In addition, the game control device 100, after the RAM is cleared in the control state S2, the control state S5 (
game state). In addition, the game control device 100 detects a data abnormality (data abnormality in the power failure inspection area or checksum abnormality in the data backup area) in the control state S3, and shifts to the control state S4 (abnormal), and detects data abnormality in the control state S3. If not detected (that is, the data is normal), the control state is shifted to S5.

The game control device 100 is the effect control device 300 in the control state S0 (setting change state).
Send a probability setting changing command to Thereby, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S0, and notifies the setting change state using the effect device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the set value being changed on the probability set value display device 136 . As a result, the game hall attendant can confirm the setting value being changed on the probability setting value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting is being changed by the effect device.

Also, the game control device 100 transmits a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S0 to the control state S2 (RAM clear). As a result, the production control device 300 detects confirmation of the changed set value, and notifies the establishment of the set value using the production device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the determined set value on the probability set value display device 136 . As a result, the game hall attendant can confirm the determined set value on the probability set value display device 136, and can also confirm that the set value has been determined by the effect device. In addition, the game control device 100 may transmit a probability setting confirmation command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S0 to the control state S2.

The game control device 100 is the effect control device 300 in the control state S1 (setting confirmation state).
Send a probability setting confirming command to Thereby, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S1, and notifies the setting confirmation state using the effect device. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the setting values set in the probability setting value display device 136 . As a result, the game hall attendant can confirm the setting value set in the probability setting value display device 136 and can confirm the setting confirmation state by the effect device.

Also, the game control device 100 transmits a probability confirmation end command to the effect control device 300 when shifting from the control state S1 to the control state S3 (recovery from power failure). Thereby, the effect control device 300 detects the end of the setting confirmation state, and notifies the end of the setting confirmation state using the effect device. Also, the game control device 100 terminates the display of the set values on the probability set value display device 136 . As a result, the game hall attendant can confirm the end of the setting confirmation state on the probability set value display device 136, and can confirm that the setting confirmation state has ended by the effect device. In addition, the game control device 100 may not transmit the probability confirmation end command, and the effect control device 300 receives the command ( The end of the setting confirmation state may be detected by receiving a power failure recovery command).

The game control device 100, in the control state S2 (RAM clear), effect control device 300
Sends a RAM initialization (RAM clear) command to Thereby, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S2, and uses the effect device to
It notifies that there was an AM clear. In addition, the game control device 100 displays the setting values set in the probability setting value display device 136 . As a result, the game hall attendant can confirm the setting value set in the probability setting value display device 136 and can confirm the setting confirmation state by the effect device.

The game control device 100 transmits a setting change instruction command to the effect control device 300 when detecting data abnormality in the control state S3 (recovery from power failure), and ends abnormally. As a result, the effect control device 300 detects that the game control device 100 has ended abnormally, and guides a setting change instruction using the effect device since the normal setting value is lost. In addition, the game control device 100 puts the probability setting value display device 136 into a non-display state.

The game control device 100 transmits a power failure recovery command to the effect control device 300 when normal data is detected in the control state S3. Thereby, the production control device 300
It detects that the game control device 100 is in the control state S5, and waits for reception of a command for effect control. Also, the game control device 100 hides the probability set value display device 136 and displays the state on the state display device 135 . As a result, the game hall attendant can confirm the transition to the game state, and can confirm the transition to the game state by restarting the game effect in the effect device.

Incidentally, the state display device 135 and the probability setting value display device 136 may be a common display device. It may function as

Next, guidance or notification of the control state in the effect device of the gaming machine 10 of Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment will be described. First, from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S2 (RA
M clear), the timing of transition to the control state S5 (game state) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 142 is a diagram showing an example of a timing chart when transitioning from the control state S0 (setting change state) to the control state S5 (game state) in Modification 1 of the seventh embodiment.

When the game machine 10 is powered on, the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned on, and the setting key switch 1 is turned on.
27 is ON, the control state S0 is entered. The gaming machine 10 enters the control state S0 as long as the setting key switch 127 is ON even if the RAM initialization switch 112 is turned OFF at timing t1. Since the gaming machine 10 accepts a RAM clearing execution reservation by shifting to the control state S0, the input state of the RAM initialization switch 112 after shifting to the control state S0 does not matter.

The gaming machine 10 increments the preset setting value by "1" every time it detects the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126, and returns to "0" when the maximum setting value is exceeded. For example, the game machine 10 detects the pressing operation of the setting value change switch 126 at timing t2, updates the preset setting value "5 (maximum value)" to "0", and changes the setting value at timing t3. The pressing operation of the switch 126 is detected and the set value is updated to "1".

The game machine 10 detects that the setting key switch 127 is turned OFF at timing t4, confirms the update of the setting value, shifts from the control state S0 to the control state S2, clears the RAM in the control state S2, and controls after clearing the RAM. It shifts to state S5. However, the set value storage area is outside the initialization target area and is not initialized.

In the control state S0, the gaming machine 10 uses the effect device to notify about the setting being changed, and in and after the control state S2, uses the effect device to notify about the confirmation of the setting change and to notify about RAM clearing.

Next, the gaming machine 10 of Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 143 to 145. FIG. In the gaming machine 10 of Modified Example 2 of the seventh embodiment, the output mode of the notification sound differs depending on the installation position of the speaker. FIG. 143 is a diagram showing an example (Part 1) of the output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output-controlled according to modification 2 of the seventh embodiment.
FIG. 144 is a diagram showing an example (part 2) of an output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output-controlled according to Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment. FIG. 145 is a diagram showing an example (part 3) of an output mode of different notification sounds when different notification sounds are simultaneously output-controlled according to Modification 2 of the seventh embodiment.

The gaming machine 10, as shown in FIG. 143(1), uses the support side speaker (for example, the speaker 19a (L)) and the open end side speaker (for example, the speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12. Notification during setting change and RAM clear notification are performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12 and makes different notification modes depending on whether the front frame 12 is closed or opened.

For example, when the front frame is closed, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "Setting change in progress. RAM cleared. (hereinafter loop)" from both the support-side speaker and the open end-side speaker. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "RAM cleared. RAM cleared. Settings are being changed. (Hereinafter referred to as a loop)." Outputs a sound "The setting is being changed. The setting is being changed. The RAM has been cleared. (Loop below)" is output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the pivot-side speaker and the open end-side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the contents of the notification to the outside. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds for the pivotal speaker and the open end speaker.
A worker who works with the door open is notified from an open-end side speaker located at a position where it is easy to hear, with weight given to the notification content highly related to the work content. In addition, the game machine 10 has a front frame 1
To balance the notification effect of different notification contents by weighting notification contents having low relevance to work contents from a support-side speaker located at a position where it is difficult for a worker working with 2 open.

Note that the weighting of the notification content is not limited to the number of repetitions (the number of notifications), but may be the notification time or the notification volume, or may be anything else as long as the notification effect can be differentiated. .

In addition, the game control device 100 can detect the opening of the front frame 12 by monitoring the input state of the main body frame opening detection switch 64, and the effect control device 300 detects the opening of the front frame 12. Game control The opening of the front frame 12 can be detected by receiving a required command from the device 100 .

In this way, the gaming machine 10 can detect setting change work, setting confirmation work, and RAM clearing work by the operator by detecting the opening of the front frame 12 . It should be noted that the detection of opening of the front frame 12 is one aspect of detection of setting change work, setting confirmation work, and RAM clearing work by the operator, and other methods may be used.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 143(2), the game machine 10 has a working position remote speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and a working position near speaker (for example, speaker 1) on the front frame 12.
In 9b), the probability setting changing notification and the RAM clearing notification may be performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12 and makes different notification modes depending on whether the front frame 12 is closed or opened.

For example, when the front frame is closed, the game machine 10 emits a notification sound "Setting change in progress. RAM cleared. (hereinafter loop)" from both the work position remote speaker and the work position vicinity speaker.
to output In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 emits a notification sound "RAM cleared. RAM cleared. Setting change in progress. (Loop below)" from the working position remote speaker.
is output, and a notification sound "The setting is being changed. The setting is being changed. The RAM
Cleared. (following loop)” is output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the work position remote speaker and the work position vicinity speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the content of the notification to the outside. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 outputs different notification sounds for the work position remote speaker and the work position vicinity speaker, and the worker who works with the front frame 12 open can easily hear the work. A notification content highly related to the work content is weighted and notified from the speaker near the position. In addition, the game machine 10 weights information content that is less relevant to the work content from the work position remote speaker located at a position where it is difficult for the worker who is working with the front frame 12 open to hear different content content. Balance the notification effect.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 144(1), the gaming machine 10 has a support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12.
), the probability setting changing notification and the RAM clearing notification may be performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12 and makes different notification modes depending on whether the front frame 12 is closed or opened.

For example, when the front frame is closed, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "Setting change in progress. RAM cleared. (hereinafter loop)" from both the support-side speaker and the open end-side speaker. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound "The settings are being changed. RAM is cleared. (hereinafter looped)" from the pivot side speaker, and a notification sound "
Settings are being changed. (following loop)” is output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the pivot-side speaker and the open end-side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the contents of the notification to the outside. In addition, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds for the support-side speaker and the open end-side speaker when the front frame is opened. At this time, the gaming machine 10 makes the notification sound of the pivot-side speaker the same when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is opened, and makes the notification sound of the open end-side speaker when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is opened. Wrong. Also, game machine 1
0 means that when the front frame is opened, multiple notification sounds from the support side speaker (probability setting change notification sound and RAM
Clear notification sound) is output to secure the notification effect of a plurality of notification sounds. On the other hand, the gaming machine 10
When the front frame is opened, a notification sound (probability setting changing notification sound) highly related to the work content is output from the open end side speaker to assist the workability of the operator.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 144(2), the gaming machine 10 has a support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12.
), the probability setting changing notification and the RAM clearing notification may be performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12 and makes different notification modes depending on whether the front frame 12 is closed or opened.

For example, when the front frame is closed, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "Setting change in progress. RAM cleared. (hereinafter loop)" from both the support-side speaker and the open end-side speaker. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound "RAM cleared. (Hereinafter referred to as a loop)" from the pivot side speaker, and outputs a notification sound "The setting is being changed" from the open end speaker.
(following loop)” is output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the pivot-side speaker and the open end-side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the contents of the notification to the outside. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds for the pivotal speaker and the open end speaker.
A worker who works with the door open is notified of information highly relevant to the work content from an open end side speaker located at a position where it is easy to hear. In addition, the game machine 10 notifies the operator who is working with the front frame 12 open from the pivot-side speaker located at a position where it is difficult for the operator to hear the notification contents that are less relevant to the work contents.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145(1), the gaming machine 10 has a support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12.
), the probability setting changing notification and the RAM clearing notification may be performed. At this time, the gaming machine 10 detects the opening of the front frame 12 and makes different notification modes depending on whether the front frame 12 is closed or opened.

For example, when the front frame is closed, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound "Setting change in progress. RAM cleared. (hereinafter loop)" from both the support-side speaker and the open end-side speaker. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 outputs the notification sound "Front frame is being opened. RAM cleared. (hereinafter loop)" from the pivot side speaker, and the notification sound "Setting change" is output from the open end speaker. It is in. (Loop below)" is output.

In this way, the gaming machine 10 outputs the same notification sound from the pivot-side speaker and the open end-side speaker when the front frame is closed, and notifies the contents of the notification to the outside. In addition, the gaming machine 10 outputs different notification sounds for the support-side speaker and the open end-side speaker when the front frame is opened. At this time, the gaming machine 10 includes the notification sound regarding opening of the front frame in the notification sound of the support-side speaker. In addition, the game machine 10 makes the notification sound of the open end side speaker different between when the front frame is closed and when the front frame is opened.
In addition, the gaming machine 10 outputs a plurality of notification sounds (front frame opening notification sound and RAM clear notification sound) from the support side speaker when the front frame is opened, thereby ensuring the notification effect of the plurality of notification sounds. On the other hand, the game machine 10 outputs a notification sound (probability setting changing notification sound) highly relevant to the work content from the open end side speaker when the front frame is opened, thereby assisting the workability of the operator.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145(2), the gaming machine 10 has a support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12.
), the notification volume may be different. For example, when the front frame is closed, the gaming machine 10 outputs a notification sound at a preset volume from both the pivot-side speaker and the open-end speaker. In addition, when the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 outputs the notification sound from the support-side speaker at a suppressed volume that is lower than the set volume, and from the open-end speaker with an emphasized volume that is higher than the set volume (
For example, output the notification sound at the maximum volume). As a result, the game machine 10 assists the workability of the worker while ensuring the notification effect of the notification sound to those other than the worker.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 145(3), the gaming machine 10 has a support side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (L)) and an open end side speaker (for example, speaker 19a (R)) of the front frame 12.
) may use different channels. For example, the game machine 10 has a maintenance channel (maintenance channel) among a plurality of channels that can be used for sound output.
assign. The gaming machine 10 permits output of notification sounds from all channels from both the support side speaker and the open end side speaker when the front frame is closed. When the front frame is opened, the game machine 10 restricts the output of the notification sound from the maintenance channel in the support-side speaker, and permits the output of the notification sound from the maintenance channel in the open-end speaker. As a result, the game machine 10 assists the workability of the worker while ensuring the notification effect of the notification sound to those other than the worker.

The gaming machine 10 of the seventh embodiment (including modifications) described above has the following features in one aspect.
(1) The game machine 10 includes information holding means (for example, the backup power supply unit 420, the RAM 1
11C), setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) And, the notification control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, the notification device). The information holding means can hold the game information before the power shutdown. The setting means can change the setting to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means executes a first video output for notifying confirmation of the setting change and a second video output for notifying clearing of the game information with an overlapping period, and executes the first video output for notifying the confirmation of the setting change. , and the second sound output for notifying the clearing of the game information are performed while excluding the overlap period (
128 to 131).

(2) The game information of (1) includes setting information.
(3) The game machine 10 includes information holding means (for example, the backup power supply unit 420, the RAM 1
11C), setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) And, the notification control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, the notification device). The information holding means can hold the game information before the power shutdown. The setting means can change the setting to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means includes a first video output for notification of confirmation of the setting change, a second video output for notification of clearing of the game information, a first sound output for notification of confirmation of the setting change, and the game information. A second sound output for notifying clear is provided with an overlapping period, and at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output is faded to eliminate overlap of the maximum volume output period. Sound output is executed (see FIGS. 128, 129, 133(4), 134(1) and 134(3)).

(4) The game information of (3) includes setting information.
(5) The notification control means of (3) performs sound output by fading in at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output to eliminate overlap of the maximum volume output period ( See FIG. 133 (4)).

(6) The notification control means of (3) executes sound output by fading out at least one of the first sound output and the second sound output to eliminate overlap of the maximum volume output period (
See FIG. 134(1)).

(7) The gaming machine 10 includes information holding means (for example, the backup power supply unit 420, the RAM 1
11C), setting means (for example, game control device 100, setting value change switch 126, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) And, the notification control means (for example, the game control device 100, the effect control device 300, the notification device). The information holding means can hold the game information before the power shutdown. The setting means can change the setting to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means includes a first video output for notification of confirmation of the setting change, a second video output for notification of clearing of the game information, a first sound output for notification of confirmation of the setting change, and the game information. When the second sound output for notifying clearing is performed with an overlapping period, the volume of one of the first sound output and the second sound output is increased compared to the volume of the other. A priority period in which the notification of is given priority over the other notification (for example, timing t4 to t4b in FIG. 133 (1),
Priority is given to sound output from speaker L before and after timing t4e in FIG. 134 (3), and priority is given to sound output from speaker R before and after timing t4f in FIG. 134 (3). is executed (see FIGS. 133(4) and 134(1), (2) and (3)).

(8) The notification control means of (7) increases the volume of one of the first sound output and the second sound output as compared with the volume of the other, thereby (for example, the sound output from the speaker L is prioritized before and after timing t4e in FIG. 134 (3)), and the volume of the other is increased compared to the volume of the other. A second priority period (priority is given to sound output from the speaker R before and after timing t4f in FIG. 134 (3)) in which notification is given priority over one notification is set as an overlap period, and sound output is performed (FIG. 134 (3
), see (4)).

(9) The game machine 10 has a main body (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front part (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15. good), a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), and a second sound output unit (for example,
speaker 19a (R)) and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RA
M111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, set value change switch 126
, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136), clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112), notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification equipment) and The front part is axially attached to the front side of the main body so that it can be opened and closed with one side as an axis. The first sound output portion is provided on the pivoting side of the front portion. The second sound output portion is provided on the open end side of the front portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power shutdown. The setting means can change the setting to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means performs notification regarding the setting change and notification regarding the clearing of the game information, the second sound output section performs either the notification regarding the setting change or the notification regarding the clearing of the game information (Fig. 128, Fig. 128). 129, see Figures 143 to 145).

(10) The game machine 10 has a main body (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front part (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15. good)
, a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, R
AM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, set value change switch 12
6, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136) and clearing means (for example,
Game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) and notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The front part is axially attached to the front side of the main body so that it can be opened and closed with one side as an axis. The first sound output portion is provided on the pivoting side of the front portion. The second sound output portion is provided on the open end side of the front portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power shutdown. The setting means can change the setting to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means controls the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the clearing of the game information to the first
When performing with the sound output unit and the second sound output unit, the first sound output unit is set to the first notification mode,
The second sound output unit is set to a second notification mode different from the first notification mode (Figs. 128, 129,
143 to 145).

(11) The game information of (9) or (10) includes setting information.
(12) The game machine 10 has a main body (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front part (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15. good)
, a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, R
AM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, set value change switch 12
6, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136) and clearing means (for example,
Game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) and notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The front part is axially attached to the front side of the main body so that it can be opened and closed with one side as an axis. The first sound output portion is provided on the pivoting side of the front portion. The second sound output portion is provided on the open end side of the front portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power shutdown. The setting means can change the setting to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. When the notification control means performs the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the clearing of the game information, the second sound output portion outputs either the notification regarding the setting change or the notification regarding the clearing of the game information in the open state in which the front portion is opened. A priority notification state in which one of them is prioritized is set (see FIGS. 128, 129, and 143 to 145).

(13) The game machine 10 has a main body (for example, an outer frame (support frame) 11) and a front part (for example, a front frame (main body frame) 12 or a glass frame (transparent member holding frame) 15. good)
, a first sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (L)), a second sound output unit (for example, speaker 19a (R)), and information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, R
AM111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, set value change switch 12
6, setting key switch 127, probability setting value display device 136) and clearing means (for example,
Game control device 100, RAM initialization switch 112) and notification control means (for example, game control device 100, effect control device 300, notification device). The front part is axially attached to the front side of the main body so that it can be opened and closed with one side as an axis. The first sound output portion is provided on the pivoting side of the front portion. The second sound output portion is provided on the open end side of the front portion. The information holding means can hold the game information before the power shutdown. The setting means can change the setting to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification control means sets the first sound output section and the second sound output section to the first notification mode when performing notification regarding the setting change and notification regarding clearing of the game information in the open state in which the front portion is opened. When the notification regarding the setting change and the notification regarding the clearing of the game information are performed in the closed state in which the front portion is closed, the first sound output portion and the second sound output portion are set to the first notification mode and the second sound output section. 2 notification mode (see FIGS. 128, 129, and 143 to 145).

(14) The game machine 10 includes game control means (game control device 100) and effect control means (effect control device 300). The game control means performs game control. The production control means receives a command from the game control means, and the production means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19
b, board rendering device 44, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.). The game control means includes information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM 111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, set value change switch 126, setting key switch 127
, probability setting value display device 136) and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM
initialization switch 112) and notification means (CPU section 110, output section 130). The information holding means can hold the game information before the power shutdown. The setting means can change the setting to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification means notifies the effect control means that the game information has been cleared by a first command (for example, a RAM clear command), and notifies the effect control means that the game performance setting has been changed by a second command (for example, a probability Setting confirmation command) notifies the effect control means. The effect control means includes first notification means, second notification means, and notification timing control means. The first notification means receives the first command and notifies, by the performance means, that the game information has been cleared. The second notification means receives the second command and notifies, by the performance means, that the setting of the game performance has been changed. The notification timing control means is a first
137 to 139).

(15) The game machine 10 includes game control means (game control device 100) and effect control means (effect control device 300). The game control means performs game control. The production control means receives a command from the game control means, and the production means (display device 41, speakers 19a, 19
b, board rendering device 44, frame decoration device 18, board decoration device 46, etc.). The game control means includes information holding means (for example, backup power supply unit 420, RAM 111C) and setting means (for example, game control device 100, set value change switch 126, setting key switch 127
, probability setting value display device 136) and clearing means (for example, game control device 100, RAM
initialization switch 112) and notification means (CPU section 110, output section 130). The information holding means can hold the game information before the power shutdown. The setting means can change the setting to one of two or more different game performances. The clearing means clears the game information held when the setting is changed. The notification means notifies the effect control means that the game information has been cleared by a first command (for example, a RAM clear command), and notifies that the setting of the game performance is being changed by a second command (for example, probability Setting confirmation command) notifies the effect control means. The effect control means includes first notification means, second notification means, and notification timing control means. The first notification means receives the first command and notifies, by the performance means, that the game information has been cleared. The second notification means receives the second command and notifies, by the performance means, that the setting of the game performance is being changed. The notification timing control means is a first
137 to 139).

(16) The notification timing control means of (14) or (15) changes the execution start timing of the first notification means (see FIGS. 137(1) and (3)).
(17) The notification timing control means of (14) or (15) changes the execution period of the first notification means (see (1), (2) and (3) in FIG. 137).

Note that the processing functions described above can be realized by a computer. In that case, a program describing the processing contents of the functions that the gaming machine of the embodiment should have is provided. By executing the program on a computer, the above processing functions are realized on the computer. A program describing the processing content can be recorded in a computer-readable recording medium. Computer-readable recording media include magnetic storage devices,
There are optical discs, magneto-optical recording media, semiconductor memories, and the like. Magnetic storage devices include hard disk devices (HDD), flexible disks (FD), magnetic tapes, and the like. Optical disks include DVD (Digital Versatile Disk), DVD-RAM, CD (Compact Disk)-RO
M/RW (ReWritable) and the like. MO (Magneto-Optical disk) is used as a magneto-optical recording medium.
etc.

When distributing the program, for example, DVD, C
Portable recording media such as D-ROM are sold. It is also possible to store the program in the storage device of the server computer and transfer the program from the server computer to another computer via the network.

A computer that executes a program stores, for example, a program recorded on a portable recording medium or a program transferred from a server computer in its own storage device. The computer then reads the program from its own storage device and executes processing according to the program. The computer can also read the program directly from the portable recording medium and execute processing according to the program. Also, the computer can execute processing according to the received program every time the program is transferred from a server computer connected via a network.

In addition, at least part of the above processing functions are DSP (Digital Signal Processor), A
SIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), PLD (Programmable Logic De
vice) or other electronic circuits.

It should be noted that the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine as shown in the disclosed embodiments, but may include, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, majang ball gaming machines, and the like. It can be applied to all game machines using game balls and slot machines which are game machines using medals.

Also, the disclosed embodiments should be considered as illustrative in all respects and not restrictive. Also, the configurations of the above-described embodiment and modifications may be combined and applied. The scope of the invention is indicated by the appended claims rather than by the foregoing description,
All changes within the meaning and range of equivalence to the claims are intended to be included.

10 Game Machine 41 Display Device 100 Game Control Device 300 Effect Control Device

Claims (2)

A game control means for performing game control;
A production control means for receiving a command from the game control means and controlling the production means,
The game control means is
information holding means capable of holding information before power shutdown;
setting means capable of setting game performance;
validity determination means for determining the validity of the information held in the information holding means when power is turned on;
initialization means for initializing the information held in the information holding means at the time of setting;
A first command notifies the effect control means that the information held in the information holding means has been initialized, and a second command notifies the effect control means that the game performance has been set. and notification means for notifying the effect control means of a third command based on the fact that the validity of the information held in the information holding means is denied by the validity determination means,
The information holding means includes a game control work area and a game control stack area related to information related to game control , and a non-game control work area and a non-game control stack area related to information not related to game control. , including
The legitimacy determination means uses the information held in the game control work area as an object of the determination of legitimacy, and includes the game control stack area, the non-game control work area, and the non-game control stack. Excluding the information held in the area from the determination of validity,
The game control means is
When a first condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the game performance can be changed to a first control state in which the game performance can be set by the setting means, and when the second condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. The information held in the information holding means can be changed to a second control state in which the information can be initialized, and when the third condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the game performance can be confirmed. enable transition to a predetermined power failure restoration state when none of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition are satisfied when the power is turned on, and in the first control state Enabling transition from the first control state to the second control state when the termination condition is satisfied, enabling transition from the third control state to the predetermined power failure recovery state when the termination condition is satisfied in the third control state,
When the legitimacy of the information held in the information holding means is denied by the legitimacy determination means in the predetermined power failure recovery state , the game is stopped in a game stop state, waiting for power cutoff, and starting from the power cutoff. If the first condition is not satisfied even if the power is newly turned on, the game is stopped again and the power is turned off, and
The production control means is
a first notification means for receiving the first command and for notifying by the presentation means that the information held in the information holding means has been initialized;
a second notification means for receiving the second command and notifying by the effect means that the game performance has been set;
a third notification means for receiving the third command and for notifying, by the presentation means, guidance corresponding to an abnormality in the information held in the information holding means;
Amusement machines including. A game control means for performing game control;
A production control means for receiving a command from the game control means and controlling the production means,
The game control means is
information holding means capable of holding information before power shutdown;
setting means capable of setting game performance;
validity determination means for determining the validity of the information held in the information holding means when power is turned on;
initialization means for initializing the information held in the information holding means at the time of setting;
A first command notifies the performance control means that the information held in the information holding means has been initialized, and a second command informs the performance control means that the game performance is in a settable state. a notification means for notifying the effect control means of a third command based on the fact that the validity of the information held in the information holding means is denied by the validity determination means,
The information holding means includes a game control work area and a game control stack area related to information related to game control , and a non-game control work area and a non-game control stack area related to information not related to game control. , including
The legitimacy determination means uses the information held in the game control work area as an object of the determination of legitimacy, and includes the game control stack area, the non-game control work area, and the non-game control stack. Excluding the information held in the area from the determination of validity,
The game control means is
When a first condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the game performance can be changed to a first control state in which the game performance can be set by the setting means, and when the second condition is satisfied when the power is turned on. The information held in the information holding means can be changed to a second control state in which the information can be initialized, and when the third condition is satisfied when the power is turned on, the game performance can be confirmed. enable transition to a predetermined power failure restoration state when none of the first condition, the second condition, and the third condition are satisfied when the power is turned on, and in the first control state Enabling transition from the first control state to the second control state when the termination condition is satisfied, enabling transition from the third control state to the predetermined power failure recovery state when the termination condition is satisfied in the third control state,
When the legitimacy of the information held in the information holding means is denied by the legitimacy determination means in the predetermined power failure recovery state , the game is stopped in a game stop state, waiting for power cutoff, and starting from the power cutoff. If the first condition is not satisfied even if the power is newly turned on, the game is stopped again and the power is turned off, and
The production control means is
a first notification means for receiving the first command and for notifying by the presentation means that the information held in the information holding means has been initialized;
a second notification means for receiving the second command and for notifying that the settable state is being established by the effect means;
a third notification means for receiving the third command and for notifying, by the presentation means, guidance corresponding to an abnormality in the information held in the information holding means;
Amusement machines including.

Images